Anda di halaman 1dari 311

GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

FAPT Ladder for PC

Operators Manual
B-66131EN/05 Japan 1995

Warnings and notices for this publication


Warning

GFLE-003

In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters. However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities. Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be regarded as impossible.

Notice
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide every contingency in connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made. GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for purpose shall apply. The following are Registered Trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation CIMPLICITY Genius

The following are Trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation Alarm Master CIMSTAR Field Control Genet Helpmate LogicMaster Modelmaster PowerMotion ProLoop PROMACRO Series Five Series 90 Series One Series Six Series Three VuMaster Workmaster

Copyright 1998 FANUC Ltd. Authorized Reproduction GE Fanuc Automation Europe S.A.
All Rights Reserved No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form. All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.

CONTENTS

I.

BASICS

(NORMAL

OPERATIONS) l-1

1.

OVERVIEW

......................................................

2.

INSTALLATION 2.1 Operating 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.2

................................................... .......................................... Environment environment environment ............... ........................... ._f .............

1-5 1- 6 1- 7 l-10 l-11

PC9801 operating

IBM PC/AT operating Procedure

Installation

..........................................

3.

ACTIVATION

....................................................

l-15

4.

BASICOPERATION 4.1 4.2 4.3

..q ....................... ........................................... Menu Configuration ..................................... Common System Operations Model Setting ................................................

.....................

l-17 l-17 l-19 l-21

5.

OPERATION 5.1 Editing 5.1 .l 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.1.4 5.1.5 5.1.6 5.2 5.3 Printout

.................................................... ..................................................... Title data editing ........................................ ...................................

l-22 l-22 l-25 l-26 l-60 l-68 l-70 l-73 l-85 1 - 94 l-95

Ladder diagram editing

............................... Symbol and comment editing ........................................ Message editing I0 module editing ....................................... .................................

System parameter editing

.................................................... ................................................. ............................................. set function .............

Compilation 5.3.1 5.3.2

Operation Password

(PMCRAlRA3/RB3/RB4RB5/RB6/RC3!RC4/NB!NB2) 5.3.3 5.3.4 Changing the Order of Subprograms .........................

l-99
1 - 103

It is possible to choose output data (Symbol/Comment. Net comment) to ROM format file ............. l-103 l-105 l-109 l-110 l-110 l-112 to the model ....... 1-113 1-113 l-116 ................................ The list of source program ........................................ DOS command .............................................. ............................................ to split files ................................... program according Operation Outputting Converting Merge

5.3.5 5.3.6 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.5 Link

Decompilation

a step sequence

..............................................

......................................................

5.6 InputiOutput. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6.1 5.6.2 5.6.3 5.6.4 ROM writers (PMC writer, FA writer) Transfer Transfer Transfer to and from PMC-L/M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AB.C.!E) A, . .

l-119 1-122 1-124 1-128 131

(FANUC Series 0)

to and from PMC-P (FANUC Power Mate-MODEL to and from PMC-N!NA (FANUC Series 15MODEL

-MODELB) 56.5 5.6.6 5.6.7 5.6.8 5.6.9 5.7 input/Output Transfer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . for PMC-QA (FANUC SYSTEM F-MODEL D Mate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and memory card . . . ................. . . . . .

l-

1-134 l-140 1-142 1-147 1-149 l-150 l-150 l-152 1-153 1-157 1-166 l-170 1-171

to and from PMC-R series/PAl/PA3/NB!QC in the personal computer format)

Memory card interface

Handy File + 3.5 floppy disk (MS-DOS FLOPPY CASSETTE Editing ADAPTER

+ 3.5 floppy disk (P-G format)

Mnemonic 5.7.1 5.7.2 5.7.3 5.7.4 5.7.5 5.7.6 5.7.7

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . of a source program to a mnemonic of a mnemonic file format file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Conversion Conversion Mnemonic

file to a source program

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . is selected when setting a model

Sample mnemonic Sample mnemonic

files (single-format) files (all-format)

The note if the step sequence User batch file execution

function

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

II.

APPLICATIONS

(NOTES

ON THE PC ENVIRONMENT) .................. .................. 2-l 2-l 2-l 2-2 2-4 2-4 2-5 2-5 2-5 2-6 2-7 2-8 2-8 2-9 ............ 2-11 2-11 2-12 2-14 2-14 ................... 2-14 2-15 2-16 2-16

1. COMMON 1.1 1.l .l 1.1.2

OPERATIONS

FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PCAT Data between the P-G and PC ...............................

Function for Transferring Command

input during startup settings

Communications Protocol

...................................

1.1.3 1.1.4 1.1.5 1.1.6 1.1.7 1.1.8 1.1.9 1.2

............................................... ........................................... ................................... ............................... ............................... ............................... ................................. Program editing .......................... ........................ ..........................

BUSY control

Data start and end codes Data conversion Transmission Error detection Error detection

(return codes)

and receive data and messages and handling

Convert the PMC Type of Sequence 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 Converting

by system parameter

Convert with signal address converter Using data in a sequence

program for another program

1.3 1.4

Standard Symbol Data Changing 1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3

......................................... ................................... name ..........................

Printer Output Format

Changing

the paper selection

Setting the top margin

.................................... the LADDER net

Setting the spacing between

1.4.4 Setting the printer model and print paper 1.4.5 1.4.6 Setting the line spacing Setting the left margin

.......................

................................... ....................................

1.4.7 1.4.8 1.4.9 1.4.10 1.4.11 1.4.12 1.4.13 1.4.14 1.4.15 1.4.16 1.4.17 1.4.18 1.4.19

Setting the title of printout Setting the cross-reference Setting the cross-reference Specifying

................................. list output format guidance list output information list output format information ....

2-19 2 - 19 2 - 20 2 - 20 .... 2-21 2-21 2 - 21 2 - 22 2-22 2-22 2 - 23 2-23 2-23

................ ................. information

the cross-reference

Setting the cross-reference Specifying Specifying

list readiwrite list linefeed

coil guidance

the cross-reference the cross-reference

..................... ...................

list page break ...............................

Setting the output format guidance Setting the output information Setting the output format

...........................

.................................. ...........................

Setting the read/write coil guidance Setting line feed Setting form feed

........................................ .......................................

III.THE

STEP SEQUENCE

FUNCTIONS 3-l 3-l 3- 1 3- 1 3- 2 3-3 3-4 3-4 3-6 3- 6 3- 9 3- 9 3 - 10

1.

OVERVIEW 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5

...................................................... ....................................... .........................

WhatisaStepSequence? Programming

with the Step Sequence Method ................................... A Program Configuration Screen ............................. The Configration of a Sequence Program DataFlow

2.

................................................... SETTING A MODEL ................................................ 2.1 Operation .................................................... EDITING 3.1 3.2 ........................................................ ............................................... .......................................

3.

Basic Operation

Creating a Step Sequence 3.2.1 3.2.2

Creating a subprogram

..................... of the step sequence ........................... Creating a step sequence program

APPENDIX

APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX

1 DATA TRANSFER 2 FUNCTION

CABLES

.................................. THE PMC-L/M WITH RAM ............

Al - 1 A2 - 1 A3 - 1 ONLY) ............ ......... NB, AND QC) A4 - 1 A5 - 1 A6 - 1 A7............... 1

FOR OPERATING

3 ERROR MESSAGES 4 MODULAR

...................................... (PMC-RA3/RB3/RC3 PROCEDURE (FOR THE FS20)

PROGRAMMING OPERATING

5 BOOT SYSTEM 6 MEMORY 7 CAUTIONS

CARD COMPATIBILITY FOR USING THE O/S MESSAGE TABLE

(FOR THE PMC-RAl!RA3, ............................. DATA (CHGMES)

8 TOOL FOR CHANGING 9 SOFTWARE lOMANAGING 11 SYSTEM VERSION A SOURCE

A8 - 1 A9 - 1 AlO1

................................ .......................... .............

PROGRAM

CONFIGURATION

FILE %%?oFLSET.CNF..

Al 1 - 1 A121

12 INQUIRY FORM

.........................................

I.

BASICS
(NORMAL OPERATIONS)

1. OVERVIEW

1. OVERVIEW
This manual describes offline programming are designed the software system products listed below which are included sequence program in the FAPT LADDER These software

for FANUC

PMC

generation.

products

to run on standard personal computers.

Personal computer JEC PC9801

Name FAPT LADDER PMC-L/M/P FAPT LADDER PMC-N FAPT LADDER PMC-RB/RC

Specification A08B-9200-J500#JP A08B-9200-J501 #JP

Remarks For the NEC PC9801 Series and compatible machines language (Japanese version)

A08B-9200-J502#JP

BM PC/AT

FAPT LADDER PMC-UM/P FAPT LADDER PMC-N FAPT LADDER PMC-RB/RC

A08B-9201 -JSOO#EN A08B-9201-J501#EN A08B-9201-J502#EN

For IBM PC/AT and compatible machines

(English language version)

This manual explains are specific

procedures

required

to install, activate,

and operate the software computers.

above that and

to the system

designed

for use with personal

For PMC operations

how to create PMC sequence

programs,

refer to the manuals listed below.

FANUC PMC-MODEL

K/UM!P Manual (LADDER language) B-551 93E

Programming FANUC PMC-MODEL N

Programming FANUC PMC-MODEL

Manual (LADDER language)

B-61013E

PA1 :PA3:RAl RA2!RA3/RBRB2!RB3iRB4!RBSRBG;RC!RC3RC4!NBNB2 Manual (LADDER language) B-61 863E

Programming

Inquiry form If you have any questions after reading this operators at Appendix 12 to consult manual and the manuals us the questions. listed above,

use the inquiry form attached

l-l

1. OVERVIEW

The following

abbreviations

are used in this manual for PMC models.

Abbreviations PMC-UM!P * PMC-L * PMC-M * PMC-P Pfk-N PMC-R Series * PMC-RAl * PMC-RA2 * PMC-RA3 PMC-RB PMCRB2 ._ *

PMC Models

FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL

L M P N

FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PM&MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL

RAl RA2 RA3 RB RB2 RB3 RB4 RB5 RB6 RC RC3 RC4 PA1 PA3 QA QC NA NB NB2

* PMC-RB3 . PMC-RB4 PMC-RB5 PMC-RC

* PMC-RB6

* PMGRC3 * PMCRC4 PMC-PA1 PMC-PA3 PMC-QA PMC-QC PMC-NA PMC-NB PMC-NB2

1-2

1. OVERVIEW

The major functions

of the software are listed below.

(1) Sequence program input. display, and editing (2) Transmission to and from PMC (RAM), and PMC verification
(3) ROM (EPROM, (4) Sequence ROM cassette, and ROM modules) write, read, and verification program print-out

. . . . . . . . . . .,................................ RS232C

>

(-NC

Machine PMC RS232C 3 DVDO

Tool

FLOPPY CASSETTE /Handy File

Personal computer Floppy disk NEC PC9801 IBM PC/AT

Input/Edit sequence program

Memory card

Memory c=e interface

card

Drawing

1-3

1. OVERVIEW

Operation

flow for FAPT LADDER activation

Reference

chapter/section

Prepare personal computer. +

MS-DOS,

and FAPT LADDER

Install MS-DOS 4 Create directory for FAPT LADDER 1 Install FAPT LADDER + Install device drivers @et CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXECBAT) J. Reset personal computer Section 2.2

Section 2.1

Section 5.6

Activate FAPT LADDER Set model (PMC) Operations includinq editing

Chapter 3

Section 4.3

Chapter 5

J/
End? Yes JI Terminate FAPT LADDER

l-4

2. INSTALLATION

2.

INSTALLATION
software is stored on the floppy disks listed below. Before the system can be cannot

FAPT LADDER

used, the contents be run directly

of these system floppy disks must be written to a hard disk; the software and software of his or her personal computer, particularly

from the floppy disks.

To install the system on a hard disk, the user needs to be with basic MS-

familiar with the hardware DOS command operation

and files such as CONFIG.SYS

and AUTOEXEC.BAT.

The names of the floppy disks are listed below. FAPT LADDER PMC-L;M:P Vols.1 and 2 FAPT LADDER PMC-Lmodule floppy disk system floppy disk

A08B-9200-J500

#JP (PC9801)

A08B-9201 -J500 #EN (IBM PC/AT) A08B-9200-J600 A08B-9201-J600 #JP (PC9801) #EN (IBM PCAT) #JP (PC9801) #EN (IBM PC/AT) #JP (PC9801) #EN (IBM PCAT) #JP (PC9801) #EN (IBM PCAT) #JP (PC9801)

FAPT LADDER PMC-M module floppy disk

A08B-9200-J601 A08B-9201-J601

FAPT LADDER PMC-M (MMC) module floppy disk

A08B-9200-J602 A08B-9201-J602

FAPT LADDER PMC-NNAQA Vols.1, 2, and 3

system floppy disk

A08B-9200-J501 A08B-9201-J501 A08B-9200-J502

FAPT LADDER PMCRAlIRA2IRA3:RBiRB2/RB3/RB4/RC /RC3/RC4/PAl !PAYQCNB system floppy disk

A08B-9201 -J502 #EN (IBM PC/AT)

Vols. 1, 2, and 3 FAPT LADDER PMC-RAl IRA2iRA3;PAl floppy disk FAPT LADDER PMC-RB1RB2RB3.RB4RCRC3.1RC4 module floppy disk FAPT LADDER PMC-QC module floppy disk iPA module A08B-9200-J603 #JP (PC9801)

A08B-9201 -J603 #EN (IBM PCAT) A08B-9200-J604 A08B-9201-J604 #JP (PC9801) #EN (IBM PCAT) (PC9801) (IBM PCAT) (PC9801) (IBM PC AT)

A08B-9200-J605#JP A08B-9201 -J605#EN

FAPT LADDER PMC-NB module floppy disk

A08B-9200-J606#JP A08B-9201-J606#EN

l-5

2. INSTALLATION

PMC model PMC-L PMC-M PMC-M (with MMC) PMC-P PMC-N PMC-PA1 PMC-PA3 PMC-QA PMC-QC ?MC-NA MC-NB

Combination 0.8 @, @ 0. 0 @ @, @ 0, @ 43, @ 6J 0, @ ZJ @I

PMC model PMC-RAl PMC-RA2 PMC-RA3 PMC-RB PMC-RB2 PMC-RB3 PMC-RC PMC-RC3 PMC-RC4

Combination 0, QJ

@, @ @. QJ @, @ @, @ @, @ 0, 0, 8, @ @ @

2.1 Operating Environment


To use the software, installing the software, the requirements indicated in the table below must be satisfied. Before

check these requirements.

NEC PC9801 Main memory Hard disk Free area of 500K bytes or more is required About 3M bytes is required MS-DOS for installing

IBM PC/AT (Note 1) (Note 2).

the system (Note 3). PC-DOS Version 3.3 or later EPSON VP1 000

OS
Printer

Version 3.1 or later

NEC PR20lH Epson VP1000 (Note 4)

EMS

A LIM type EMS (expanded required depending to be created.

memory specification)

memory

board may be program

on the PMC model and the size of a sequence

For details, see 2.1.1. The EGA graphic interface required. is

Others

(Note

1)

If the standard required.

memory

size

of the machine

is insufficient,

memory

expansion

is

(Note 2)

Even if the machine when an installed

has 640K-byte for example,

memory,

the memory

may not be large enough space. The size of free CHKDSK.

driver.

uses a large memory with the MS-DOS

space in main memory can be checked

command

l-6

2. INSTALLATION

(Note 3) In addition, an area for storing sequence program data is required. (Note 4) To use the Epson VP1000 with an NEC PC9801, a program modification
For details, see Section 1.2 in Part II.

is required.

2.1.1

PC9801 operating

environment

(1) CONFIG.SYS, AUTOEXEC.BAT


When starting MS-DOS, the user needs to install the following device drivers:

l l

RSDRV.SYS PRINT.SYS
below to

Add the lines indicated RSDRV.SYS

CONFIG.SYS.
named gSDEV on drive A.

and PRINT.SYS

are assumed to be under the directory

DEVICE=A:$(DEVyRSDRV.SYS DEVICE=A:yDEV'1CPRINT,SYS

(Note)

When

you are using

a memory

card

adapter,

set CONFIG.SYS

referring

to the

operators

manual for the memory card adapter.

(2) Using the expanded memory can be used with the system allows a larger sequence

The expanded

memory

specification program.

(EMSXMS) EMSXMS

memory memory

as a to

work area for a sequence be used. edited.) If EMSXMS memory

program

(An EMS memory

size of 256K bytes or more allows

24000 or more steps to be

is not used, a sequence

program

of up to about 21840

steps can be

handled when the main memory has a free area of 570K bytes. Ladder diagram editing cannot output drawings be allocated in main memory if a free area sufficient for 16000 steps cannot device drivers. In this

due to the space taken up by resident

case, EMS memory is required.

FANUC has confirmed

that the setting described

below ensures normal operation.

MS-DOS Version 3.38 (for the PC-9801 Series) Machine with a 80386:80386SX CPU

Specify

the statement

below as the first DEVICE

statement

of the CONFIG.SYS

file.

Each

device driver is assumed to be under the directory

named DEV on drive A.

(Note)

When an EMS board and EMS device driver are used, change according to the manufactures manual.

the CONFIGSYS

file

l-7

2. INSTALLATION

Expanded Extended

memory memory

(EMS) (XMS)

EMS and/or XMS of 4 Mbytes or more (recommended)


* Better

(Kate 1) (Note 2)

to include EMS of 256 kbyte

or more

Note

1)

The quantity Symbol specially

of the EMS and XMS

memory Please

effects prepare

on the performance enough EMS or XMS

to handle memory

data and Net comment.

for Symbol data or Net comment

of large number. the maximum number of steps which or more

Note 2)

At the system FAPT LADDER EMS if possible.

with EMS less than 256 kbytes, can handle may be restricted.

Please prepare

256 kbytes

About size of EMS and XMS memory to be used:

Although according

FAPT LADDER

runs with no EMS nor XMS,

enough

size of EMS and/or XMS memory

to the source program to handle will be necessary for Ladder

for better performance.

1)

EMS memory

sequence program
program if available. memory is used, and the size of

FAPT LADDER uses EMS memory for Ladder sequence When no EMS memory is found, the convenGonal

conventional

memory may restrict the number of steps able to be edited. program occupies 256 kbyte of EMS, regardless of the type of PMC, or

Ladder sequence

the size of the ladder sequence

program to edit.

2)

EMS and XMS memory for Symbol & Comment data

FAPT LADDER uses EMS and/or XMS memory for Symbol & Comment When neither drive, of them are available, FAPT LADDER

data if available. file on the hard

will make temporary

and processing

large number of Symbol & Comment

data may be slower.

About 200 kbytes of EMS or XMS memory are used for every 1,000 Symbol data. EMS and XMS memory for Net comment

3)

For Net comment,

FAPT LADDER also uses EMS and/or XMS memory, data.

or temporary

file

as same as Symbol & Comment

About 200 to 300 kbytes of EMS or XMS memory

are used for every 1,000 Net comments.

(3) Using a Japanese


FAPT LADDER comment

language input FEP


allows comments in Japanese to be entered on the symbol and

for PC9801

editing screen. language

(See Section 51.3.) input, a front-end processor (FEP) for Japanese language input is

For Japanese required. manual.

For information

about

the installation

and operation

of an FEP, see the relevant

1-8

2. INSTALLATION

The following

Japanese

language input FEPs can be used:

Supplier NEC

Driver name NECAlKl. DRV

Memory size required About 130K bytes

Remarks Al step-by-step Al multiple-block Step-by-step Multiple-block conversion conversion

NECAIK2. DRV

conversion conversion conversion

NECDIC. DRV Just Systems ATOKGA. SYS ATOKGB. SYS ATOK7A. ATOK7B. SYS SYS

About 40K bytes About 100K bytes

Single-block ATOKG

About 115K bytes When the EMS is used Main : 50K bytes EMS : 64K bytes

ATOK

Note the following

points on Japanese

language input:

(a) When
FAPT

a Japanese

language

input FEP is activated

(in the Japanese

language

input mode),

the Japanese

language input FEP displays screen may temporarily

data on a section of the screen. be in disarray. language However,

As a result, the LADDER language

LADDER

the FAPT (Japanese

screen returns to normal when Japanese input mode is terminated).

input is completed

(W When

a comment

is entered using only Japanese,

up to 14 characters

can be entered.

(c) A comment entered in Japanese can be displayed on the editing screen or printed out, but
cannot be written is output into a ROM cassette indicating or transferred to the PMC. characters At compile time, a to message blanks. this restriction and all Japanese are converted

Note, however,

that sequence

program operation

is not affected.

60

A Japanese that memory memory execution.

language available

input FEP is installed to FAPT LADDER LADDER

as a resident driver in the system. is reduced bytes accordingly. or more Check to allow

This means

that the size of FAPT LADDER

usable

for FAPT

is 500K

Editing alone can be performed allocate

without

installing

PRINT.SYS

and RSDRV.SYS

in order to in

a free area of 500K bytes. a main memory as required.

Note that when

FILES or BUFFERS

is specified

CONFIG.SYS. adjustments

size of 1K bytes is used per file (buffer)

specified.

Make

09 A Japanese language input FEP can also be installed with ADDDRV and DELDRV by using
a subprocess after calling COMMAND.COM in user batch execution.

An example is provided

below.

l-9

2. INSTALLATION

First. change instaed,

the contents

of FLMNE.BAT

under

the directory

where

FAPT LADDER

is

as follows:

FLMNE. BAT r !COMMAND Inaddition, create a file with the name FEP.DEF with the definitions
below assumes FEP. use of ATOK7. For detailed information, below. The example of the relevant

see the manual

FEP.DEF DEVICE=A:YDEV+ATOK7A.SYS/D=A:+ATOK7L.DIC DEVICE=A:YDEV)CATOK7B.SYS


Select MNEEDT execution). (mnemonic editing) from the main menu,

>
and select F3 (user batch file

The following

message appears:

Execute 'FLMNE.BAT'. Add parameter(s)? [A(Add), N(Not add), S(Stop)]

Enter N to return to MS-DOS. FEP:

Execute

the following

commands

to install and remove the

ADDDRV FEP.DEF

(To install the FEP)

DELDRV

1 (To remove the FEP)


Fi .

The user can return to FAPT LADDER by pressing

2.1.2

IBM PC/AT operating


AUTOEXEC.BAT

environment

(1) CONFIGSYS,

The system uses ANSI-based using CONFIG.SYS. Add the line indicated ANSI.SYS

escape

sequences.

Therefore,

ANSI.SYS

needs to be installed

below to CONFIG.SYS. \DEV on drive A.

is assumed to be under directory

DEVICE=A:\DEV\ANSI.SYS

l-10

2. INSTALLATION

(2) Using

EMS memory specification (EMS) memory can be used with the system allows a larger sequence as a work to be

The expanded

area for a sequence used.

program.

The EMS memory

program

(An EMS memory size of 256K bytes or more allows 24000 steps to be edited.) is not used, a sequence program of up to about 21840 steps can be handled

If EMS memory

when the main memory has a free area of 570K bytes.) Ladder diagram editing cannot be started if a free area sufficient for 16000 steps cannot device drivers. be

allocated in main memory due to the space taken up by resident EMS memory is required. FANUC has confirmed MS-DOS that the setting described below ensures

In this case,

normal operation.

Version 4.0 below as the first DEVICE statements \DEV on drive A. of the CONFIG.SYS file. Each

Specify the statements

device driver is assumed to be under directory

DEVICE=A:\DEV\XMAEM.SYS DEVICE=A:\DEV\XMA2EMS.SYS FRAME=COOO

2.2 Installation Procedure


An installation (See (3)) Note that there are two different and edition of the system. installation procedures. They are selected according to the type batch file is used to install the programs on the system and module floppy disks.

Installation

of ordinary files (see item (1) for the procedure.) on the following system and module floppy disks are distributed in ordinary

The programs file format.

. . *

PMC-L/M/P

system floppy disk (AOSB-9200/9201-J500)

editions

06.1 and earlier

PMC-N system floppy disk (A08B-920019201 -JSOl) PMC-RB!RC system floppy disk (A08B-9200/9201 -J502) editions 07.1 and earlier

All module floppy disks

Installation

of compressed

files (see item (2) for the procedure.) system and floppy disks are distributed in compressed file

The programs format.

on the following

* *

PMC-L/M/P PMC-RBRC

system floppy disk (AOSB-9200/9201-J500) system floppy disk (AO8B-9200/9201-J502)

editions editions

06.2 and earlier 08.0 and earlier

Note 1)

The installation

procedure

of the programs

on each floppy disk is subject file (if there is one). procedure


(1).

to change. If there is no

Before starting installation, README.DOC,

refer to a README.DOC

use the ordinary file format installation

1-11

2. INSTALLATION

Note 2)

The compressed named LHA.

file is a self-extracting

file produced

using an archive Yoshizaki.

program

utility

LHA is freeware

created by Mr. Haruyasu

(1) Installation procedure for ordinary files on system

floppy

disks

The following system

procedure

uses an example

in which

ordinary

files are read from each PMC-N Y FLADDER created on the hard

floppy disk in drive B:, and installed

in the directory

disk drive (C:).

[Operation] Insert the system floppy disk VOLl in a drive.

Enter the following

commands

to execute

an installation

batch file.

B:Y> CD INSTALL B:YINSTALL> INSTALL B:Y

C:+FLADDER

When the following

message appears, confirm it, and press any key.

SYSTEM PROGRAM will be installed from DRIVE B:\ to C:\ FLADDER (HARD DISK) SET [SYSTEM FD Vol.11 on DRIVE B:\ When stop "CTRL+C" Press any key to continue
If it is necessary batch file. to discontinue installation, press the CTRL + C keys to stop execution of the

VOLI

is installed

on the hard disk.

When the following press any key.

message

appears,

insert the system floppy disk VOL2 in a drive, and

SET [SYSTEM FD Vol.21 on DRIVE B:\ When stop "CTRLtC" Press any key to continue
VOL2 is installed on the hard disk.

When the following press any key.

message

appears,

insert the system

floppy disk VOL3 in a drive, and

SET [SYSTEM FD Vol.31 on DRIVE B:\ When stop "CTRLtC" Press any key to continue
VOL3 is installed on the hard disk.

1-12

2. INSTALLATION

The following

message appears.

(2) Installation procedure for compressed files on system floppy disks


The following
procedure uses an example in which ordinary files are read from each PMCY FLADDER created on the

RB.RC system floppy disk in drive B:, and installed hard disk drive (A:).

in the directory

[Procedure ] Insert the system floppy disk VOLl in a drive.

Enter the following

commands

to execute

an installation

batch file.

I
Note 1) Note 2)

B:Y> CD INSTALL B:YINSTALL> INSTALL 9: A:YFLADDERY

When specifying directory

the files to be installed,

enter only their drive name; do not specify

(that is, do not enter 4h). suffix it with Y .

When specifying

the directory

in which the system is to be installed,

When the following

message

appears, confirm

it. and press any key.

SYSTEM PROGRAM will be installed from DRIVE B:\ to A:\ FLADDER (HARD DISK) SET [SYSTEM FD Vol.11 on DRIVE B:\ When stop "CTRL+C" Press any key to continue

If it is necessary batch file.

to discontinue

installation,

press the CTRL + C keys to stop execution

of the

VOLl

is installed on the hard disk.

When the following press any key.

message

appears,

insert the system

floppy disk VOL2 in a drive, and

SET [SYSTEM FD Vol.21 on DRIVE B:\ When stop "CTRLtC" Press any key to continue

VOL2 is installed on the hard disk.

1-13

2. INSTALLATION

When the following press any key.

message

appears.

insert the system

floppy disk VOL3 in a drive,

and

SET [SYSTEM FD Vo1.3) on DRIVE B:\ When stop "CTRL+C" Press any key to continue

@I VOL3 is installed on the hard disk.

@I The following

message appears.

(End/

(3) Installation batch files

The following table lists the installation batch files and their directories.

File name @ 8 $J @ PMC-L/M/P system floppy disk LMPINSTSAT LINST.BAT MINST.BAT MMINSTBAT INSTALL.BAT INSTALL.BAT

Directory Ic INSTALL Y Y gc +JINSTALL qCINSTALL

PMC-L module floppy disk PMC-M module floppy disk PMC-M (MMC) module floppy disk system floppy disk

@J PMC-NINAQA @

PMCRA~/RA~JAA~RB:RB~;RBYRB~/RC~RC~!RC~/PA 1IPA3IQCINB system floppy disk PMC-RAl !RA2IRAS/PAl IPA3 module floppy disk module

(3

RA12lNST.BAT RBRCINST.BAT

Y INSTALL Y INSTALL

EMC-RB!RB2/RB3;RB4IRCIRC3iRC4 floppy disk

?) PMC-QC module floppy disk


I@ PMC-NB module floppy disk

QCINST.BAT NBINST.BAT

Y INSTALL gC INSTALL

(Note)

Systems restrictions

for different

PMC models can be installed on the edition

in the same directory. of the software.

However,

may be placed depending

See Appendix install them

9 for details.

For systems that cannot be installed

in the same directory,

in separate directories.

1 -

14

3. ACTIVATION

3.

ACTIVATION
method

(1) Activation

[Operation] Activate FAPT LADDER with the following commands:

B:\>A: A:\xD \FLADDER


A:

\FLADDER>

FLADDER

(Note

1)

The initial screen displaying message below appears.

the version

of the system

and copyright

is displayed

and the

When a key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed, Select a screen by selecting the function

the main menu below appears. to the desired menu item

key corresponding

displayed

at the bottom of the main menu screen.

Fi KEY : SETUP F8 KEY : MNEMONIC EDIT F9 KEY : UT[LlTt FlO KEY : END

Select a menu item with the corresponding

function

key.

(Note)

Before system started

starting

up FAPT

LADDER,

change

the drive

and directory

in which

the is

file exists to the current up with path designation,

drive and current or by specifying

directory.

If FAPT LADDER directory,

the current

FAPT

LADDER may malfunction.

1-15

3. ACTIVATION

Reference:

When an FL.BAT has been created in the directory FAPT LADDER key. can be activated by just typing below.

for which

path control

is set,

FL and pressing

the [RETURN]

An example of a batch file is provided

FL.BAT ECHO OFF A:


cD \FLADDER (Moves to the drive where the system files are installed.) (Moves to the directory where the system files are installed.)

FLADDER

(2) Termination method

[Operation] 0 Select [END] from the main menu, or press the < ESC > key to return to the initial screen. Then the following message appears:

END? (Y:END, 0THER:RESllME MENU)

Enter Y to return to the MS-DOS

command

mode.

Enter N to return to the main menu.

l-16

4. BASIC OPERATION

4.

BASIC OPERATION

4.1 Menu Configuration


The configuration of the menu screens displayed by the system are shown below.

MS-DOS $- 4 initial screen


f

Main menu-

Edit Print qz[TEXEC

Fl

Title data Ladder diagram Symbol and comment Message I/O module System parameter

Execution l-Setting Compression (PMC-R seriesKXiNB)

c
LPASCAL -PMC

(PMC-N/NA/RC/RC3!QC4;QC/NB) (PMC-N, NA) writer, FA writer Read Write Verification Blank check

-PMC -E -Handy -Memory

Download Upload Comparison cassette adapter

file/Floppy card

(Note

1) The

format

of the

source

program

of this

system

is

different

from

that

of

FAPT

LADDER for the P Series.

Thts system uses the mnemonic

edit function

(F8) to edit a

file having the format of FAPT LADDER for the P Series.

(Note

2) An object file has the ROM format of FAPT LADDER for the P Series.
reads a sequence program created by the P Series In the ROM file format. of the floppy disk must be converted.

This system The format

1-17

Diagram

of relationships

among the functions

of the system

P-G FAPT LADDER - . . . . .. . . . . . . i Source i :s ; format : program i : .. . . .. . . .. . . .

PC9801 - IBM-PC/AT FAPT LADDER


Edit Setup

::

Communication by FEZ-2324 (Refer to Appendix 1 for cables)

qzq+J4
U-inch ffOPPY FLOAD98 IFLOADAT ASC format

CNC . .. . . . . ; ROM ; I : . . . . .. . . . . .. i
; format : program :4 3.5inch ffOPPY

+q+-+
Binary format Memorv

FAPT PASCAL . .. . ... .. . .. . : PASCAL ;


: load : module :-+I+ 35inch ffOPPY FLPGMS

II

I
I

i . .. . . .. . . .. . . .

k-1

Q I+
1 I

fg-pii?-~-

Binary format

Q-l_), ff
3.5inch

OPPY

ASC format

4. BASIC OPERATION

4.2 Common System Operations


The operations described below are basic operations applicable to all screens.

(1) Function

keys

When the menu items shown .:,:. :.

below

are displayed

in reverse key.

video,

the user can select

the

desired menu item by pressing the corresponding


,
;z:,i,:lE :.:_. ::..:::::; D,T,i,j,I:( ../ .::.?::is

function
;;:

j.,

.j.,

j;
y:)):.,

pR,$& .., :,.:

:... ..:.
::::..::

j.
)j

3 :;C*MP,i..: 4 j i.&&...y s :;.:;& i :y :;


:.: ::...: .j,. .,, .:,: : ,,

;::i,:

:::

..

fj&:::q ,

;::.;&p~:., * .;&JE+
:. ::

:.>::;:;;g( ,

()

+j

,,

WI

PI

F31

IF41

WI

F61

(F,]WI

WI

IF101

(2) Escape key


The escape key <ESC> escape key terminates menu hierarchy. (3) Cursor keys has the same effect as selecting [END] with the function key. The

the current screen then returns the display to the previous

screen in the

The cursor keys <


select input items.

>,

<

>,

< +

>, and < +

> are used to move the cursor

to

When two or more cursors can be moved by pressing

can be used on a single screen, the <SHIFT>

the second

or subsequent

cursor

key together with the < +

> or -z -+ > key.

(4) Scroll

keys
keys <ROLL UP> and <ROLL DOWN > scroll the screen up (to display the (for

The scroll previous

one page) and scroll the screen down (to display the next one page), respectively

the PC9801). The scroll keys <PAGE page, respectively DOWN > and <PAGE UP> display the next page and the previous

(for the IBM PC/AT).

(5) [INS]

key
between the overwrite mode c 0 > and insert mode -z I >.

This key switches

(9) [HELP]

key

When the < HELP > key is pressed,

help information

may be output for the specified

item.

1-19

4. BASIC OPERATION

(7) Status

line

A status line is displayed

at the top of the screen.

Main t-

menu

PMC-RB2
t

<O>[A::FLADDER

Item name currently selected

Model currently

selected

Current directory

name

Edit mode (overwritefinsert)

(Note)

The

indications

on the key tops

may slightly

vary

from

the descriptions

of this

manual. depending

on the personal computer

used.

(8) Pop-up

menu

When the following

pop-up menu appears, below.

the desired

process

can be selected

using any of

the three methods described

The file already exists. Fl Update F2 Quit F3 Append

1) Cursor movement
To select an item, press the cursor key < ? > or c 1 >, such that the item to be selected is displayed in reverse video. Then, pressing the <RETURN> key selects that item.

2) Function key
A function corresponding key is indicated function key. at the left of each item. To select an item, press the

3)

Command

name letter in (usually, the initial of) an item name is the command or <A> name. In the

An uppercase

above case, pressing Append command,

the letter key -z U >, <Cl>,

can select the Update. Quit, or

respectively.

l-20

4. BASIC OPERATION

4.3 Model Setting


In this case, the user needs to select the PMC model by selecting [SETUP] before selectrng

another menu item.

This setting, once executed,

is preserved

(i.e. setup need not be repeated).

[Operation] Select [SETUP].

The setup menu is displayed.

(The screen is of PMC-R08.0

version)

PUC-MI PIIC-RA? PUC-RA3 PUG-RB pcuc;;; PUC-RB4 PIIC-RB4 PMC-RC *PWC-RC3 PVC-AC4 PVC-RC4 PUC-PAI PUC-PA3 PVC-PC PVC-NB (STEP Sip:

(STEP

SW

Select the PMC model using the arrow keys. Press the <RETURN displayed Setup > key. Then the following message appears and the model name

in the status line changes. completed.

Select [END]. The display returns to the setup menu screen.

Select [END].

The display returns to the main menu screen.

(Note)

When PMC-NA is used, select PMC-N (l/O) on the above screen.

l-21

5. OPERATION

5.

OPERATION

5.1 Editing
The source file of a sequence program is edited.

(1) Start

[Operation] 0 Select [EDIT] from the main menu indicated below.

Mm. WC >

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~\~~~~~~~~~~

.:

j ;

>&:j

Fl KEY: EDIT
F2 KEY : PRINT F3 KEY : COMPILE F4 KEY : OECO?kPlLE Fj KEY : LINK F6 KEY : I/O Fi KEY : SETUP FB KEY : MNEMONIC EDIT F9 KEY : UTILITY F10 KEY : END

The following

source file name input screen is displayed:

l-22

5. OPERATION

6!

Enter the name of a source program to be edited. No more than 36 characters can be entered to specify a program name. (extension (.xXx) must be excluded).

An MS-DOS file name must be entered

(i)

When a new file is created

6 6
input nrnnram , yvy < 2 , name.

output program

Specify the OUTPUT

PROGRAM

NAME only.

(ii) When an existing

file is edited

directly

I/O program

Specify the same program name in the INPUT PROGRAM field and OUTPUT PROGRAM NAME field.

NAME

(ii) When an existing

file is modified

and its contents

are stored

in a separate

file

I=7
Example)

Specify the name of the existing INPUT PROGRAM NAME field.

file to be edited in the Specify the name of the file PROGRAM

in which to store the program in the OUTPUT NAME field.

L-2

To specify a file that exists in the current directory To specify a file in another directory,
A : iFLADDER 7

displayed

at the status line, enter the file

enter the relative path and the file name.

t Current directory

-IT
DATA i-SAMPLE1 SAMPLE2

In this case, the following


A:FLADDERDATASAMPLEl DATAsAMPLE

two lines specify the same file.

l-23

5. OPERATION

@ The following

editing menu screen appears:


EDiT ix-x QiNA:wADI;iR\ I

FI kEY : TITLE I?? RY F3 m : LWDEK DI%R+l : SMKIL 6 CONEIIT

F4 KFI : ,WSAGE F5 KEY : I,;0 KIDLLE! FE hEY : SYSTM P.!J&WTER FlO kEY : E!lu

($3 Select data to be edited with the corresponding $3 The editing displayed screen for the selected is selected.

function

key. For example, the screen below is

data appears.

when [TITLE]

EDIT( TITLL )

: fPf.z-fc \\ / ,slb~:at.

:\:: :: f

51 EDITIOS SO 6) PROCRM Ill~~\hlV6 X0 7) MT\ OF I'RO(;ffilWiG 8) PRG-XI IHICSEDBY 9) RUM hRITTL5 BY

iR

10 mu

(2) Termination

[Operation] Q Select [END] or press the < ESC > key on the editing screen.

G3 The following

message appears:

l-24

5. OPERATION

(3

Press the desired function

key. the editing operation is terminated after the results of

(i) When UPDATE


(ii) When QUIT

is selected,

editing are written to a file. is selected, the editing operation is terminated without writing the results

of editing to a file. (iii) When RESUME is selected, the editing is continued.

When UPDATE (i) To continue

or QUIT is selected,

the display returns to the editing menu screen. function key.

editing, select the appropriate editing, select [END].

(ii) To terminate

The display returns to the main menu.

5.1.1

Title data editing


the titles of sequence programs generated by a machine tool builder.

Title data represents

(1) Start

[Operation] 0 Select [TITLE] on the editing menu screen.

The following

title editing screen appears:

EMT ( TITLE)

MI-is

6hfA:'ZtNXI%'\

: IXtLCi'41C-HNEL RC & FltNI

(2) Input

[Operation] 0 Select an input item (displayed in reverse video) with the < 1 > and <

1 > keys.

l-25

5. OPERATION

Enter data.

The maximum

number of characters

usable for each title data item is listed below.

MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME MACHINE TOOL NAME CNC b NC NAME PMC PROGRAM NO EDITION NO PROGRAM DRAWING NO DATE OF PROGRAMMING PROGRAM DESIGNED BY ROM WRITTEN BY REMARKS
(3) Termination

: : : : : : : : : :

32 characters 32 characters 32 characters 4 characters 2 characters 32 characters 16 characters 32 characters 32 characters 32 characters

[Operation] 0 Select [END] on press the c ESC > key to return to the editing menu screen.

The following

message appears.

Fl F2 F3

Update Quit Edit

Press the desired function

key.

The system returns to the editing menu.

5.1.2 Ladder diagram editing


In ladder diagram search operations. editing, the user can perform sequence program input, addition, deletion, and

(1) Start

[Operation] @ Select [LADDER] (LADDER DIAGRAM) from the editing menu.

1-26

5. OPERATION

The following

ladder diagram editing screen appears:

StBil :sp

PO001

l-AD=xooo. 0 SY=S.:rFE
HIz+F3-a 4+3l Q-TEST %kztn

DAT,A NO I + c--,-..

0002/6552 011030/6553S _t 1ocuBmI

(a) When 09

the [View]

command

is used, a different Program

line is shown.

(For the [View]

command,

see (5) Connecting The line shows displayed

Sequence

in Section 3.1.1 of the supplement.) is being edited, number of the net which is

the name of the file which

on the screen, and the number of program stepsmaximum

number of steps that

can be edited.

(c) The W) The

line shows a sub-program

number (P address) or label number

(L address). selected by the

lines show a symbol and comment

added to the data at the address

cursor. @ AD = X000.0 8 SY = SAMPLE 000216552 @ CO = TEST DATA NO.1 0003Of65535 : : Address on which the cursor is placed Symbol Number symbols : Comment Number Maximum comment of characters number specified in the comment/ permitted in the of current symbols!Maximum number of

of characters

1-27

5. OPERATION

(2) Function

key indications

and selection

The ladder diagram editing functions

correspond

to the function

keys as indicated

below.

-@ [coman_d]

Under condition CD),holding down [SHIFT] lets you select the following items. ......: .:,:. :.:,:.: ...\ :.:.: :.:,:,:i... ...........I. .., ::.>,:.: :., :.:c.::~:~;:i:.:jl ... ....:.:.:,:,~.:.:.:,:.:.:,::.: :;::,:: .,::::: ........::.:...:. .:g:.:;er .:.,_ ::~:::~i,~.~:1:I:I.~: 1:1:1:::1:~.:81:~~~.~:~~:~::. ;.:, I:! y.v.w.,l:... :::::.i:.:...:.:.:.:,~:.:.:.:.:.:. , ~~~~~~~ 2 ;,$;!&k&; 3 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~:~~ 4 ~~~~~~~:;~~~~~~~ 5 ~~~~~~~ 6 :~:~~~~~~~ , ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ 8 ~:~~:~~~~~~~~~, 9 ~~~~~~~~~~~:~~~~ , Oii,i~::i:;~~~I~:::::ii >::.:_:...:.: .....:.::. ___,.. ,.) .:.:_:.:..l ,.,. .... ,>: ... ........._.... ............y.._ 7.. ,\., :.:.:.:.:s.. ,.I .:, .,.:..:.:.:.:_..:: ): .:,~):.:.:,.., .,:,:.:Q..:.) .. .i:: .,.,.,.,. .,.,,,_ .,., .~)~);:_:_:.):.::.:.::.~ ,.,. ..:.: .,.,.i,.,.,__.

:..:.:

[Delnet]

[Search]
... ... ,. ... : ,./.. ..

5 ;;,;;w&&

6 ;,&&i;

..,.. .,. ,. . ..:::..:.:... ::..: ....: .,_,). $):: ::,., ::. .. ,,.,,: : 7 :i$&.~. 8 ;. .,~&~:~~.Y: g _.,:_,::l:;,~.;i:i 10,::,;&.;;;:;I.. :.: .,.: .C,.: ,.,.,: .,..:: : ...

I,

CB [Copy1 1 Wove1
2 ;:l~a;~&;: 3 : .karch
.. . ..I4
,i_down

i$$&;:;.; ....x. .

.t;p,.,

6 ,.,

:,A
7.;, . .. ... .

:.,,: :,:: .Y.

3.

.. g .Y .: --<;.I,,.

.:.

..I

:: :,.

... .

., :. .,<. y
,,, .. .. * :::;t+r 1 Lj:;::.tii:.:.::..? :. 3 :~..~&~ch : 4 :&own 5 c-up 6 tO-fil 7.
to&J. 8.

,:

.:

: i., 10

.:,

[to-org)

is displayed

in the [File] command

mode only.

(Thus can be selected.)

@I [File] Opens a window processing [ sy Edit]


2

in which the name of an input program

can be specified.

Select desired

from a POP-UP menu.

I
I

0xec

cancel 3

10

1-28

5. OPERATION

(Note)

While the function Q can be executed.

keys of @ are displayed For example, as selecting entering

in ladder diagram editing, <A > and [COMAND] on the .a

a command

of

on the @ screen To select a

has the same effect command of 8

F4 [Adress]

screen.

in this way, enter the upper-case command

letter (not necessarily screen.

initial letter)

in the corresponding

name shown on the 8

(3) Sequence

program

input

For sequence programmer

program

input,

select

[LADDER]

from

the editing program

menu.

The

function

key

menu is displayed.

When no sequence

has been entered,

the screen

displays only the right and left vertical rails of a ladder diagram.

At this stage, program input can be started.

Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to any location in the ladder diagram. Examples of basic instruction below. program input and function instruction program input are shown

(a) Example

of basic instruction program input


x0.1 D30.2 F14.2 Y52.7

3
[Operation ] Move the cursor to the start position, The [ -I ILLEGAL Ithen press [ -I I1. HORIZONTAL LINE ] symbol appears on the screen. The message appears at the lower-right ladder diagram corner of the screen. line creation This message warns the user that horizontal and bit data. is not completed. Enter an address Enter X0.1 on the keyboard the contact, and press the < RETURN > key. The address is set at and the cursor moves right. As in @ and 8, enter contact A of 030.2. Enter contact Press [ e B of F14.2. ] and enter address F14.2. then press the <RETURN> key. The

address is set on contact

B and the cursor moves right.

Without moving the cursor, press [ A horizontal line segment extending

1. and a relay coil

to the right is drawn automatically

symbol appears near the right vertical rail.

l-29

5. OPERATION

Enter address Y52.7. then press the <RETURN The cursor automatically

> key.

moves to the input start position on the next line.

Next, enter an OR condition. Press [ + ] and enter address X2.4, then press the <RETURN > key.

The address is set at contact 6 and the cursor moves right.

Press [ To enter [ -

] to enter a horizontal a horizontal line, enter

line. a number and press the horizontal line key

1. The line segment

will be entered

as many times as the number the right vertical rail.

entered.

Note, however,

that such a line never exceeds

A vertical

line extending

upward

is required

for OR.

Press

] to enter

vertical line extending

upward.

(b) Example

of function

instruction

program

input

For function

instruction

input, press the function key.

key [functnj.

Next, enter a SUB number,

then press the <RETURN> A function instruction

can also be entered by entering the [functn] key. a certain instruction

the function

instruction

name or SUB

number and pressing

If the user does not remember instruction displayed table that lists function on the screen.

name or SUB number,

a function can be

instructions

and corresponding

SUB numbers

The table can be displayed Then the function Press the [functn] table. instruction

just by pressing

the [functn] displayed.

key without

entering

any data.

table is automatically

key to return to the ladder diagram

screen from the function

instruction

ACT

1 MOVE 0000

(1)
0000

(2)

Control condition

LL
When entering parameters a function of the function

(3) 0000

(4)

0000

H
.

Output address

Input data address 4-bit logical multiplication data enter the data

Low-order 4-bit

High-order

logical multiplication with this function, vertically

instruction instruction

as shown below.

-It--

MOVE

0000
SUB 8

0000 0000
0000

-c-(l) --(,a -(3) -(4)

l-30

5. OPERATION

[Operation] @ Enter a control condition. Press [ -i key. t1. Next, enter an address and bit data, then press the <RETURN>

The cursor moves right.

Enter a function The function

instruction. key. Next, enter SUB number 8, then press the <RETURN > key. diagram shown above appears.

Press the [functn]

instruction

&!

Enter the oarameters press the <RETURN remaining

of the function > key.

instruction. multiplication automatically data of the first parameter, moves downwards. then Enter the

First, enter the high-order

4-bit logical

The cursor

three parameters

one by one.

(c) Restrictions

and notes

on ladder

creation

[Restrictions] @ Restrictions related to the ladder 1 net (corresponding to the portion between the RD

and WRT instructions) a) When the ladder 1 net exceeds 256 steps (as counted as steps in the

corresponding

mnemonic

program),

the following

message appears:

A limit of 256 steps per net was exceeded. If there are more than 256 steps, no net is displayed.

Restrictions If an attempt described a) (a-l)

related to a ladder diagram display per screen is made to display more than 70 ladder net lines per screen, the error

below occurs.

Symptom When there are more than 70 lines per net, the following The NET being created is too large. If 70 lines displayed. A limit of 70 lines per net was exceeded. are exceeded, the following message appears, and no net is message appears.

(a-2)

When there are more than 70 lines totaled over two or more nets, the following message appears. The NET being created is too large. If 70 lines are exceeded when totaled over two or more nets, the following

message appears for a net that is the current and the display of the current

net when 70 lines are exceeded,

net is discontinued.

The NET is larger than the editing buffer. In this case, specify function the net to be displayed. rrsing the ladder diagram search

(such as net number search).

b)

How to obtain the number of lines per screen Even if part of a net is displayed on a screen, all lines of the net are included in the

l-31

5. OPERATION

total for that screen.

In addition,

a space line between

nets is counted

as a valid line.

The number of lines in each net to be displayed (b-l) Basic instructions One line is comprised of one basic instruction.

is determined

as follows:

b-1-

1 line

L-I (b-2) Function instructions of lines in a function whichever instruction is:

*lines

The number or parameters, Examples

The number of control

conditions

is greater, plus 1 follow.

of calculation

When the number of control conditions

< number of parameters

RST

When the number of control conditions

r
1-32

Number of control conditions = 2 Number of parameters = 4 Number of lines = number of parameters + 1 = 5 lines

> number of parameters

RlOO

Number of Number of Number of conditions

control conditions = 3 parameters = 1 lines = number of control + 1 = 4 lines

5. OPERATION

(b-3)

Data table section of function instructions The data table section of the COD, CODB, follows: When the data table is one or two bytes Number of lines

or DISP instruction

is calculated

as

= number of data tables16 ( + 1 if there is a remainder)

0000 0000 0000 0000

0000 0000 0000 0000

0000 0000

0000
I

1
1

Number of lines in the data table section = 11/6 = 1 with remainder 5 = 2 lines

When the data table is four bytes Number of lines = number of data tables/4 ( + 1 if there is a remainder)

SUB 27 CODB

0005 0007 0300 D320

00000000 00000000 00000000

00000000 00000000

Number of lines in the data table section = 514 = 1 with remainder 1 = 2 lines

l-33

5. OPERATION

(b-4)

Example of calculating For the ladder shown obtained as follows:

the number of lines per screen below, the number of fines in the screen

display

section

is

- The valid nets on the display screen are nets A and B. - Number of lines in net A Function instruction section + data table section = 6 lines (1116) (3+1) - The number of lines in net B is 2.

-I-+ I

8 lines

Net A

Screen display section D300 . . .. f . . . . . .. . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


I.

rT
ACT tSUB 49 DISP

0011

0003

........

000 003 006 009

0000 0000 0000 0000

0000 0000 0000 0000

0000 0000 0000

Net B : . . . . . . .. Net C

....................................................................

........

c)

Examples of symptoms Example of symptom (a-l) of message data steps when

The ladder diagram can be edited only when the total number parameter of the DISP instruction (SUB 49) is less than 396. of 70 lines. or more

This is because

the total number of steps is 396, the net consists If a net that consists editing, the following of a total of 396 steps

is created

during

mnemonic

message appears, and the display of the net is discontinued.

The data table is too large.

1-34

5. OPERATION

Example of symptom -

(a-2) instruction on the same screen as and the attempt is

If an attempt is made to enter the net of a function that of a basic rejected. The NET being created is too large. For example, cannot if the basic instruction (because instruction, the following message

is displayed,

net has 68 lines, the MOVE instruction of lines exceeds 70).

(SUB 8) of

be entered,

the total number

The results

calculation

are described

below.

1
68-line net Display screen . t+r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . ! i i ; :. .. ... .. Number of instruction number of (4) + 1 = MOVE lines = parameters 5

..! 68 + 5 = 73 lines

< Measure > If the display of the 68-line net is not scrolled, _ the MOVE instruction can be entered.

A basic instruction

net cannot

be entered

together

with another

basic-instruction

net, if

the total number of lines is greater than 70.

For example,

if a 68-line

basic-instruction

net is followed

by another

basic-instruction

net,

the element of the third line of the latter net cannot be entered.

I++ Display screen ,..................................................._.___.....,_...........................

68-line net

I . . . . . . . ]::!j

.I...l

< Measure > If the display of the 68-line net is not scrolled. the latter basic instruction can be entered.

When the CODB instruction same screen, steps

(SUB 27) and DISP instruction

(SUB 49) are edited on the data

if an attempt is made to enter 396 as the total number of message instruction (SUB 49) the following message appears,

for the DISP

and the

l-35

5. OPERATION

attempt is rejected. The NET being created is too large.

This symptom

also occurs in a combination

of two DISP instructions

and a combination

of

CODB and COD instructions. For example, if the number of tables for the CODB instruction can be only 66 at maximum. is 200, the total number The calculation results of are

steps for the DISP instruction shown below.

FIST -IIACT -II000 002 Display screen . . . . . .. . . . 4 bytes 200 data tables Number of CODB _ instruction lines = 55

00000000
00000000

00000000 00000000

. . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 198

. ..

00000000
00000000

00000000 00000000

I[ I_
Function instruction section = 4 parameters + 1 Data table section = 20014 = 50 Calculation of DISP instruction data items that can be entered instruction = 3 parameters + 1 Number of remaining = 70 - 55 - 4 lines = 11 lines Data tables = 11%=66 Function sections makes it possible to set the

.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .

.. .

< Measure > Moving the DISP instruction to the top of the display screen

total number of steps to 396.

Restriction Without

on the maximum

number of steps

The maximum

number of ladder steps that can be edited is as follows: EMS : 21840 steps : 24000 steps that the maximum allowable number of steps can decrease, depending

With EMS Note, however,

on how memory is used. If a ladder being edited exceeds disabled and the following MNEMONIC BUFFER message OVER the maximum is displayed: allowable number of steps, editing is

l-36

5. OPERATION

[Notes] CD An attempt to scroll a program on the screen with a scroll key or other keys fails if the ladder program is incomplete (for example, without addresses) or invalid.

A correct ladder program must be created before the screen can be scrolled.

Up to eight contacts However, format. displayed This

and one coil can be entered in one line on the screen. does not apply to a sequence program created in mnemonic symbol. with [ ----1. Use [Delnet] (net program created in mnemonic this limit, it is format exceeds

this restriction When a sequence

over several lines with a continuation symbol cannot be deleted

continuation

deletion)

to delete this symbol.

(See Item (6) in this section.)

(4) Replacing

sections

of a sequence

program

Lines in an already created sequence in Item (3) above.

program can be replaced

in the same way as described

Move the cursor to a program section to be changed,

then enter new data.

(5) Sequence

program

addition soft key of the function key programmer menu and use the function keys

Press the [comand] indicated below.

To terminate

the programmer

menu, press the < ESC > key. ,:

:I,i&&t
....

:.

.. ~::::&I&:1 >ji&if:$::
:..: ,y,:: ... . . :, . ..... .::::I

....................................... ....................... ................. .: :zi~~~~~~::


.) .................

: :..:.q.::::.

:;.

. ,,::::

$~$z$,$@:i;i
................

$&&$

~~~;fjiii.~~~! $zzyrdit:::;,
:: ,.:,:: ... .::..: .: .... .:::::.:.:. ... : :

........ .....~:.:::.:+~:.~~x~
::.:.

:,: : :.:.:.: .. ....

....

...

...

.:::.y

::.:.:::::::::::::: ................. ..y.. ....... . ........ .:,.:

.:::.:

[Insert]

As described

below, there are four types of sequence

program addition in a ladder diagram.

(a) Example:

when a relay contact

is added on a line

Addition on a line

Move the cursor to the position Item (3) above.

to add item(s),

then enter item(s)

in the way described

in

l-37

5. OPERATION

When a vertical line affects addition

[Operation] Move the cursor to the position Press [ _ 4 ] to delete shown above. the vertical line to the left extending upward. This

disappears. Press [ A ] to create a vertical ). A horizontal line extending upward to the right of the cursor,

then press [

line and vertical line are created. is to be added.

Move the cursor to the point on the line where a contact Press [ -j j] to add a contact.

(b) When a line is added vertically

-To

be added

To add a line vertically.

an area is required

for the addition.

To create

such an area, the

lower part of the ladder diagram

must be shifted down by one line.

To do this, move the

cursor to any point in the ladder diagram enclosed key. Each time the [insnet] key is pressed,

in dashed lines, then press the [insnet]

the lower part of the ladder diagram Make an addition in this area.

is shifted one

line down to create an area for addition. After line addition, any remaining

area (as in the case where two lines are added in an area

large enough for three lines) can be left as it is.

[Operation] @ Move the cursor to any point in the ladder dragram enclosed in dashed lines.

G? Press [insnet]. The lower part of the ladder diagram is shifted down by one line.

l-38

5. OPERATION

When the [insnet] When the [insnet]

key is pressed without entering key is pressed after entering

a numeric a numeric

value, one line is inserted. value, the number of lines

specified is inserted. Then set address data

Move the cursor to the desired position and press the <RETURN Press the [ L > key.

and press [

-_(

l-j.

The the cursor moves right.

] soft key to create an OR circuit.

(c) Line insertion

in a single-net

sequence

program

Blank lines are inserted one by one.

[Operation) 0 Enter the number of lines to be inserted, then press the [insfin] key. The entered number of lines is inserted. (When the [inslin] key is pressed without entering a number, just one line is added.)

If the [inslin]

key is pressed

when the cursor

is positioned

as shown

in the left-hand

figure. a blank line is inserted

as shown in the right-hand

figure.

(d) Element

insertion

in a single-net

sequence

program

Elements are added one by one.

[Operation] 0 Enter the number of elements number of elements If the character [inselm] <A> is inserted. is prefixed to the number of elements to be inserted and the to be inserted, then press the [inselm] key. The entered

key is pressed. elements key is pressed

are inserted after the cursor. entering the number of elements to be inserted,

(If the [inselm]

without

just one element is inserted.) ,I


II
<c..mm
n.. :.>:.....:.>:...
(.

_~&$+

I I I

4
Cursor

1-39

5. OPERATION

If the (inselm] figure,

key is pressed is inserted

when

the cursor

is placed

as shown figure.

in the left-hand The element is

an element

as shown

in the right-hand

inserted before the cursor.

If the character hand figure.

<A>

is entered

and the [inselm] figure, an element

key is pressed is inserted

when the cursor

is

placed as Shown in the left-hand

as shown

in the right-

The element is inserted after the cursor. -_ program

(6) Deletion

in asequence

-_

(a) A program

can be partially

deleted

by positioning

the cursor at the location

to be deleted

&td pressing one of the below three soft keys

e__--

1 :

Deletes a horizontal Deletes a vertical

line, relay contact,

relay coil, etc.

[4 1 2

I:
] :

line extending

upward to the left of the cursor. upward to the right of the cursor.

Deletes a vertical line extending

(b) Use the [Delnet] instruction).

key to delete a program

net (section

from an RD instruction

to a WRT

(c) Multiple

nets can be deleted one by one.

[Delnet]

[Operation] Deletion Move the cursor to the net to be deleted, deleted is displayed in red. then press the [Delnet] key. The net to be

Deleting multiple

nets key, or [search] after a numeric


If the [c-down]

Move the cursor by using keys such as the cursor down key, [c-down] key, then display numeric value. value the nets to be deleted the cursor In red.

key is pressed as the entered

is entered.

moves

as many

times

Execution Cancellation

: Press the [exec] : Press the [cancel]

key. key.

l-40

5. OPERATION

When the nets to be deleted are known beforehand, delete, enter the number of nets to delete. can be omitted.

move the cursor to the first net to key. With this

then press the [Delnet]

operation,

steps G and 8

(7) Searching

in a sequence

program

A sequence

program can be searched

using the following

soft keys:

(Search1

When this key is pressed,

the start of the sequence

program

is displayed

on the screen

and the cursor is moved to the start of the program. (b) [bottom] When this key is pressed, the end of the sequence the cursor is moved to the end of the program. program is displayed on the screen and

(c) [srchl
Search operation using this key searches the program for aspecified address from the current location for the cursor on the screen to the end of the program. on the screen. When an address in one of

is found, it is displayed two ways. 0 Address specification key. This operation

An address to search for can be specified

usina the cursor searches the program for the specified address from the current

Move the cursor to the relay contact of the address to search for, then press the [srch]

location of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program. If the specified displayed address is found, the section of the program positioned containg the address is

on the screen.

The cursor is automatically

at the found address.

If the search operation To terminate searching,

fails to find the specified press the c ESC > key.

address, the cursor does not move.

l-41

5.

OPERATION

Gll.6

-Y49.1 D32.0
II

When the same address as this address is to be searched for. move the cursor to this position, then press the (srch] key.

F54.1 ,. x0.4 II II x0.5 -

GE.1

021.2

When the same address is found, the cursor moves to this location.

Address soecification

bv address inout then press the [srch] key. location

Enter the address to find with the keyboard, This operation

searches the program for the specified

address from the current

of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program. When the specified is displayed address. If the search operation fails to find the specified address, an error indication appears. address is found, the section of the program containing The cursor is automatically positioned the address at the found

on the screen.

04

(w-srch] (WRT coil search)


This key is used to search the program current location for a relay coil with a specified address from the of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program. on the screen. When a relay coil

is found. it is displayed

If multiple relay coils are found, the coil which is the

closest to the cursor is displayed The address of a relay coil to search for can be specified in one of two ways.

Address soecification Move the cursor srch] key. This operation

usino the cursor to search for, then press the [w-

to the relay coil with the address

searches

the program

for relay coils with the specified

address

from the

current location of the cursor When

on the screen to the end of the program. address is found, the section of the program

a relay coil with the specified it is displayed operation

containing

on the screen and the cursor is positioned fails to find a relay coil with the specified

at the relay coil. address, an error

If the search indication

appears.

Address specification Enter the address srch] key. This operation

bv address inout of relay coils to search for with the keyboard, then press the (w-

searches

the program

for relay coils with the specified

address from the

current location of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program.

l-42

5. OPERATION

When

a relay coil with the specified it is displayed operation

address

is found,

the section

of the program

containing

on the screen and the cursor is positioned fails to find a relay coil with the specified

at the relay coil. address, an error

If the search indication

appears.

(e) [n-srch]

(net-number

search) net number, entering starting from the top of the display is

This key displays the screen. advanced (f)

those ladders that have a specified key is pressed without

If the [n-srch]

a number,

by one net. search) instructions. Searching the [s-srch] function is performed key. by entering a function

[s-srch ] (function-instruction This key searches instruction for function

name or number,

then pressing instruction, for.

If the [s-srch]

key is pressed

while the cursor is on a function that function instruction

instructions

with the same number as

are searched

(g) Search operation


l l l

using the cursor keys (<

>, -z +

>) The address is searched for. instruction instruction number, END1 is for.

Enter an address or symbol, then press a cursor key. Enter a NET No., then press a cursor key. Enter a function instruction

The NET No. is searched by a function for. The function

name, or enter S followed The function press instruction key.

then press a cursor key. Example: Enter Sl,

is searched

then

a cursor

searched for, (h) Searching When the in all main/sub-programs(G-SRCH) source program type is FORMAT-B/C, global searching in all main/sub-

programs is enabled. Refer to APPENDIX 6 Managing a Source Program for source program type.

1)

The range of search All programs, which include a currently is searched displayed subprogram, are searched for.

The subprogram a) b) c) d)

for in the ascending

order of P address. opening subprogram.

From the current cursor position From next numbered subprogram

to bottom of currently to last numbered

one.

From LEVEL1 to subprogram From top to cursor position

of which P address is small next to a). in subprogram of a).

l-43

5. OPERATION

G-SRCH

mode continues

unless pushing

the < ESC > key or the [cancel]

key.

A __1. 8 I@ @ @ m t @ 0 @ Final net of the maximum Th (Searching in the order of @ -@I) numbered subprogram v cursor t displaying on the screen 1 one of subprograms Whole program 1st net of LEVEL1

Searching

result

When the object of search is found, the cursor will move to the position. In case of finding closed. Then, the program which contains the object, will be opened to display the object position with the cursor. At this time, whether to save or quit modifications is inquired, in case there are in another program the program which is currently displayed will be

modifications

in the program to be closed.

When two or more objects exist, the result of search are displayed by one.

in order of 1) one

l-44

5. OPERATION

3)

Operation The global search is operated with the following function key.

(comand] 8 [comand]

Select the [G-srch]

with pushing

the [SHIFT]

(the following

will be displayed)

in state of 8

[G-SRCH]

(Shortcut

command

is <G > + [COMMAND]) mode by the operation unless quitting of 0 + 9. mode.

a) Beginning of G-SRCH
It switches After that, all programs

to the mode of G-SRCH are searched

G-SRCH

b)

Execution

of search [search],(d) [w-srchjY(e) [s-srch] in (7)Searching in a sequence

Refer to (c) program,

for how to specify the target of global search.

c) End of G-SRCH
G-SRCH different - <ESC> individually. =

mode < ESC > or [CANCEL] key. The end method is

mode is ended by pushing

Only G-SRCH

mode is ended. The program

on the opening

now

is the state as it is. - [CANCEL] = It returns SRCH to the program which was opened at beginning the G-

mode. The program on the opening

now closes. in case there are

Whether will save or quit modifications modifications

is inquired,

in the program which IS currently

displayed.

Copying

sections

of a sequence

program

A multiple-net

sequence

program can be copied net by net.

Specify the net to be copied. file. The selected

The net

net can be copied remains as it was.

in the same file that IS being edited or Into another

l-45

5. OPERATiON

File which is beinq edited

[COPY1 Range to be copied [until]

Specified

file

Fig. 51.2

(6)

[COPY]

$$ :::;$$,j:$;~: $ ++t

.,:/..:...\:::..: ..:...;. .
..., :,

..Z_

. . ...).

.:.:.::,:.:..:.:.:.:,:.;,,

:I;,

$S;+b ;;

;:&J&&,l
:: ::..:.:,. .:::::::::

~~i~~~~~~,~~~ ~:~~pI~~, j@$j$$


.:.:.:.:i.::,.:::::::: .,:.:..::::: .~:::.:.:.~.:::.:.;::.._,._. :.:

..:.:.:...:.:.:.::....:.:.:.:.L:.,. :.:.:.:.:.:.:,.:y(.:.~.:::

:.:.:ii

.:,:,y . . . . . :.>;.x

,:.y

.......:.:Q:.:.:~:.:.~.:.:

1:.

$+.:.

I
key. The selected net is

[Operation] Copying a net Place the cursor on the net to be copied displayed in yellow. and press the [Copy]

Copying two or more nets To select the nets to be copied, copied, then move the cursor first move the cursor to the first net of the range to be to be copied The selected by nets

to the net at the other end of the range [c-down], or [search] key.

pressing the cursor up, cursor down, [c-up], are displayed Alternatively, in yellow. enter a numeric value

and press

the [c-up]

or [c-down]

key.

The cursor

moves according

to the specified

value.

Setting the net or nets to be copied Press the [until] Specifying file) Move the cursor to the copy destination in the same file and press the (to] key. The key. using the [to] key

the copy destination

(Copying

the net or nets in the same

l-46

5. OPERATION

selected cursor.

net or nets are copied To copy the selected

immediatelv

above the CODY destination

specified

by the
of times

net or nets two or more times, enter the number the [to] key.

they are to be copied before pressing

c3 Specifying the copy destination


file)

using the [to-fill

key

(Copying

the net or nets into another

1) Press the [to-fit] key. The following message is displayed. *


c, If no program is specified, LATMP is created. ~:~~.:.:.:.:.:c.:.:.:.::~~~~:~:~:~:~~~::ii: i:~l::::::~~:l::t:l:::ill:~:~~:~:~:~:~ :. .:.: ::::::.,.,. :::.: ::::::ix:::: .: ..:...:...:.:.:.)):: .:.:~l:~.~:..:.~.: .,,,...,:. ..,.:: .::: ::::::: .:. .....$ .,, . ;: ?:(.. :......:,:, ...,,:. .:::;.:~ .,... : ........ .. .. : :: .:,: ..... .y.: : .. (LATMP file: Provisional work file used in editing)
j))

2)
3)

Enter

the-name > key.

of the file

into

which

the

net(s)

is to be copied

and

press

the

<RETURN

Select desired processing

from the following

POP-UP menu:

/I 4) If the selected destination file is present, from the menu. the following POP-UP menu is displayed.

Select desired processing The file already exists. ~1 Update F2 Quit Append

F3

Updates the selected file. The new copy replaces the previous data of the file. Cancels output to the selected file. Appends the copy to the selected file.

@ If the nets to be copied are known beforehand,


copied, enter the number of nets to be copied, and @ can be skipped. (Note) Incorrect nets cannot be copied. of a sequence program

place the cursor

on the first net to be key. Steps @, ai,

then press the [Copy]

(9) Moving

sections

A multiple-net copied.

sequence

program

can be moved

net by net.

Specify

the net or nets to be

The selected

net or nets can be moved to another The selected

place in the same file that is being

edited or output to another file. The only difference moving. -tIWlet [Move] until cancel search Delnet Insert

net or nets are deleted. net or nets are deleted in

between copying

and moving is that the selected

Adress

Search

WY

Move

File

syEdit

c-down

c-up

to

cancel

search

c-down

C-UP

to-fil

+org

l-47

5. OPERATION

[Operation] Substituting [Move] for [Copy], follow steps 0 to $3 for copying.

(Note)

incorrect

nets cannot be moved.

(10) Combining

a sequence

program

A source program can be combined The source program to be combined

to another source program that is being edited. can be displayed and edited separately, then combined to

the original source program that is being edited. Original screen r View screen

[}-9
Section to be edited

File being edited (original file)

1
t

Edit

I F-01
Fig. 51.2 (7) Combining a Sequence Program for the FAPT LADDER screen. even system

Combine

Edited file to be combined

The model specified to be entered

must agree with the PMC model of the file can be specified each other. for (If a

on the original for (VIEW)

However,

the file to be combined do not agree with

(TO) or entered disagreement

if the two models is displayed.)

is found, a warning message will be detected

In this case, no errors range or function will be detected

even if the file to be combined

contains model.

an address (The error the

instruction

format that does not agree with the specified When ignoring the warning message

in compilation.)

to continue

operation,

extreme care is needed.

l-48

5. OPERATION

1)

Function keys

[Comand ]
inmet ~ BPiiiei: ::. : :Adiers :. I_lnreti. :!.. .. ... ,.:,. Se&&. j r &,fjjf ;:;:: ;,.:&qove.. &

.. .. syEdii

ORIGINAL View

= display = display

when the file is opened when the file is opened

for the first time using the [File] command is carried out on the View 1 screen

PMC Model on which editing

ORICISAL

= Initial displa) at opening the file = Display opened by [Filel comand -Model of PMC edited in View screen NET 00001-00002 STEi YOOO. 0

EDIT .~LAN!Eii: VlCW :LA: PYC-fiC3 ; x000.0 +z;


A: YFLADDERFTEST.

Kmmm

SliB71 ISP

I PO@@I I

sY=sAwlE

0002/6552

Fig. 51.2

(8)

Screen

Displayed

when a File is Opened

by the (File] Command

l-49

5. OPERATION

2) Operation flowchart for combining a sequence program

Specify an insertion point (The data is inserted immediately above the cursor.) I

[ Press thl:LE]

key 1

Specify ; view file

c POP-UP menu > 4 (View) Shows the ladder diagram of the file to be combined (View screen) 1. Check the displayed data of the file to be combined 2. Edit the data of the file to be combined and combine it +

(To)

Combines the file with the Ladder program on the original screen 1. The file is immediately combined. The data of the file is not displayed.

Edit the Ladder program on the view screen (Normal editing)

< POP-UP menu s +

Press the c ESC > key to terminate

editing

(Save)

$ (Edit) Returns to the ladder diagram screen (The view screen is continued.)

Saves the Ladder program shown on the view screen

* 1: The name of the provisional Fig. 51.2 (9)

work file is LATMP. Flowchart for Combining a Sequence Program

Operation

1 - 50

5. OPERATION

3)

Examples

Example 1. Combining

a sequence

program file

[Operation] Place the cursor on the insertion point on the original screen.

Select [File]. Enter the name of the file to be combined and press the <RETURN > key.

From the following

menu, select Fl (To).

The file is inserted screen)

immediately

above

the net specified

in step

0.

(Original

Example 2. Combining

a modified sequence

program

[Operation] Place the cursor on the insertion point on the original screen.

Select [File].

Enter the name of the file to be combining

and press the <RETURN

> key.

From the following

menu, select F2 (View).

Edit the Ladder <ESC> conventional key.

program (Ladder

on the view editing can

screen. be

To terminate and

editing, terminated

press in

the the

performed

way.)

l-51

5. OPERATION

@I From the following

menu, select Fl (Save).

Temp (Outputs the data to the LATMPm

file.)

Return to the screen of step-@and Then, select Fl (To). Y

check -the name of the file output

in step @.

.- @I -The-file screen)

is

inserted

immediately

above

the net specified

in step

0.

(Original

Example 3. Combining

a specified

section of a sequence

program

[Operation] Place the cursor on the insertion point on the original screen.

Select [File].

Enter the name of the file to be combined

and press the <RETURN>

key.

From the pop-up menu, select F2 (View).

Select (until].

[Copy]

or [Move]

on the view

screen

and specify

a desired

range

with

From the

following

function

menu,

select

[to-org].

(Specify

insertion

into

the

original screen.) [until] to cancel search c-down c-up to-fil to-org

From the following

menu, select Fl (Exec).

jj

The data is inserted screen)

immediately

above

the net specified

in step 0.

(Original

1-52

5. OPERATION

(11) Editing

a symbol

and comment

from the ladder

diagram

editing

screen

On the ladder diagram editing screen, can be edited.

a symbol and comment

added at the specified

address

[Comand]

[syEdit]

1
.: ~~:;~::;:::: i:.,:,:j
: ..

:ig:::iexee+:: aiijans~l, j3
..I. ,.,., .?. .A. .. .,.,. ,: .. ..

::,Y;~y~r::~:~

::

I
in a ladder diagram, key. place the cursor on the corresponding

[Operation] Specifying an address

To edit a symbol and comment address and press the (syEdit]

Editing the symbol and comment The cursor moves to the symbol editing section the symbol and press the <RETURN > key. in the bottom right part of the screen. field. Edit

The cursor moves to the comment

Terminating (exec] key [cancel]

editing : Terminates Terminates editing after modifying editing without the data. the data.

key :

modifying

(12) Abbreviated

input

with the [cornand]

key

Each function strings below,

key can be directly

selected

with the [comand] function key.

key.

Enter one of the character that are enclosed in

then press the [comand]

Those

portions

brackets can be omitted. I S M (nsert) (earth) (ove) D c F (elnet) (OPY) (ile) (SY)E NW

The function

keys in the menu above can be used for program creation and search operations.

(Note)

The

keys

[k

or L ] and

[J

orJ

] are used

to create

or delete

a vertical

line

extending

upward to the left or right of the cursor in a ladder diagram. and the dashed vertical line IS for deletion.

The solid vertical

line is for creation to a function

The menu item applying

key depends on the ladder diagram and cursor position.

l-53

5. OPERATION

(13) ZOOM

When the source program type is FORMAT-B, edit another subprogram, which is called

it is realized

with easy operation instruction

to refer and

by the CALU

CALLU

from the program

now on the opening. For the source program type, refer to APPENDIX 6 Management a source program.

1) Start up of zoom
a) Moved the cursor to the parameter <RET> key. of the CALUCALLU instruction and push the

b)

The program

now on opening

hides

from the editing

screen.

Then

the subprogram

which is specified

by the parameter

in mentioning

above appears on the screen.

2)

Start up under editing When ZOOM is attempted be inquired. Select either. while editing the program, the preservation of modifications will

II
3) by ZOOM, Fl F2 F3 F4 F5

Close the current program. Fl Save 8 zoom F2 Cancel

End of ZOOM When the end operation it will return with the =zESC > key is attempted to the state when ZOOM in the program Moreover, editing screen to

is started.

it is possible

return to the program configuration

screen all at once.

End menu of editing screen (pop-up screen)

Save(update) Quit Renamesave Edit Main

& quit & quit

a)

Fl:Save(update)

& quit of current

It returns to the program screen where ZOOM was started, after the content program screen is preserved.

b)

F2:Quit It returns to the program screen where ZOOM program screen is cancelled. was started, after the content of current

l-54

5. OPERATION

c)

F3:Rename,

save & quit of current

It returns to the program screen where ZOOM was started, after the content program screen is preserved into specified subprogram name.

(14) List of subprograms The list of subprograms

in use called from currently displayed program is displayed. a step sequence (14) List"of "FAPT manual B-66131/04-6.

For the function.

refer to the., chapter

12. Creating operators

LADDER (personal computer) Only the operation is described

supplementary here.

1)

Operation The command List is operated with the following function key.

[comand] 1 8 [comand] .......... : .......... ............................................ ........ ...... ,.,:.: 1$$$i&$;;$ 2 :~,~i5t~ 3 $$$&$:$j;j4 .$&&&r$r_i j ;;&&&;i
......... ........ ......... :. ... .... ix,? .y,:+:)( ,,.,: ..:. j.

..:.

I :,,,: Iy::.Ii:: ;.,,: ;<;;;:<.y

6 $$;$$.tt$$7 ~&~~~ 8 ~~>:,.$&$;~~$ g $;&gijllia@:ii, o:~~:~~:.:~:~~~,d~~ ..... : .................... .. .......... : ......,: ... ... ...... ...... : ..:.

...... : : : .......... :: .IQi

I
1

:!:::~::.~$~:,.,~~~~ 2 ,(...... .:.>y.


..: :::,., ~,

..,. .::,. .:,. . :..:.....; ./. i~~~~~~~~~i:aii


.A.. .,y,.:. . . . . . .I :.:::,. .. .. :

Select the [List] with pushing


.::,::.:.. ..

the [SHIFT]
,.. .. :

(the following will be displayed)


fZy... ..:.:.;:.:. :..,.

in state of 8
1

.,

4 :il~,id,iri;i3:,~:~ 5 $$,e)!$::i; 6 :i: :iil.::~;:i~~~~~~jxi 7 iil~;~~~~: ... 3 Qqiiaiiiij:iii~~~~~~ ::.: : :.


.. : . .\. .:.::;
.L... ).

_,............,.~.~i.,~~ ~, :..., ..,. :. ....:.:.,.: ~~~i~~~~riiiilli g ~~;i::~iis::::iiii Or;.;$,Lift j,:


III:I:I:i:i:

:.,.. i..: :.:.:.:..


. ....

.::,:.:::.y::/~

:. :,:,:

:::j

..I
::l)j

(Shortcut

command

is < L >

+ [COMMAND])

(15) To edit Net comment

It is able to write comment,

the comments

between

ladder

nets.

These

comments

are called

Net

and each of them occupies

two steps in sequence

program.

1) To enter Net comment a) Move the cursor to the position you want to write a net comment. And then press <Shift > + [netcmt].

R1OO1.O

R1000.2

Y2000.4 n

R1OO1.O +*I

R1000.2

Y23.4 A

l-55

5. OPERATION

b)

Lines at the cursor and after are shifted down, ( and ) is inserted. Then the cursor changes the area. The area for Net comment display mode) automatically can expands up to a hundred expands according lines. into character-size

and the area for comment

enclosed

by

cursor,

and type comment

sentence

onto

and shrinks

by two lines

(four lines at four lines Every Net comment

to the comment

sentences.

R1OO1.O R120.3 =Li

R1000.2

Y2000.4
n

character is written in here. you can enter are available. 4

cursor 9 ) Y23.4

( Net comment (* All characters R1OO1.O

R1000.2

+H2) To determine or cancel the editing Net comment

a)

To determine comment

the editing

Net comment,

press

[ end ] or < ESC>.

Then

the editing

is fixed,

and the Net comment

editing mode is finished.

b)

To cancel cancelled

the editing and erased.

Net comment,

press

[cancel].

The new Net comment

will be

Note)

The number of characters ASCII character as two bytes. Line feed is also available for Net comment.

in a Net comment one Japanese

is limited to 4095 bytes: counting

one

as one byte,

kana as one byte, one kanji character

on Net comment.

Line feed is helpful

to save memory

3)

To modify Net comment

a) Place the cursor on the Net comment which you want to modify and press
<Shift > + [netcmt] and the Net comment or < RET > . The Net comment editing mode becomes active, will be ready to modify its contents.

b) At Net comment editing mode, to insert a blank line into Net comment,
( Net comment ( All characters is written in here. you can enter are available. I::: ) 3

press [inslin].

1-56

5. OPERATION

[inslin]

will shift lines at the cursor and after down by one line,

and make a blank line

at the cursor position. ( Net comment .. ( y: :. . ( All characters is written in here.

l )
) )

you can enter are available.

(
c) At Net comment editing mode, to delete by line, press [dellin].
( Net comment (* Net comment ( All characters (* [dellin) line. ( Net comment ( &I characters is written in here. you can enter are available. editing mode, is written in here. will expand or shrink automatically. you can enter are available. :.:.:.: .iz

l ;
3 3 3 3

will delete whole one line at the cursor and shift lines after the cursor up by one

) )

d)

To exit from Net comment

press [ end ] or < ESC >.

e) To cancel the modifications


the modifications and the modifications.

you have just made, Net comment will

press [cancel]. be restored as

[cancel] it was

will abandon before the

4) To delete Net comment

There are two ways to delete Net comment.

Use [Delnet] [command]

as same as deleting + [Delnet]

normal ladder nets.

--) specify area to delete -+ [exec]

Entering

Net comment

editing

mode

by c Shift > + [netcmt]

or

<RET > with

the

cursor on the Net comment

which you want to delete, and then press [delete].

5) Lost Net comment

A Net comment Net comment

consists pointer, These two

of the information and Net elements

of position string

in sequence data which one

program which is called is comment to one sentences a Net such as by is

comment

themselves. comment, copying user.

are usually

combined

to make

but the partner

might be lost by illegal file operations or modifying the Net comment

or something,

the ladder file .#LA

data file NETCMT.OOO

When a Net comment

pointer loses its Net comment

string data, the Net comment

called Lost Net comment. Lost Net comment displayed in purple is displayed or dimly as blank Net comment on monochrome enclosed Lost by I( and ) Net comment which is can be

display.

1 - 57

5. OPERATION

normalized comment,

by editing

operation. copying

Lost Net comment and so on.

can be edited

as a normal

Net

such as deletion,

(16) To edit New page

It is able to specify

the position

to feed page at printing

ladder diagram.

This specification

of

the position is called New page,

and each of them occupies

two steps in sequence

program.

1) To enter New page


a) Move the cursor to the position you want to feed page. I paw I. And then press -z Shift > +

R1OO1.O R120.3 xl-+ R1OO1.O

R1000.2

Y2000.4 A

R1000.2

Y23.4

+Hf
b) Lines at the cursor and after are shifted down,

A w

and the mark of New page is inserted.

R1OO1.O R120.3 x-+

R1000.2

Y2000.4 n v

<New R1OO1.O R1000.2

page> Y23.4

+HI

2)

Other operation

to edit New page

New page can be handled as same as other ordinary copying [ Copy 1, moving [ Move 1, and deleting

ladder nets.

The operations

such as on

[Delnet]

ladder nets are also effective

New page.

(17) Terminating [Operation ] @

editing

of a sequence

program

Press the (ESC

> key on the following

editing screen.

l-58

5. OPERATION

The following

editing end menu(pop-up

menu) appears.

1Fl

F2 F3 F4 F5

Save(update) Quit Renamesave Edit Main

& quit & quit

a)

1:Save(update)

81quit the editing screen will be ended.

After current content of the editing is preserved,

F2:Quit After current content of the editing is cancelled, the editing screen will be ended.

F3:Renamesave After current

& quit of the editing is preserved into specified subprogram name, the

content

editing screen will be ended.

d)

F4:Edit The c ESC > key operation is canceled and it returns to the editing screen of former.

e)

F5:Main With the operation was started. a).b) or c), it returns it returns to the program to a program screen where ZOOM

But with this operation,

configuration

screen at all

once from the nested state.

Either the above-mentioned

is selected

and it returns

to the program configuration

screen,

the main menu or the program screen where ZOOM was started.

When error net exists When the error net exists, ERROR NET NO. is displayed and the end menu is not

displayed. Cope this case by the following.


a) After the error net is corrected operation will be done. or deleted and the state of the error is released, the end

b)

When

pressed

<ESC>

key in the state of 0

after

CAN

is typed

(meaning

of

CANCEL), -

the menu of 6, will be displayed. after removing to return the error net. before editing by

When Save is ordered, it will be preserved When Quit is ordered, it will be able

to the state

cancelling

the content of the editing.

l-59

5. OPERATION

5.1.3

Symbol and comment editing

The definition of terms

Terms Symbol (Extended)

definition and uses Name assigned uniquely to each relay/ coil, to be used in place of PMC address x0.0 ++++I--

display INPUT

Relay comment (New)

Text assigned to relays/coils them.

to explain ;w
COMMEiT CO&NT

Coil comment (Extended and Renamed, old name: Comment) Net comment

Text assigned to coils to explain them. YO.0 --I Text assigned between ladder nets to explain them.
HERE IS COIL COMMENT

$n_ t- COMMENT

Tables for Symbol & Comment specifications

In FAPT LADDER, you can assign names or add notes to l/O signals, internal relays, notes to a sequence program.

and can add

Symbol/Comment

for l/O signals and internal relays

1)

Ver. 8.1 or earlier

Data kind

Symbol ASCII characters (lower- case alphabetic characters not allowed)

Relay comment Not supported

Comment

Available characters

ASCII characters Japanese kanal kanji characters (Note 1) 30 bytes

6 bytes

Not supported

Maximum number

6552 entries

Not supported

64 kbytes - 1 byte I (65535 bytes)

Duplicated definition Display on t-CRT MDI

Not allowed

Yes

l-60

5. OPERATION

2)

Ver. 8.4 or later

Data kind Available characters

Symbol ASCII characters (lower- case alphabetic characters not allowed) 16 bytes

Relay comment ASCII characters Japanese kanal kanji characters (Note 2)

Comment ASCII characters kana/ kanji characters Japanese

(Note 1)

Maximum character Maximum number Duplicated definition Display on CRT/MD1

16 bytes

30 bytes

20,000 entries (Note 3) Not allowed

20,000 entries (Note 3) Allowed

20, 000 entries (Note 3) Allowed

Yes, if it is 6 bytes or shorter. (Note 4)

No

Yes, if the symbol assigned to the same address is 6 (Note 4) bytes or shorter.

Note

1)

CRTiMDl (Japanese

can not display Japanese characters characters

characters,

replaced to blank.

can be handled with only PC98 series) in relay comment are replaced to blank when printing. computer may restrict

Note 2) Note 3) Note 4)

Japanese

Free area size of hard drive, them. When

EMS and XMS on personal

the total size of all coil comments are displayed on CRTIMDI.

exceeds

64 kbytes,

no symbols

and

comments

Comment

for ladder sequence

program

* Ver.8.4 or later

I
Available

Data kind characters

Net comment ASCII characters Japanese kana/kanji Line feed


I

characters (Note 1)

Steps to occupy Maximum charactersiline

2 steps/Net

comment

64 charactersiline 4095 characters/Net 100 lines/Net

comment

(Note2) (Note2) (Note3)

Maximum Maximum

lines number

comment

About 20,000 Net comments No

Display on CRT/MD1

Note 1) Note 2) Note 3)

Japanese

characters

are replaced

to blank when printing. the limitation effects for the Net comment. number of Net may

The limitation Number comments.

which is reached first becomes in each Net comment

of characters

on maximum

Free area size of hard drive, EMS and XMS on personal computer

further restrict them.

l-61

5. OPERATION

Before using extended

symbol comment

Note the followings

in case of using extended

symbofcomment.

1) These functions are available to the undermentioned


PMC-RB4!RB4( STEP) PMCRC4/RC4(STEP) PMC-RBSiRB6 PMC-NB2

PMC setting.

2)

Source

programs

for above-mentioned

PMC,

created

with

ver.8.1

or

earlier,

need

conversion.
The operation is the followings. and start the ver.8.4.

a) b) cl 4

Prepare source programs

Adapt PMC setting to a source program. Convert it into ALL-format Reconvert the mnemonic mnemonic data. data into a source program with another program name.

The conversion

is completed

by above-mentioned

procedure.

3)

There is no operation

in case of creating

new source program.

Moving the cursor

<

+-

>,

<

7,

<t

7,

<

5_ 7

Moves the cursor to another field to be edited. Moves the cursor to another be edited. position within the field to

<Shift>

+ <c>,<+>

Entering a comment When a front-end Japanese. compiled characters

in Japanese processor for Japanese containing word input is used, a comment can be entered characters alphanumeric in is

When a comment (a ROM-format are replaced

kana characters

or m-type alphanumeric and m-type

file is created), with spaces.

all the kana characters

To sstart the front-end the keys. For the operation manual.

processor

for Japanese

word input, press

< CTRL

> and < XFER

of the front-end

processor

for Japanese

word input,

see the corresponding

To exit from the front-end <I keys.

processor

for Japanese

word Input. press the

< CTRL

and

1-62

5. OPERATION

(1) Start

[Operation] @ Select [SYMBOL] (symbol and comment) from the editing menu.

The following

symbol and comment

editing screen appears:

! UllOl
I I !

_.~ 0001 lm2 IJUO3

3l

~UDKESS SFWL
XUOOO. 0 x0000. 1 )ilJOUlJ. 2 5oouu.3 SIY-:. W-B WI-C m-i CUWEST CLMEXT COWXT CUWST

COWEST I?ZPUT INPUT lXCT ICPUT SLWLE WCLE SLWLE SUWLE So. 1 ho. 1 Xo. 1 hc. 1

111 t ; MD I ( F4 or SBIFT - F1 4 <- -> key wen 1,s~ I SIllA 1 ZSEARCR 3 MEA 4 f&B

) key hhen you add Address


YOU mve cursor 5. GDELETE

data. by a character. 8CUPY 7 ,.

SPASTE

10 EiB

(2) Entering

a new symbol and comment

A new symbol and comment assigned.

can be added at an address

to which

no symbol

or comment

is

[Operation] Select [ADD] on the symbol and comment editing screen.

An input window opens on the screen.

1
t Address field t Symbol field

[
t Comment field

1I

Enter an address in the address field.

The symbol field is shown in reverse video.

Enter a symbol. The comment field is shown in reverse video.

Enter a comment.

1-63

5. OPERATION

@ .- The entered address, symbol, and comment are cleared from the window and entered into
the file.

When no symbols data. (3) Editing a symbol

and comments

are entered,

the system

is automatically

set to receive

new

and comment

A symbol and comment assigned -_ .[Operation]. @ - I

to an address can be edited.

If the system is set to receive new data, select [QUIT] Move the cursor by pressing the < c >, <+>,

to exit from that state.

< T >, or c 1 > key and edit the data.

To move the cursor within a field, while pressing key.

the e Shift > key press the < cz-

or e -+>

(4) Moving

a comment

A comment

assigned

to an address can be moved to another address.

[Operation] Place the cursor on the comment to be moved.

Select [DELETE].

The following

message appears on the screen.

1Comment

data copied to paste buffer 1

Place the cursor at the place the comment

is to be moved.

Select [PASTE).

(5) Copying

a comment

A comment

assigned

to an address can be copied into another address.

[Operation] 0 Place the cursor on the comment to be copied.

Select [COPY].

The following

message appears on the screen.

l-64

5. OPERATION

1Comment

data copied to paste buffer 1

Place the cursor at the place the comment

is to be copied.

Select [PASTE].

(6) Searching for a symbol or address

[Operation] @ 8 Select [SEARCH] The following on the symbol and comment editing screen.

input window appears on the screen.

SEARCH

Enter the symbol or address to be searched

for and the data number.

The system

searches

for the symbol

or address

and the data number

in that order.

The

cursor is moved to the searched data.

(7) Deleting

a symbol

and/or

comment

(a) Deleting
[Operation] 0

both a symbol

and a comment

Place the cursor on the NO field.

C3 Select [DELETE].

Both the symbol and the comment

are deleted.

(b) Deleting

either

a symbol or a comment

[Operation] 0 Place the cursor on the SYMBOL or COMMENT field.

Select [DELETE].

Only the selected

symbol or comment

is deleted.

(c) Deleting

two or more symbols

and comments

simultaneously

[Operation] 0 (2 Place the cursor at the top of the range to be deleted. Select [AREA]. The entire line is displayed in reverse video, and the following

message appears on the screen.

Running!

Appoint extent

1-65

5. OPERATION

Move the cursor to the end of the range to be deleted.

Select [DELETE].

All the data displayed

in reverse video is deleted.

(8) Terminating

the symbol

and comment

editing

[Operation] 0 On the edit screen, select [END] or press the <ESC> key.

The following

message appears on the screen: Update (Saves the edited data.) Qutt (Cancels the edited data.)

!i

1 Edit (Returns to editing.)


J

Specify a desired option and return to the edit menu.

(9) Editing

screen

(the case of model

setting

is PMC-RBWRB4

(STEP)/RCWRC4

(STEP))

*Symbol entry number CRT/MD1 can display / Total EDIT ( SYMBOL 6 COMMENT )

I+
I

Coil comment size (byte) CRT/MD1 can display / Total


I

PMC-RB4
I

<O>[A:%FLvDATA%RB4

SYYMBOL 000001/000003 COIL_COMMENT 0000030/00000090 y (Notel) COIL COMMENT ADDRESS SYMBOL RELAY COMMENT NO. I I I I IV 00001 X00000.0 AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAA-AAAAAAAAA-AAAAAAAAA 00002 X00000.1 BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBB-BBBBBBBBB-BBBBBBBBB cccccccccccccccc ccccccccc-ccccccccc-ccccccccc 00003*X00000.2 CCCCC 1 '*' means a symbol data which can be displayed on CRT/MDI.

Note 1)

T is the indicator.

Symbol/comment

are displayed

with turning

at this point in ladder

diagram editing screen.

(10) Searching
Search COMMENT. Especially strings.

by a part of strings is active for specified field, LINE NO.IADDRESSiSYMBOLGELAY or COIL

function

you can find relay!coil

comment,

which

is too long,

by specifing

a part of data

l-66

5. OPERATION

1)

Press [SEARCH] Furthermore,

and the pop-up menu apears to specify strings for search. changes as the undermentioned.
9 ::y , o ....;;:, ..: : ., ... ,, I

the display of function-key

.:;:

&.<]:;

.-.; :, ,: .:., :; . _.... ..


2:. -.

. ..

.. ...

. . ..

..;.... .,.

:\\y .

.:.

..

.,.,.,.

:..

2 ,:,.ADRs ..; 3 .SYMB$4

;: f$@f.j.

5 ;: .:C,o$

. ::.: ..:. .,: 6 I .:,,,::;j::i::jj)j:: , $pj.:i:::, 8 :. .. .. : ,. ,,.


.+.. ::... .,.,. .,\ ., _I... ..... . ...

..

.:y

.:.:.:<

:. .,..::.:;::..{:...

2)

Input strings and specify the data kind for searching

by function-key.

A part of strings is available only in case of [RELAY]/[COIL]. If search is success, cursol moves to the found place.

3)

l-67

5. OPERATION

5.1.4 Message editing


An arbitrary instruction described message can be displayed on the CRT!MDI screen of the CNC, using the DISPB as

(SUB 41), which below.

is one of the function

instructions.

Such a message

is created

5.1.4.1

Types and quantity of characters that can be used


usable in message data vary from one CNC/PMC model to another, as

The types of characters listed below.

I
CNC/PMC

I
JIS levels 1 and 2 PMC-RB/RB2/RB3/RB4!RB5/ RBG.RCIRC3IRC4 PMC-RAl IRA2RA3 A X

Characters Full-size hiragana

that can be entered Half-size katakana Alphanumeric characters

F16

0 0
X

0 0 0 0
by FAPT LADDER.)

0 0 0 0

F18 F15B

PMC-N:NA/NB

ra,
(A

PMC-PAlIPA3 cannot be displayed.

: Some characters

They cannot be checked

The half-size

kana and alphanumeric Similarly

characters

can be entered

using the kana and alphanumeric text can be edited is limited

keys on the keyboard.

to symbols

and comments, processor).

Japanese-language

using the Japanese-language as follows:

input FEP (front-end

The number of characters

1) 2) 3)

When only full-size When only half-size

Japanese-language kana characters characters

characters are used are used

are used

: : :

62 characters 127 characters 256 characters

When only alphanumeric

5.1.4.2
The

Edit procedure
that can half-size be used varies between the CNCIPMC model in which Japanese describes

edit method (excluding

language

characters)

can be used and other models. characters

This section

the procedure

common

to all models

(only alphanumeric

are entered),

using the PMC-

RC as an example.

(1) Startup

[Operation] $9 Select [MESSAG] (message) from the edit menu

l-68

5. OPERATION

The following

message data edit screen appears.

(Fig. 51.4)

1 002 ,401:. !
! 003 .AOO.2

; 004 ,400. ,

Fig. 51.4

Message

Data Edit Screen

(2) input

[Operation] 0 Place the cursor on the message address where message data is to be entered.

C~J Key in the desired message data.

(3) Modification

[Operation] @ Place the cursor on the message address where message data is to be entered.

Q a

The character

cursor moves on to the message

and blinks there. is required. using the cursor keys.

Place the cursor at the location where modification

Key in the desired characters

to modify the message data.

Press the <RETURN>

key.

(4) Search

[TOP] [BOTTOM]

[Operation] 0 On the message screen, select [TOP] or [BOTTOM]. address.

QJ The cursor moves to the start or end message

1-69

5.

OPERATION

(5) END

(Operation] @ On the edit screen, press [END] or < ESC > .

The following

message

appears.

Select one of the above items, and return to the edit menu.

5.1.5 I/O module editing


The address of each module in the I/O unit is set and deleted as described below.

(1) Startup

[Operation] 0 Select [MODULE] (I0 module) from the edit menu.

The following

Ii0 module edit screen appears.

(Fig. 5.15)

!ADDRESS CROI'P BASE SLOT X0000 SOOOl X000? : x0003 s0004 X0005 , X0006 x0007 \OOOE X0009 x0010 so011 X001? \0013 so014 SO015 i i it

WAVE ID16C ID16C

ADDRESS CROUPBASE SLOT soooo ~0001 YOOOZ PO003 \0004 YOOO5 YOOO6 YOOOi YOOOB YOOOD YOOIO YOOII YOOI? 10013 \0011 10015

WE

l!iEAXCH ?Ihpt"l 3 HELP 1

606LETE 7DELAi.L 8

5,

10 END

Fig. 51.5

(a)

I0 Module

Edit Screen

l-70

5. OPERATION

x0000 'WOO i \ooc2 \0003 \000:

0 0 ; 0

i
! 0

00

::

YOOQl \oooo
1 \ 0002 0003

:: 01

If 1: :I

yoo~

coo10 ~0011 \OO!? xooi3 \OOl? .\OOlI

% sooo~

YOOO4 F0005 FOO06 YOOCi YOOOS 10009 YOOlO 10011 YOOl? YOO13 YOOi4 YOOl5

1WKH ?IXPoT 3BELP 4PKCB 5!4XLUlGDELETE iDEL%L8DKC-i 9.

IOmB,

Fig. 51.5

(b)

Ii0 Module Edit Screen (models in which more than one channel

can be set)

(2) Channel

switching

(only for models

in which more than one channel

can be set)

(i)

To switch to the next channel:

[Operation] 0 Select (NXT.CH].

(ii) To switch to the previous channel:

[Operation] ci! Select [PRV.CH].

(3) Setting

[Operation] Place the cursor on the start address when a module is to be set.

Key in the module address in the following

format:

GROUP.BASE.SLOT.NAME

(Note

1) The module name that can be specified or I0 unit. Selecting [HELP]

may vary depending the <HELP>

on the model of the PMC the module

or pressing

key can display

names that can be displayed

in the NAME field.

(Note

2)

The I,0 unit MODEL-B GROUP BASE SLOT : : :

is allocated

as follows:

Specify a group number in the configuration. Must be fixed at 0. Specify the unit number of the PO Unit-B. Alternatively. set to 0 if

power ONjOFF information

## is to be allocated.

l-71

5. OPERATION

(4) Deletion

[DELETE]

[DELALL)

[DEL.CH]

(i)

To delete one module:

[Operation J @ Place the cursor at the address where the module is to be deleted.

Select [DELETE].

(ii) To delete all modules:

[Operation] 0

Select [ DELALL].

(iii) To delete the modules set):

of one channel

(for models

in which

more than one channel

can be

[Operation 1 @ Select a channel for deletion.

Select (DEL.CH].

(5) Search [SEARCH]

[Operation] @ Press [SEARCH] after an address is specified.

Place the cursor at the specified

address.

(6) END [END]

[Operation] On the edit screen, press [END] or < ESC >.

The following

message appears.

/I

Select one of the above items. and return to the edit menu.

l-72

5. OPERATION

(7) Termination

[END]

[Operation] 0 Select [END] or press the < ESC > key on the editing screen.

@ The following

message appears.

Fl
F2 F-3

Update Quit Edit

Press the desired function

key.

The system returns to the editing screen.

5.1.6

System parameter

editing

(1) Start

[Operation] 0 Select [SYSPRM] (SYSTEM PARAMETER) from the editing menu.

G3 The system parameter editing screen appears. The screen shown below is the system PMC model, see item (4) below. parameter editing screen for PMC-FIB. For each

(2) Input

[Operation] (J,) Select an input item (displayed in reverse video) with the < 1 7 and < 1 > keys

Enter data about Input items, see Item (4) below

For information

1-73

5. OPERATION

(3) Termination

[Operation] 0 Select [END] or press < ESC > on the editing screen.

@ The following

message appears:

II

Select a function parameter

key from the above. editing

The screen display returns to the editing menu.

(4) System

screen and input items for each PMC model

(a) PMC-L/M
[Editing screen] 0 PMC-L

j) BCD ?-DIGIT AREA

OBYTE

S:i,%;O: s) 81 11 0- !Xo ) ( 0- 400

F'!K TYPE = L R-AREA 0

l-74

5. OPERATION

TIMER USED AREA (area used for timers1 When timers are set with the TMR function instruction on the CRT/MDI, setting and

display in BCD is possible. This parameter decimal format. specifies the size (in bytes) of an area that can be set and displayed from the start (D300) of nonvolatile instruction parameter memory. data in

This area is allocated

This area must be specified

in the TMR

of timer control

address to enable decimal display. A timer control data address requires as follows: five bytes. Therefore, this parameter must be set

COUNTER CRT/MDI,

USED AREA (area used for counters) of counters are set with the CTR function instruction on the and setting and display in BCD is possible. specifies the size (in bytes) of an area to use for decimal after the TIMER USED AREA in nonvolatile in the CTR instruction parameter of counter setting memory. control data

When the preset values This parameter display.

This area is allocated

This area must be specified

address to allow decimal display. A counter control data address requires five bytes. Therefore, this parameter must be

set as follows: (Number of counters for decimal display) x 5 bytes

BCD 4-DIGIT AREA (area for settinq/disolav This parameter specifies

in four-diait

BCD) that can

the size (in bytes) of an area used to store addresses (CRTIMDI) in 4-digit BCD. memory. Therefore, this parameter

be set and displayed after the COUNTER

on the screen

This area is allocated

USED AREA in nonvolatile for four-digit

Two bytes are required set as follows: (Number of addresses

BCD display.

must be

for 4-digit BCD display)

x 2 bytes

BCD 2-DIGIT AREA (area for settinq and disolavinq This parameter specifies

in two-diait

BCDl that can

the size (in bytes) of an area used to store addresses (CRTIMDI) in two-digit BCD.

be set and displayed

on the screen

This area is allocated

after the BCD 4-DIGIT AREA in nonvolatile One byte is required as follows: for two-digit

memory. Therefore, this parameter must be set

BCD display.

l-76

5. OPERATION

LADDER EXEC (ladder execution This parameter levels. execution. Note, however, that increased This

time) processing scan time for the first and second thus achieving high-speed ladder ladder

sets an incremental setting reduces ladder

time,

ladder

execution

time on the first and second

levels

reduces ladder processing Initial value 100

time on the third level. 100 to 200

Setting range

CYCLE TIME This parameter specifies a sequence program execution period of 16 or 8 ms.

Initial value Note, however,

0 : 16 ms

Setting

0: 16ms/l cannot

:8ms PMC-L and PMC-M (MMC);

that this parameter

be set with

PMC-L is always set to 16 ms, and PMC-M (MMC) is always set to 8 ms.

IGNORE DIVID CODE (division/non-division This parameter specifies whether

method) method or non-division

to use the ladder division

method. Note that when executed. the non-division method is specified, the third-level ladder is not

IInitial value
(b) PMC-P

0 : Division method

Setting

0 : NO (division

method) method) I

1 : YES (non-division

[Editing screen]

l-77

5. OPERATION

[input item] @I PMC PARAM. This parameter SIZE (0 address size] specifies the size (in bytes) of nonvolatile memory in the common

nonvolatile

memory

(0 address) and internal relay (R address) area.

Initial value

2048

Setting range

0 to 2048

In the initial state, no internal

relay (R address)

can be used.

Be sure to specify

this

input item when using an internal relay.

(c) PMC-N/N

(I/O LINK)/OA

[Editing screen] @ PMC-N/N (I/O LINK)

P!iZ TYPE = K (I/O

LI!Xx)

PMCQA

EDIT

iSWEll

PAitIWMER~

4050 series
10::;

O:BICARF.l:BCD \ 100 - 150s

0:

1 0.W. 1:YES

PUC TYPE j PA

l-78

5.

OPERATION

[Input item] COUNTER DATA TYPE specifies whether the format of a counter value used with the CTR This parameter function

instruction

is to be binary or BCD.

initial value

0 : BINARY

Setting

0 : BINARY / 1 : BCD

LADDER EXEC (ladder execution This parameter levels. execution. This specifies setting reduces

time) processing scan time, time for the first and second ladder thus achieving high-speed ladder ladder

an incremental

Initial value

100

Setting range

100 to 150

The table below indicates ms.

ladder execution

time status during an execution

period of 8

Setting 100% 150%

1 ~~~~
that increased processing processing time

First and second level processing 5ms

time

7.5ms

Note, however,

ladder execution times:

time on the first and second

levels

reduces the following


l l l

PMC screen display time CPASCAL

Ladder processing

time on the third level

PASCAL EXEC (PASCAL execution This parameter time. to LADDER second levels, specifies

time) execution time to ladder program

the ratio of C/PASCAL

execution In contrast first and

EXEC, this parameter and increases

reduces

ladder processing time for PASCAL

time on the and similar

processing

processing.

Initial value

I Setting range

0 to 100

I time to PMC screen processin@ processing and PMC screen

PASCAL EXEC RATIO (ratio of PASCAL processino The initial setting display.
l l l

gives the same priority

to C/PASCAL

This parameter allocates PMC screen display time C/PASCAL processing

processing

time to the following:

time

Ladder processing

time on the third level even during PMC screen display.

Under this setting, PASCAL can run periodically

l-79

5. OPERATION

Initial value

50

1Setting

range

0 to 99

When 0% is specified,

C/PASCAL

is executed

after PMC screen display. in this parameter, the time allocated to

Note that if a much greater

value is specified

PMC screen display is too short, resulting

in a delayed display.

PASCAL ORIGIN This parameter program. specifies the start address .of the task control block (TCB) of a PASCAL

Initial value

000000

Setting range

Address

in the PASCAL area

When there is no PASCAL program,

specify

OOOOOOH.

PASCAL DATA ORIGIN This parameter specifies the start address (physical address) of the data area for a

PASCAL program.

Initial value

000000

Setting range

Address

in the PASCAL area

I %FF4000H (or

When

OOOOOOH is set in the when an optional

PASCAL

DATA

ORIGIN

parameter,

sb800000H

RAM is used) is assumed

as the address.

SYNCHRONIZED This parameter

LEVEL 3 (third-level specifies whether

svnchronization) buffer to be used in level 3.

to allow the synchronous

Initial value

0 : NO

Setting

0 : NO / 1 : YES

@I PMUOS

EDITION fmanaaement specifies

software

edition) software used with PMC-N.

This parameter

the edition of the management

Initial value

01

Setting

Edition of the management

software

currently

used

l-80

5. OPERATION

The table below indicates ms.

ladder execution

time status during an execution

period of 8

Setting 100% 150%

First and second level processing 5ms 7.5ms

time

Note, however,

that increased processing

ladder execution times:

time on the first and second

levels

reduces the following


l l l

PMC screen display time Language program processing Ladder processing time

time on the third level

IGNORE DIVID CODE (division/non-division This parameter specifies whether

method) division method or non-division

to use the ladder

method. Note that when the non-division method is specified, the third-level ladder is not

executed.

I
@

Initial value

0 : Division method

Setting

0 : NO (division

method) method) I

1 : YES (non-division

LANGUAGE As the parameter


l l l

EXEC RATIO program and PMC screen display have the same priority, this specifies the percentage of the following processing times:

language

PMC screen display time Language program processing Processing time of third-level time Ladder program a language program can be executed cyclically.

While the PMC screen is displayed,

llnitial

value

50

1Setting range

0 to 99

LANGUAGE This

ORIGIN specifies the start address of the link control statement data of a

parameter

language

program.

Initial value

000000

Setting range

Address in the language area

program storage

When there is no language program, specify OOOOOOH.

1-83

5. OPERATION

OPERATOR

PANEL (connectinq specifies whether in this

an FO machine a machine parameter,

operators operators

oanel) panel is used with the FSO. addresses where the

This parameter When

YES is specified

specify

the DtDO

operators operators

panel is actually

connected,

an address for key images transferred to the operators

from the panel.

panel, and an addresses

for LED images transferred

Initial value

0 : NO

Setting

0 : NO i 1 : YES

0 .,,

KEY DI ADDRESS Specify the start address (PMC address) of the external Dl where the operators panel is actually connected.

Setting range

X0 to Xl 27, Xl 000 to Xl 019

ii)

KEY DO ADDRESS Specify the start address (PMC address) of the external DO where the operators panel is actually connected.

Setting range

YO to Y127, YlOOO to Y1014

iii)

KEY BIT IMAGE Specify programs. the

ADDRESS address (PMC address) of key images referenced by user

start

Usually an arbitrary internal iv) LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS Specify programs. the start address

relay area is set.

(PMC

address)

of LED

images

referenced

by user

Usually an arbitrary internal relay area is set.

l-84

5.

OPERATION

5.2

Printout
program can be printed out. When PC9801 to Section 2.1 .l. left margin, line spacing and is used, PRINT.SYS must be installed

A sequence beforehand. For printout,

Install PRINT.SYS FAPT LADDER

according

allows the user to set the top margin, 1.4 of Part II.

cross reference.

For details on setting, see Section

Compatible

printers

This software is usable with the printers listed below.

NEC PC9801 NEC PR201H EPSON VP1000 (Note)

IBM PC/AT EPSON VP1000

(Note)

To use an Epson VP1 000 with an NEC PC9801, a program modification 1.4 of Part II.

is required.

For

details, see Section

(1) General

flow of operation

for printout

Select a source program [ EXEC] <Fl > v Specify output item End -[ EXEC] <Fl>

Make # LS file

Fig. 5.2 (a)

Operation

Flow and Screens

l-85

5. OPERATION

The step sequence

diagram printing can be selected at PMC-RB4(STEP)

1 RC4(STEP).

:iliiiiliiiiiiiiiiii~~~pR~N~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

C:FRC4-STEP TITLE SYSTEM PARAMETER SYMBOL & COMENT LADDER DIAGRAM

: : : f :

@#I/YES1 [!WYESl WYESI mT;l;; [OPTION]


,um

Added ->

~~...-I :

I/O UODULE MESSAGE CROSS REFERENCE LIST BIT ADDRESS MAP

: : : : : :

[OPTIONI WYESI [Em/YES1 [OPTION] [CWYESI [OPTION] #tU/YESl

Fig. 5.2 (d)

Printing menu

C:YRC4-STEP

.fil::l:i

FIO ( ESC 1 : END

11

Fig. 5.2 (e)

Optional setting menu for step sequence

diagram printing

1) PRINT UNIT
Select either only a specified When selecting MODULE, sub-program or all sub-programs. name to MODULE NAME. specify the printing sub-program

2)

SUB-PROGRAM

NUMBER sub-program number which belongs to a step sequence

Select either not printing / printing program.

l-87

5. OPERATION

(4) Output

item setting

Items to be output to a drawing specified PMC. at a time.

are specified

as described

below.

More than one item can be on the model of the

Some set items may not be displayed,

depending

Specifying Whether key.

whether to output each data item to output each data item can be specified by placing the cursor on the desired

item on the output item select menu with the 7 or 1 key, then pressing

the <RETURN>

Specifying

options optional items, place the cursor on the desired option, option then press the After

For data having <RETURN entering

> key.

The screen

for specifying

the corresponding

will appear.

the necessary

value on that screen,

press the < RETURN > key.

Detail of each data time 1) Title printing The data of the title is printed. 2) Parameter printing is printed.

The data of the system parameters 3) Symbol printing The symbol comment i) * The output specified 4)

data is printed. of symbol comments to be printed continues is specified. If 0 is

Option (symbol printing) range

as the print end line number,

printing

up to the last line.

Ladder diagram printing A ladder diagram is printed. i) Option (ladder diagram printing) * The output unit, net range, page break, and cross-reference of a ladder

diagram to be printed are specified. * If a diagram is output module. * If 0 is set as the output end net when a range of nets is specified, up to the last net. a page break is made in the ladder diagram at printing as a list file, the unit of printout must be specified as a

continues .

If a page break is specified, every new file or subprogram.

If a cross-reference cross-reference.

is specified,

the ladder

diagram

is accompanied

with

(Fig. 5.2 (c))

5)

I0 module printing The I/O module data is printed.

6)

Message

printing

The message data is printed. i) Option (message printing) * The range of messages to be printed is specified.

l-88

5. OPERATION

Print format specification Either Japanese-language (Japanese-language input mode screen) or code

format (code input mode screen) is selected. 7) Cross-reference A cross-reference i) list printing list is printed. (Fig. 5.2 (d))

Option (cross-reference *

list printing) list is printed, a check is made for duplicate If a duplicate writing writing, is

When a cross-reference and the output specified, duplicate counter). following

range of addresses is displayed instruction

is specified. for duplicate

write check coil

a message

of a write

and

use of a function table.

that uses a number

(such as a timer and according to the

The range of output

addresses

can be specified

Table 5.2 I Address specification mode

Cross-Reference I Example of keying in ALL Y R1.O x10

List Address

Specification Address to be output

ALL Initial letter of an address Bit address Byte address

All addresses All addresses Specified Specified (including having a specified only initial letter

bit addresses byte addresses bit addresses)

Address range

I F10.0.F12.7 X2.3.END (Note 1)

I All addresses All addresses

in a specified

range address

after a specified

(Note

1) When an address specification

is made, addresses address, P.

are output

in the sequence: therefore,

X. Y,

F, G, R, A, C, K, D. T, variable subsequent addresses are output.

In this example,

Y and all

8)

List file printing Data from a list file is printed.

Fig. 5.2(f)

Example of Printout of a Ladder Diagram with Cross Reference Data

Fig. 52(g)

Example of Printout with a Multiple coil Write Check Indication

l-89

5. OPERATION

Example of printout of step sequence

diagram

(1) Printout example by F2[SETUP] c graphical mode printout >

(print menu) <ASCII . mode printout > t Initial step

Initial step

Transition Label s210 PlOl P150 -h 0 e Divergence of selective P160 sequence +-Divergence of simultaneous I S215 0 S217 sequence P161 1 P165 +Convergence of P162 simultaneous sequence ~ S216 P163 P164 fConvergence Step

;* Sl : Pl .. + PlOO c-L1 s210 : PlOl


l

4 4

Transition Label

+ P150

c+ P160

Divergence

S211 P151 P152

S211 : P151
l

S215 : P161 . + P162 . S216 : P163

+ P152

of selective sequence +Divergence of . simultaneous S217 sequence : P165 -Convergence of simultaneous sequence Step

t 0

S212

t 0

S212 : P153
l

+ P154 of selective sequence Block step

+ 164 cConvergence 4

F; SlOOO : P2000 + P102

of selective sequence Block step

Jump

->Ll

Jump

(2) Printout example

by SUB-PROGRAM

NUMBER

[NONES]

<Not print sub program number >

<Print

sub program number >

&IS1

4-

Sub program number

PlOO c-L1 q s210 P160 P160

jG+G-j-

l-90

5. OPERATION

(5) Specification

of output forms

Specify the paper size and the type of printer forms.

[Operation ] 0 Select [SETUP] on the output item selection screen.

The forms selection

screen appears (Fig. 5.2(h)).

P!P\PER SIZE / LADDERPRIST

: 10 INCH/ * 10 PiCH/ 15 INCH/ 15 IKCH/ ASCII GRAPHIC ASCII GRAPHIC

Fig. 5.2(h)

Forms Selection

Screen

Current < t

output form is indicated >orc J

with *.

To change the output format, move the cursor by

>andenter<RETURN>.

@I After selecting

forms, select [END) to return to the output item selection

screen.

(6) Start of printing

[Operation] Select [PRINT] on the output item selection screen.

Printing screen.

is started: during printing,

the indication

PRINTING

IN PROGRESS

blinks on the

When printing

printing halfway

ends,

the indication select

PRINTING

IN PROGRESS display

disappears.

(To stop

through,

[BREAK]:

the screen

returns

to the input program

specification
(7)

screen.)

Termination

[Operation]

l-92

5. OPERATION

Select screen.

[END]

on the input

program

specification

screen

or the output

item

selection

The screen display returns to the main menu screen.

(8) [LIST]

command

(F2 KEY) as 53.1 The List of source program.

It is the same function

refer to above paragraph.

Note)

If the step sequence a diagram according supported. displayed

function

is selected

when setting a model, the function statement (file with extension

for printing .#LS) is not in the

to a specified

control

The [LIST] command function

for creating

a control statement

is not included

key menu and cannot be executed.

(9) The note if the step sequence


1) Net Numbers When a ladder diagram is

function

is selected when setting a model

edited,

net

numbers

starting

from numbers

1 are

assigned

to

subprograms. subprograms

When a ladder diagram in ascending

is printed,

sequential

are assigned

to all

order of subprogram

numbers.

2)

Cross Reference A cross reference can only include information referenced by the ladder, first, second, or

third level, or by ladder subprograms. step sequence subprogram,

If ladder subprogram

PO001 is referenced

only by a

and if address

PO001 is specified

to print the cross reference,

there is no reference

information.

3)

Printing the Step Sequence The step sequence

Diagram

diagram cannot be printed.

l-93

5. OPERATION

5.3 Compilation
During compilation, an edited source program programs is translated cannot into a ROM format file (object file) (PMC can

executable

by the PMC.

Uncompiled

be transferred

to the ROM writers PMC-NB. compilation

writer or FA writer) or RAM for the PMC. be performed in one of two modes:

With PMC-R series, PMC-QC, mode.

normal mode and condensed

$$g

Transferred andPMC

to the ROM writers

Condensed With mode. PMC-R

mode series, PMC-CC, PMC-NB, a source program can be compiled in condensed mode, the As a result,

When a ladder with the same number

of steps is compiled

in condensed normal mode.

size of the created condensed

ROM format file is smaller than that created in listed below.

mode has the advantages

A larger C language

area can be allocated. Condensed mode

Normal mode Ladder ROM format file

C language

Time required

for compilation

is reduced.

Time required for transfer from the personal

computer

to the PMC is reduced.

A ROM module with a smaller capacity

may be used.

l-94

5. OPERATION

On the other hand, condensed

mode has the restrictions

described

below.

Memory

map changes

(area expansion)

are likely

to occur

when

instructions,

symbols, in In

comments, condensed

and so forth are added when a ROM format file generated mode is transferred to the PMC and edited with the built-in to possible overlap between

by compilation editing function.

this case, the user needs to pay attention C language area.

the ladder area and

ROM format file Overlap (A C language program map change is required.)

1 language 1

A ROM format file generated a ROM format file generated

by compilation by compilation

in condensed in normal mode.

mode cannot

be compared

with

5.3.1 Operation
(1) Start

[Operation] a Select [COMPILJ (compile) from the main menu.

The compile screen appears (Fig. 5.3).

Compile Source Program name

~~~J@.-p>y<y?$y@gQ \.i\.\

\.._,.,\

A:YFLYiIATAYTEST

ROW formatfile name : A:YFLYDATAYTEST.tEl Series VC L PUC name Edilion &chine toolname Programe no.

/
!

~---

Fig. 5.3 (a)

Compile Screen

l-95

5. OPERATION

General

Flow of Operation

for compiling

Main menu

!$yg
Main menu Fig. 5.3 (b) Compiling (2) Compiling

Make#LS fie
General Operation and Screens

.- (a) Normal mode

When

PMCPAljPA3 mode.

is used,

selecting

[EXEC]

causes

programs

to compiled

in the

condense

[Operation] @ Specify a source program name and ROM format specifications. file name. The ROM format file

name must conform to the MS-DOS

Select (EXEC]. Note) For PMC-PAlIPA3. compilation in condensed mode is done by [EXEC].

Compilation

is performed

in the normal mode.

When the compiler compiler terminates

terminates abnormally,

normally,

memory

map information is output.

is output.

When the

an error message

(b) Condensed

mode

Compilation NB.

in condensed

mode can only be performed

with PMC-R series!PMC-QCPMC-

[Operation] 0 Specify a source program name and ROM format speciftcations. file name. The ROM format file name must conform to the MS-DOS

Select [CONDNS]

Compilation

is performed

in condensed

mode.

l-96

5. OPERATION

When the compiler compiler terminates

terminates abnormally,

normally,

memory

map information is output.

is output.

When the

an error message

(3) Output of compiling

result

The results of compilation following

are output to the screen displayed of whether an error or warning

by

[ERROR](F3 key) and to the


If many errors

text files, irrespective

has been issued.

occur, it is convenient

to print out pr check

the error fife with the text editor.

1)

If the step sequence

function

is selected

when setting a model, and if the following messages are output to the following

sample file.

source program is edited, the error and warning

Error file name Output directory

= =

TEST.ERR(depending A: Y FLY DATA%

on the source program)

Compiler

RCBGTEP SEQ) [A:YFLYDATAWFCY

source program name : A:YFLYDATAYTEST ROM format file name : A:YFLYDATAfTEST. #EX

Series Edition NC& PMC name

Machine tool name Program no.

2)

In other case than 1) above, the error and warning file.

messages

are output

to the following

Error file name Output directory

= =

FLMNE.ERR(fixed

name) system is stored

in which the FAPT LADDER

(4) Termination

[Operation]

Select [END).

C?9 The screen display returns to the main menu screen.

l-97

5. OPERATION

(5) Specification

of the input program name

(a) Specification

of the input program name

It is possible

to specify

the extension

of its input

program

name as following

3 types.

(Please refer to 1.1.2 compilation * #LS * #CN * No extension

function

about #LS.)

Specify the file WITH its extension It is possible program file. to select the file name with its extension for the #LS-file and the source

Example for the #LS-file.


TESTDATA.#LS

File name Example for the source program file.


TESTDATA.#CN

File name -

Specify the file WITHOUT

its extension its extension) for the #LS-file and

In case of there are some same file names (without the source file, target file is selected by system.

The order of priority for the target file specification 1 2 In case extension. The #LS-file The source program file of inputting the source program file,

is shown below.

please

select

the file

name

with

its

(b) Changing

the file name after using the making # LS file

In case of after using the making # LS file function


is changed to the LS-file name with its extension.

with #LS-file,

the input program name

(6) [LIST]

Command

(F4 KEY)

It is possible to use following


2)

functions

by [LIST].

1) The list of source program

indications

Making .#ls-file

The .#ls-file name.

name which is made by [LIST]

function.

is set into the space for source program

Refer to next page about the details of above mentioned.

l-98

5. OPERATION

Note) If the step sequence


function specified [LIST] command,

function

is selected

when

setting

a model, .#LS,

the link compile is not used. in the function The key

by the control statement,file

with extension

used to create a control statement,

is not included

menu and cannot be executed. (7) Indications of compilation result

MAIN.#LS
##### PASS1 ###I#

B:rb FLADDERY RC3ab MAIN B:Y FLADDERY RC3+ I-STEP B: Y FLADDERS' MODULE+ SUBPl B:a( FLADDERY MODULEY SUBPZ B:Y FLADDERY RC3+ END-STEP tcompilation result PASS 2 ####t PASS2 ##### B:Y FLADDERY RC3Y MAIN B:M FLADDERY RC3Y l-STEP B: + FLADDERY MODULE+ SUBPl Error end 20 (00111 Net ) B: Y FLADDERY MODULEM SUBPZ Error end 31 (00001 Net ) B:Y FLADDERY RC3M END-STEP compile completed error count=00002 warning count =OOOOO
PASS 1: PASS 2: Convert to object Syntax check

c Specified source program name +-Compilation result PASS 1 -Source program name (MAIN.#LS)

Relative net number in each program

5.3.2

Password set function (PMGRAl/RA3/RB3/RB4/RB5/RB6/RC3/RC4/NB/NB2)


is supported only in the FS16/18/21 -B.

This function

It enables a password to be added during compilation. The password CRT:MDI. password can be used to prohibit ladder programs from being displayed or edited on the

To discompile correctly.

a ladder program

guarded

with a password,

it is necessary

to enter the

(a) Password types


There are two password types. Each password consists of up to 8 alphanumeric characters.

Type
Password (R) Password (R/W)

Use Password to allow display on the FSlG-B Password to allow display and editing on the FSlG-B I

l-99

5. OPERATION

(b) How to specify use of a password To use a password, set as follows:

Open the initial set file (%%%FLSET.CNF),

using a commercially

available

editor.

:
: ; :

FAPT Text

LADDER Initial Editor

Setting

File

lS: editor
rpl_dha ladkey : :

=; =$; 1;

password=O; t

j-1 :
*tJ;
@ Specify whether to use a password

0:No password 1:Password (R/W) and 2:Password (R/W) 3:Password (RI

(R)

and

the type

of a password

(when

used)

after

password = .

Value 0 1 2 3 No password Both password Password Password

Password is used.

type

types R and RW are used.

type RW is used. type R is used.

(cl

Password setting (compile)

When password = 0

Gotoo.

When password = 1. 2, or 3: After compilation [EXEC] or [CONDNS] is selected, you will be prompted to specify

whether to use a password.

IDo

you

enter

password?

(Y/N)

To set a password.

press

cl

If password = 1 or 3, go to 0. If password = 2, go to @.

If it is unnecessary

to set a password,

press cl

Go to @.

l-100

5. OPERATION

The password Enter

(R) set screen appears. (R)

password

Enter a password. . * A password that can be used is a combination Uppercase and lowercase of 8 or less letters and.;or numerals. from each other. (If a lowercase

letters are not distinguished to be uppercase.)

letter is entered, it is assumed * . It is impossible Some character

to use space, kana. kanji, and special characters strings are unusable. string is entered as a password, string. on the screen. before any valid password -,

(such as l , #, and @). is displayed.

If one such character

an error message

In such a case, use another character * * An entered password If the <RETURN> is not displayed key is pressed

is specified,

use of a

password is not specified.

If password = 1, go to @. If password = 3, go to @.

When <ESC>

is pressed, an attempt to specify a password -+

is discontinued.

GotoO.

The password configuration Verification (R)

screen appears.

You will be prompted

to enter the same password

as entered

before,

to ensure that your

password was entered correctly. * When the password entered this time matches one that was entered before, it is

accepted. . When they do not match, the message You are allowed to retry entering When <ESC> twice. is discontinued. Password mismatch is displayed.

is pressed, an attempt to specify a password + +

Go tom. Go to@.

If password = 3 is specified.

The password Enter

(R#V) set screen appears. (R/W)

password

Enter a password .

(R/W).
of 8 or less letters from each

A password that can be used is a combination Uppercase and lowercase


letters

and!or numerals.
other. (If a lowercase

are not distinguished

letter is entered, it is assumed . . It is impossible Some character

to be uppercase.) (such as *, #, and @).

to use space. kana. kanji. and special characters strings are unusable. string is entered
character

If one such character

as a password,
string.

an error message

is displayed.

In such a case, use another

1-

101

5. OPERATION

. 1

An entered password If the <RETURN> password

is not displayed key is pressed

on the screen. before any valid password + Go to@. is rejected. is specified, use of a

is not specified.

When c ESC > is pressed, the attempt to specify a password +

Go too.

The password

confirmation

screen appears.

Verification

(R/W)

You will be prompted password When

to enter the same password

as entered

before, to ensure

that your

was entered correctly. the password entered this time matches one that was entered before, it is

accepted. When they do not match, the message .You are allowed to retry entering twice. is rejected. Password mismatch is displayed.

When -z ESC > is pressed, the attempt to specify a password -+

Go to@.

Compilation

begins.

(d) Password

entry (discompile) a password-protected ROM format file, it is necessary to enter a password.

To discompile

I
IBoth password

Set password

type

I Password Password Password Password

type to be entered type (R/w) type (RMI) type (R)

types (R) and (R.W)

Password type (R/W) Password type (R)

After discompilation

[EXEC]

is selected,

the following

password

entry screen appears

Enter password (R)

-1

Note) If an RMI password has been set


up, password displayed. (R.W) is

When the valid password If the newly entered discontinues.

is entered,

discompilation

begins. is displayed, and processing

password

is incorrect,

an error message

(You are allowed to retry entering When <ESC>

twice.) is rejected.

is pressed, the request to start discompilation

l-102

5. OPERATION

5.3.3

Changing

the Order of Subprograms


the source program, subdivided intosubprograms, is converted in ascending on the edit screen of the to a

When a program is compiled. single ROM file. numbers. programmer The

Within the ROM file, subprograms order in which subprograms

are arranged

order of subprogram built-in has

are displayed

function

of the PMC-RB4

or PMC-RC4

may be changed

after the source program

been uploaded to FAPT LADDER, decompiled,

compiled,

and downloaded.

5.3.4

It is possible to choose output data (Symbol/Comment, Net comment) to ROM format file

Compile Sourceprogram name ROM format file name

PMC-RB4

<O>[A:YFLYDATAfRB4 1

: A:YFLYDATAYRB4 : A:YFLYDATAYRB4.#EX

Output to ROM formatfile

SYMBOL ii COkHENT NET COMENT

[F61 tF71

YES PO1 NTERS ONLY

Compile Sourceprogramname ROM formatfile name


_..:.:..::.~ ::::..::.

PMC-RB4

<O>[A:YFLYDATAFRB4 ;

: A:YFLYDATAYRB4 : A:fFLYDATAYRB4. XEX ~..:...:::::j:::...::~. I:: :

Compi le normalend

compilecompleted error count = 000000 warningcount = 000000

EXEC

MAP

3 ERROR

F, SYMBOL

7 NETCMT

8 CONDNS

DOS

10

END

Fig. 53.4

(b) Compile end

l-103

5. OPERATION

(i)

F6 [SYMBOL] Select whether output or not output the symbol 8 comment HoweverJhe symbols which can not be displayed data to ROM format file. (7bytes or more symbols)

on CRTiMDl

and the coil comments

assigned

to them never output to ROM format file.

1) YES: (Default setting)


The symbols comments which can be displayed on CRT/MDl(Gbytes or less symbols) and the coil assigned to them are output to ROM format file. on CRT/MDI.

They can be displayed

2) "NO" :
No symbofcomment is converted to ROM format file. on CRTIMDI. Any symbol and comment is not displayed

(ii) F7 [NETCMT] If Net comment is used in ladder program, you can choose whether Net comment pointer

(Note2) is output to ROM format file or not.

1)

POINTERS

ONLY

: (Default setting) by CNC built-in editor and decompile the data by FAPT

To edit the ladder program LADDER, select this setting. However, format file. ladder

size gets larger

because

Net comment

pointer

is output

to ROM

2) "NO" :
Any Net comment pointer is not output to ROM format file. In this case, ladder size in the ROM format file is saved. However, decompile the ROM format file makes its net comment data information lost.

Note

1)

This item is in effect for Source-format source-program,this setting is ignored.

programs.

At the compilation

of FORMAT-B

Note

2)

Net comment

has its own character

information

only in a source

program

on the

personal computer. Compiled Only Net ROM format file does not include comment pointer( = any net comment characters. position.) can be

information

of net comment NOP.

output to ROM format file as an functional This Net comment ROM format pointer

instruction

helps to restore on CNC

net comment built-in editor

date at decompiling and uploaded

the

file that

is edited

to FAPT

LADDER.

l-104

5. OPERATION

5.3.5

The list of source program

(a)

The list of source program indications

The file (selected directory) Making the #LS-file

appears.

(4

Please select the source program, (Note) It is impossible

and then the #LS-file

is registered. PMC type. Because error

to resister

by source program of different operation.

occur on print out/compilation

The sequence

of making the #LS-file

as following

flow chart.

Select the list of source program

Display the list of source program (The target file indications)

Select one of source program (Register to #LS-file)

(1) Start

(a) Select [LIST]

(< F2 > : Print out/< F4 > : Compilation)

(b) The list of source program The target file indications

screen appears Source program file indications. (Indicated directory)

Indications .. DIR : xxx

Meaning Parent-directory Sub-directory PMC type

l-105

5. OPERATION

Selected file indications

Selected target file is indicated

by absolute-pass.

Fig. 5.35

(1)

The List of Source Program Screen

(2) Function key indications and selection

The list of source program functions

correspond

to the function

keys as indicated

below.

(a) [LIST1
EXEC

1
CHANGE 1 (W EXTEND DRIVE SEARCH 1 (c) END

(b) [CHANGE] 1

DELETE

INSERT

CHANGE

END

(c) [SEARCH) 5

TOP

BOTTOM

FILE

PCTYPE 1 (d)

END

(d) [PCTYPEJ 1

PREV

NEXT

END

l-106

5. OPERATION

(3) Making of #LS-file [EXEC]

The sequence

for registration

source program file to #LS-file

is shown below.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Source file indications

(The target file indications) file

The cursor moves to the selection Push the <RETURN Changing

> key (Registration) (changing of the select file)

of selected file

Select [EXEC]

(Making of the #LS-file + End)

The #LS-file name is changed Each data (System 1st registered file.

to the 1st registered

file name .#LS. module) is effective in the

parameter~TitleSymbol&comment:Message/lO

(4) The list of source program indications

(a) Changing

of directory

with drive [DRIVE]

Changing

of drive + directory

use [DRIVE]

software key. by <cursor > keys.

It is possible to change directory The following

in the same directory

message appears after push the [DRIVE].

INPUT DRIVE NAME, PLEASE '

Example Specification of only drive (Changing to B:)

B:<RETURN>
Specification by absolute-path

+ drive (Changing to B:\DATA)

B:\DATA<RETURN>
(b) Changing of file extension

[EXTEND]

[EXTEND]

is used to change extension

(A part of 5_ mark on Fig. 53.1

(2).

It is possible to indicate file name except source program by changing In case of there are some selected Extension files, it is impossible by [EXTEND]

extension.

to use this function.

can be changed

Fig. 5.3.5 (2)

A Part of Target File Indications

l-107

5. OPERATION

The following

message

appears after pushing

the [EXTEND].

INPUT EXCHANGE EXTEND(MAX 3 CHA.) '

Result from specification File indications (Without extension)

File name with specified

extension

Searching

for a fle in the source file list [SEARCH]

Following

functions

to &arch

in the source file list are available.

1. 2. 3. 4.

Searching Searching Searching

for the first file for the last file by file name

[TOPI [BOTTOM] [FILE] [PCTYPE]

Searching by PMC model

(4

Searching

for the first file [TOP]

The cursor moves to the first file in the current directory.

lb)

Searching

for the last file [BOTTOM]

The cursor moves to the last file in the current directory.

Searching

by file name [FILE]

Type a filename When specified When specified to continue

followed

by [FILE]. file. And then, it is possible

file exists, the cursor moves to the specified file does not exist, an error message any key.

is displayed.

to search by pressing the search function,

To terminates

press < ESC > key or select [EXEC].

(4

Searching

by PMC model (PCTYPE)

Type a PMC type, for example When files with specified possible following to select operations

RC3, followed

by [PCTYPE]. the cursor moves to the file. <RETURN> And then, it is key. And,

PMC type exist,

the file at th e cursor are also allowed. for the previous

position

by pressing

[PREV] searches [NEXT] searches

backward

occurrence

of file with specified

PMC type.

forward for the next occurrence

of file with specified

PMC type. And the, it is

When no file with specified possible to continue To terminates

PMC type exrsts, an error message any key.

is displayed.

to search by pressing

the search function,

press < ESC z= key or select [ENDj.

l-108

5. OPERATION

(6)

Changing

the selected

file list [CHANGE]

Following

functions

to change the list of selected files are available.

1. 2.

Deleting a file Inserting a file

[DELETE] [INSERT]

This operation file list area.

is also used to move the cursor between

the source

file list area and selected

(a) Deleting

a file [DELETE]

A file at the cursor position

is deleted.

And, the files following

the deleted

file are shifted

one line upward on the display.

(b] Inserting

a file [INSERT]
at the cursor position and then the cursor moves to the source file

A blank line is inserted list area. By selecting a source

file in the source

file list area, the selected

file is inserted

at the

blank line and the cursor moves to the inserted file name.

(c] Terminates Function

the changing

of selected

file list [END]/ < ESC >

to change the selected

file list terminates.

(7) Terminating

[END ]/ < ESC >

The source program listing function

terminates.

In this case no .#LS file is created.

5.3.6

DOS command
shell from FAPT LADDER by pushing this, key in the command [DOS] key. command line.

You can call MS-DOS If you want to terminate

as bellow at MS-DOS

A:bEXIT

l-109

5. OPERATION

5.4 Decompilation
During decompilation, printed out. Data that is uploaded from the PMC or is read from ROM is ROM format file data. Such data must be decompiled Data in the a ROM format file is translated into a source program that can be edited or

ROM format file cannot be edited or printed out. edited or printed out.

before it can be

(Note)

To discompile password.

a password-protected

ROM

format

file,

it is necessary

to enter

(See Section 5.3.)

5.4.1

Operation

(1) Start
[Operation] 0 Select [DISCPL] (decompile) from the main menu.

The decompile

screen appears (Fig. 5.4).

2, 1: 3) 4, 51 6~ 7 8) 9)

COUtiTER DATA TYPE PMC.:OS SERIES LADDER EXEC (UNUSED, (UNUSED) (UNUSED (UNUSED SYNCHRONIZED LEVEL P&Z/OS EDITION

: :

405: SerieS ( O:BINARI.l:BCD 100% ( 100 - 150%

) 1

: 0:

( 0:NO.

1:YES

Fig. 5.4

Discompile

Screen

(2) Decompiling

[Operation] 0 Specify a ROM format file name and source program name.

Select [EXEC] on the decompile

screen.

l-110

5. OPERATION

Decompilation

is performed

and memory map information

is output.

@ When

the decompiler is output.

terminates

normally,

the

message

DECOMPILE

TERMINATED is

NORMALLY output.

When the decompiler

terminates

abnormally,

an error message

(3) Termination

[Operation] 0 Select [END].

The screen display returns to the main menu screen. PASCAL and C language data is lost. After editing and

(Note

1)

During

decompilation,

recompilation,

link PASCAL and C language data again. in condensed mode can be decompiled can be recompiled in

(Note 2) A ROM format file generated by compilation


using the same operation. After editing, condense moded, if necessary.

the source

program

l-111

5. OPERATION

5.4.2

Outputting

to split files
are output files. to a source program, they are split into units of

When the results subprograms

of decompilation

and output to different

For details, see Section 9.1.

ROM program

Source program LEVEL1 #LA

Ladder 1st level LEVEL2.#LA

Ladder 2nd level LEVELB.#LA END3 (SUB 3)

1 1

Ladder 3rd level

SP (SUB 7

SPE (SUB 72) v

SP (SUB 71)

PO02

SPE (SUB 72) L

1 *
I
The END instruction is not included in

SP (SUB

IH END (SUB 64) 1-1


1

the source program. The instruction is automatically added

when the program is compiled.

1-112

5. OPERATION

54.3

Converting a step sequence program according to the model


are used to convert a ladder program according to the model. SEQ) is

Usually, mnemonics However, converted

a ROM file is used only when a step sequence for the PMCRC4(STEP SEQ.

program for the PMCRB4(STEP

[Procedure] 1) Compile program. 2) 3) 4) Set model PMC-RCI(STEP Select F4 (DECOMPILE) SEQ) for FAPT LADDER. from the main menu. the program. the step sequence program for the PMCRB4(STEP SEQ) and create a ROM

Specify the ROM file created in step 1)above and decompile

The program is converted. the PMC-RC4(STEP SEQ.

The step sequence

program read into FAPT LADDER

can be used for

5.4.4

Merge
file is specified for output source program when decompiling, the existent

In case the existent

source program is deleted and new source program is created with the contents In this case it is possible program by specifying

of ROM data. in source

to merge the Ladder in ROM data with the SymboVCommnet function-key.

the undermentioned

- When the used name is specified

for source program

Decompile ROM format file name Source program name OOutput

PMC-RB4

<O>[A:YFL%DATAYRB4

: A:YFLYDATAYRB4.#EX : A:yFLYDATAyRB4

to Source program [F4] YES [FS] SOURCE DATA(effective)

SYMBOL/COMMENT MERGE Duplicated symbol definition

Specified Overwrite

source program already exists. 7 (Y/N)

1-113

5. OPERATION

(1)

F4 [MERGE] This specification decides whether to merge the symbol/comment by NO or YES.

1)

NO The

: (Default setting) existent source program is deleted and new source program is created with the

contents

of ROM data. in this condition.

There is no display of F5[SYNBOL)

2)

YES

: in source program is merged with that in ROM data. As for the other ROM data is effective. F5[SYMBOL] will be displayed to specify which symbol

The symbolkommnet

data except symbol/comment, Just after this specification,

definition

is effective,

either in source program or in ROM data, when they are in conflict.

(2)

F5 [SYMBOL] F5[SYMBOL] will be displayed decides when YES symbol is specified definition for F4[SYMBOL]. source program or ROM data is

This specification effective

which

in either

when they are in conflict.

1)

SOURCE

DATA

: (Default setting) in source program is effective.

The symbol definition

2)

ROM

DATA in ROM data is effective.

The symbol definition

l-114

5. OPERATION

(3) The combination

of F4[MERGE]

and F5[DUPADR],

and its result.

+-Ix0.0

ROM format file - Symbol/Comment data ADDRESS SYMBOL(6byte)

COIL-COMMENT(30byte)

xxxxxx
YYYYYY

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

R1.4

Source program - Symbol/Comment data ADDRESS SYMBOL(16byte) RELAY-COMMENT(16byte)


x0.0

COIL-COMMENT(30byte) AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

Y2.3 Y4.7

AAAAAAAAAA BBBBBBBB YYYYYY

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA BBBBBBBBBBBBBB

+a)

The result of "MERGE = NO" Source program x0.0 xxxxxx R1.4 YYYYYY xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

tb)

The result of "MERGE = YES" and "Symbol definition = ROM data". Source program x0.0 xxxxxx Y2.3 BBBBBBBB Y4.7 YYYYYY xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

BBBBBBBBBBBBBB

tc)

The result of "MERGE = YES" and "Symbol definition=source Source program x0.0 AAAAAAAAAA BBBBBBBB Y2.3 R1.4 YYYYYY AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA BBBBBBBBBBBBBB

program".

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

l-115

5. OPERATION

5.5 Link
During linking, load modules a ROM format file. created in the C language, PASCAL, or other language are linked with and or

The C language

can be used only with

PMCNIRCIRC3iRC4/QCINB. PASCAL,

PASCAL can be used only with PMC-N. similar language is not used.

Linking is not required when the C language,

Transferred and PMC

to the ROM writers

(Note 1) The format of load modules


However,

varies

between

PMC-N

and PMCRC/RC3/RC4:QC/NB.

linking with FAPT LADDER is the same. In addition, with

(Note 2) This function enables linking to be performed on a personal computer.


this function, load modules a ROM format file holding can be separately transferred

only ladder data, and C language

or PASCAL line in

to and linked on the PMC (dotted

the figure below).

C prooram development

environment

for PMC-N
l

- Personal computer - FAPT LADDER


C language 1
1

P-G FAPT PASCAL PASCAL load

source

ICM (compiler)

FANUC distribution library 1

. . . . . . . . . _ ROM file

format

LMB (linker)

LMT (converter)

1
C language load module

ttt Link + ROM format file with C language/PASCAL load modules linked

.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . .

PMC-N
Debug

1-116

5. OPERATION

C oroqram development

environment

for PMC-RC

(RC3!RCWQC!NB)

-Personal

computer Link control statement creation tool FAPT LADDER

J
C language source Link control source ROM format file J-Y iC286 (compiler) 1 -library BND386 (binder) + BLD386 (binder) 0J386 $_ (converter) HEX2SREC (Note) FANUC distribution

Link _

+ Intel hexadecimal load module -:

L:
-:

ROM format file with C language load modules linked

.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. *

PMC_RC

i I vv$

I t I
I

(Note)

FAPT LADDER does not allow Intel hexadecimal operation, convert the file format by referring

load modules

to be linked. Users Manual.

Before link

to the HEX2SREC

On the indicated

PMCRCIRC3IRC4IQC/NB, above cannot be directly

load linked.

modules Perform

created

in the

development

languages This

the below operation

before linking.

program is provided on the following

floppy disk:

RBiRC Module Floppy

(A08B-9200-J604

#JP)

Edition 3.1 or later Edition 3.1 or later Edition 1.0 or later Edition 1.0 or later Edition 1.0 or later Edition 1.0 or later

(A08B-9201 -J604 #EN) QC Module Floppy (A08B-9200-J605#JP) (A08B-9201 -J605-#EN) NB Module Floppy (A08B-9200-J606#JP) (A08B-9201 -J606-#EN)

[Operation] 0 Execute HEX2SREC.EXE in response to the MS-DOS prompt. Specify as follows:

A:\FLADDER\APPENDIX,

HEXZSREC

input-file-name

output-file-name

Conversion

is performed.

1-117

5. OPERATION

Check that specified

file names have been created using the DIR command.

Specify linking.

an output file name (for example.

SAMPLE.%)

as the load module

file name for

(Note)

When

the extension Output to SR.

of an input is directed

file name

is omitted,

the name

extension

.HEX

is is in

assumed. changed

to a file with the same of the following

but the extension

The specification
SAMPLE.SR

files has the same effect

input/output:
HEXZSREC HEX2SREC HEXZSREC HEXZSREC SAMPLE.HEX SAMPLE SAHPLE.SR SAMPLE.HEX SAMPLE

(1) Starting linking

(Operation] @I Select [LINK] from the main menu.

The link screen appears (Fig. 5.5).

Load

module

file file

name name Edition

: :

A:YDATAYC-MODULE. A:YDATAYSAMPLE. tool name

SR #EK

ROM format Series

Machine

NC & PMC name

Program

no.

Fig. 5.5

Link Screen

(2) Linking

[Operation] @ Specify the load module file name and ROM format file name to link. name must conform specified to MS-DOS specifications. The load module file

Here the load module file name should be For PMC-RC, specify an output program

with its extension

(--------.

l **).

name for HEX2SREC.

Select [EXEC].

1-118

5. OPERATION

Linking is executed.

(3) Termination

[Operation] 0 Select [END].

The screen display returns to the main menu screen.

5.6 Input/Output
There are three types of input/output operations, as described below.

1) 2) 3)

ROM read/write

operation

by the ROM writer (PMC or FA writer).

Transfer with the PMC RAM via an RS-232C interface. Input/output between PMC RAM and a memory card or floppy disk (FD) via a Floppy Cassette

Adapter or Handy File, respectively.

On the PC-9801 device driver.

series PC, types 1) and 2) require to the description

RSDRV.SYS,

which

is an MS-DOS

standard

Install it according

in Section 2.1.

[Operation] 0 Switch off the personal cable. 0 0 @ @ (See Appendix computer 1.) make sure that RSDRVSYS has been installed. and input/output unit, and connect them via an RS232C

Before starting FAPT LADDER, Start FAPT LADDER. Select [l/O] (input/output) The input/output

from the main menu.

menu appears.

1-119

5. OPERATION

Table 5.6 Input/output ROM writers (PMC WRITER, FA WRITER) (MMC)) destination

Baud Rate Setting Baud rate setting (bps) 4800

FANUC Series 0 (PMC-L/M!M FANUC Power Mate-MODEL FANUC Series 15 (PMC-N) FANUC Series 158 (PMC-NA)

4800 (9600) 4800 (9600) 480019600

(Note 1) (Note 2) (Note 3)

A/B/C/E (PMC-P)

FANUC Series 16/18!20 (PMC-R series) FANUC Series 15B (PMC-NB) FANUC F-D Mate mini (PMC-QC) FANUC Power Mate-MODEL D (PMCPAl/PA3)

4800/9600

(Note 1) In input/output
possible necessary

operations

with the FANUC Series 0. a transmission on the PMC LOADING screen.

at 9600 bps is

only for downloading

In this case, it is

to make the settings of the CNC match those of the personal computer. operations with the FANUC Power Mate MODEL-A/B/C/D, a

(Note 2) In input/output
transmission

at 9600 bps is possible

only for uploading

and comparison.

In this

case, it is necessary computer.

to make the settings

of the CNC match those of the personal

(Note 3) In input/output

operations

with the FANUC

Series

15, transmissions

at both 4800 of the

and 9600 bps are possible.

In this case, it is necessary

to make the settings

CNC match those of the personal computer.

[Reference]

I!0 port setting to the values in the following data files.

FAPT LADDER sets up ports according

1) 2)

PC9801 version IBM PC/AT version

: :

FLIO

98.DAT

FLIO-AT.DAT So, a text editor can be used to change set values in the files.

These files are in text format.

l-120

5. OPERATION

1)

Contents (effective

of the FLl0_98DAT data section only) = IO-PORT-SET


= RO. 4800. B8, PN. S2, NONE = RO. 4800, B8, PN. S2, NONE = RO. 4800, B8, PN. S2. NONE =RO, 4800, B8, PN. S2, NONE

2)

Contents (effective

of the FLIO_AT.DAT data section only) = IO-PORT-SET


=COMl =COMl =COMl : 48, N. 8.2 : 48, N. 8. 2 : 48, N. 8. 2

DATA-BLOCK
FA-WRITER PMC-WRITER PMC-L PMC-M PMC-M PMC-M (TT) (AXIS) (AXIS)

DATA-BLOCK
PM&WRITER FA-WRITER PMC-L PMC-M PMC-M PMC-M (-IT) (AXIS)

=COM1:48.N,8.2 =COMl =COMl =COMl (AXIS) =COMI -COMl =COMl =COMl (l/O) (I/O, TT) (I/O, AXIS) (l/O) =COMl =COMl =COtVll =COMl -COMl =COMl =COMl =COMl =COMl =COMl =COMl -COMl =COMl =COMl -COMl = COMl =COMl =COMl (STEP-SEQ) (STEP-SEQ) =COMl =COMl : 48, N, 8.2 : 48, N, 8.2 : 48. N, 8, 2 : 48. N, 8,2 : 96, N. 8.2 : 48, N, 8,2 : 96, N, 8.2 : 48, N, 8.2 : 48. N, 8,2 : 48, N, 8,2 : 96, N, 8.2 : 96, N, 8, 2 : 96, N, 8,2 : 96, N, 8.2 : 96, N, 8,2 : 96, N, 8,2 : 96. N, 8,2 : 96. N, 8.2 : 96. N, 8.2 : 96, N, 8.2 : 96, N, 8, 2 : 96, N. 8, 2 : 96. N, 8,2 : 96, N, 8.2 : 96, N. 8, 2 : 96, N. 8, 2 : 96, N, 8.2

= RO, 4800.88, = RO. 4800.88,

PN. S2, NONE PN. S2. NONE

PMC-MMC PMC-MMC PMC-N PMC-P PMC-OA PMC-M PMC-M PMC-M (I/O) (I/O, TT) (l/O, AXIS)

= RO, 4800, 88. PN. S2. NONE = RO. 4800, B8, PN. S2, NONE -RD. 9600,88, PN, S2, NONE

PMC-MMC PMC-MMC PMC-N PMC-P PMC-QA PMC-M PMC-M PMC-M PMC-N PMC-RB PMC-RC PMC-RAl PMC-RA2 PMC-RB2 PMC-RA3 PMC-RB3 PMC-RC3 PMC-PA1 PMC-PA3 PMC-QC PMC-NB PMC-RB4 PMC-RC4 PMC-RB4 PMC-RC4

- RO, 4800, B8, PN, S2. NONE - RO, 9600, B8, PN, S2, NONE = RO. 4800, B8, PN, S2, NONE =RO, 4800,88. = RO. 4800,88, = RO, 9600.88, PN. S2, NONE PN, S2, NONE PN, S2, NONE

PMC-N (l/O) PMC-RB PMC-RC PMC-RAl PMC-RAP PMC-RBP PMC-RA3 PMC-RB3 PMC-RC3 PMC-PA1 PMC-PA3 PMC-OC PMC-NB PMC-RB4 PMC-RC4 PMC-RB4 PMC-RC4 (STEP-SEC)) (STEP-SEO)

= RO, 9600, B8, PN, S2, NONE = RO, 9600, B8, PN, S2, NONE = RO, 9600,68, PN, 52, NONE

= RO, 9600, 88, PN, S2, NONE = RO, 9600, 88. PN. S2, NONE = RO, 9600. 88, PN, S2, NONE = RO, 9600,88, = RO. 9600,88, = RO, 9600.88, PN, S2, NONE PN, S2, NONE PN, S2. NONE

= RO, 9600, B8, PN, S2. NONE =RO. 9600, B8. PN. S2, NONE = RO. 9600, B8, PN, S2, NONE = RO, 9600,88, PN. S2. NONE

= RO, 9600, 88, PN. S2. NONE = Ro, 9600, B8. PN, S2, NONE = RO, 9600,88. PN, S2. NONE

Entity on the left-hand Entity on the

side of each equal sign ( =) : Device side of each equal sign (=) : Represented in the format of each (baud

right-hand command.

SPEED/MODE

Only the first parameter

(port number)

and second

parameter

rate) can be changed.

1 - 121

5. OPERATION

5.6.1

ROM writers (PMC writer, FA writer)


data is written to ROM installed in the PMC. 5.6. For information on the setting of a

ROM format personal

computer

for I/O operation,

see Section

ROMs which

can be used depend

on the

PMC model, as indicated

in Table 56.1.

When using the FA writer, place it in remote mode.

Table 5.6.1 ROMs Usable with Each PMC Model PMC model PMC-L/M PMC-N PMC-RAl /RA2/RA3/RB 256K-bit Usable ROM ROM, 2 each (note 1)

ROM cassette A, B, C, D, and E lM-bit lM-bit ROM ROM/ROM module B (note 2)

PMCRB2/RB3 PMC-RCIRC3 PMC-QA

ROM module A, B, C, and D ROM cassette A, B

(1) Read
[Operation] 0 Select [WRT] (writer) on the I/O menu screen.

Select [READ].

Enter the name of a ROM format file containing

read data.

@I Read operation

is executed.

During operation,

the indication

EXECUTING

blinks.

When read operation

terminates

normally,

the indication

NORMAL

END

is output.

(2) Write

[Operation] 0 Select [WRT] (writer) on the I/O menu screen.

Select [WRITE].

Enter the name of a ROM format file to be written.

Writing is executed.

During operation,

the indication

EXECUTING

blinks.

When writing terminates

normally,

the indication

NORMAL

END

is output.

l-122

5. OPERATION

(3) Verification

[Operation] 0 Select [WRT] (writer) on the I/O menu screen.

Select [VERIFY].

Enter the name of a ROM format file to be verified.

@ Verification

is executed.

During operation,

the indication

EXECUTING

blinks.

When verification

terminates

normally,

the indication

NORMAL

END

is output.

(4) Blank check

[Operation] 0 Select [WRT] (writer) on the I10 menu screen.

Select [BLANK]

(blank check).

(3

Enter the name of a ROM format file to check.

@I Blank checking

is executed.

During operation,

the indication

EXECUTING

blinks.

@ When blank checking

terminates

normally,

the indication

NORMAL

END

is output.

(5) Termination

[Operation] 0 Select [END].

The screen display returns to the main menu screen.

(Note

1)

Input/output

with ROM for PMC-UM a high ROM is paired with a low ROM. When performing I/O to and FAPT LADDER allows a pair of a high At this time, the < F2 > key can of a

With PMC-UM,

from ROM with an FA writer on a PMC-L/M, ROM and low ROM to be processed be used to switch between pair of ROMs.

concurrently.

the processing

of a single ROM or the processing

1 - 123

5. OPERATION

1st PAIR

2nd PAIR

3rd PAIR

4th PAIR

7 High side Low side OEl OF1 PMC-L , PMC-M 0E2 OF2

0
Socket allocation for concurrent

q 10clOClcl
processing

of pairs of ROMs with the FA writer

Writinq During concurrent writing, data can be written to a maximum of four pairs of ROMs.

Readina and verification During concurrent reading or verification, only one pair of ROMs can be handled socket number at a time.

When two or more pairs are set, the ROMs with the smallest verified.

are read or

(Note 2) When writing


displayed

1Mbit

ROM

for PMC-RB2

with

FA writer,

ID

ERROR

will

be

on FA writer.

But writing terminates

normally. data to and from EPROM. (EPROM

(Note 3) PMC-P, PA1IPA3,


cannot be installed

NB, QC do not transfer in PMC-P, PAlIPA3,

NB, QC.)

5.6.2

Transfer

to and from PMC-L/M


to and from PMC-L/M.

(FANUC

Series 0)
5.6 for the setting of the personal

Data can be transferrod computer

See Section

for I/O operz.:lon.

FAPT LADDER

1 Switchable Parameter between 4800 bps and 9600 bps No. 0060

)-

FSO

PMC loading screen

11 Download

IL

I 4800 bps (fixed)

(Note)
(Note)

+I
I

I/O (P-G) screen

1
I

II

4800 bps (fixed) Upload Ib 4800 bps (fixed)

(Note)

4
I

PO (P-G) screen

1
1

I FSO baud rate settinq

(Note)

A ladder editing cassette

is required for this operation.

1-124

5. OPERATION

SYSTEM P-MODEL G PHC LOADING ADDRESS DATA : : OOOOH OOH i


Fig. 5.6.2 (a) PMC Load Screen

READ OR WRITE OR VERIFY EXECUTING


1 [CANCEL] [ Fig. 5.6.2 (b) 11 II 1

l/O (P-G) Screen

(1) FSO baud rate setting This setting functions only for download operation using the PMC load screen.

[Operation] *O Press < DGNOSPARAM > to display the parameter screen.

*Q A baud rate can be set by specifying

the parameter

as follows:

bit 7 0060

bit 6

bit 5

bit 4

bit 3

bit 2

bit 1 PCLDB

bit 0

PCLDB 0 : 4800 bps 1 : 9600 bps

*a

After a parameter

change, turn the power off then on again.

(2) Download

(a) Download (using the PMC load screen)


[Operation] 0 8 @ Select [PMC] on the l/O menu screen. Select (DNLOAD] (download) on the PMC menu screen.

Enter a ROM format file name.

*@ Press c 1> on the PMC load select screen of the CNC. (Select (1) LOAD FROM I/O. The screen shown in Fig. 5.6.2(a) appears.) Position the cursor on LOAD for the output route on the PMC menu screen, then press the <RETURN> Downloading key. During operation, normally, the indication EXECUTING END blinks. is output.

is executed.

When downloading

terminates

the indication

NORMAL

1-125

5. OPERATION

(b) Download

(operation

using

the l/O (P-G) screen)

[Operation] @Select [PMC] on the I/O menu screen.

Select [DNLOADJ

(download)

on the PMC menu screen.

Enter a ROM format file name.

*@ Press < 5 > on the PMC load select screen of the CNC. (Select (5) EDIT LADDER.)

*@ Press the CNC soft keys 5.6.2(b) appears.)

[l/O]

and [P-G]

in this order.

(The screen

shown

in Fig.

451 Position

the cursor on EDIT for the output route on the PMC menu screen, then press key.

the <RETURN>

Download blinks.

operation

is executed.

During

operation,

the

indication

EXECUTING

@I When downloading

terminates

normally,

the indication

NORMAL

END is output.

(Note)

During downloading

to PMC-L/M,

symbol and comment

data is not transferred.

(3) Upload

[Operation] 0 Select [PMC] on the I/O menu screen.

Select [UPLOAD]

on the PMC menu screen.

*a

Press <5>

on the PMC load select screen of the CNC.

(Select (5) EDIT LADDER.)

*@ Press the CNC soft keys [VO] and [P-G] in this order. appears.)

(The screen shown in Fig. 5.6.2(b)

Enter a ROM format file name.

Uploading

is executed.

During operation,

the indication

EXECUTING

blinks.

When uploading

terminates

normally,

the indication

NORMAL

END is output.

l-126

5. OPERATION

(4) Comparison
[Operation ] @ Select [PMC] on the I/O menu screen.

Select [COMPAR]

(comparison)

on the PMC menu screen.

43 Press <5>

on the PMC load select screen of the CNC.

(Select (5) EDIT LADDER.)

*@I Press the CNC soft keys [I/O] and [P-G] in this order. appears.)

(The screen shown in Fig. 5.6.2(b)

Enter a ROM format file name.

Comparison

is executed.

During operation,

the indication

EXECUTING

blinks.

When comparison

terminates

normally,

the indication

NORMAL

END is output.

(5) Termination
[Operation] 0 Select [END].

C3 The screen display returns to the main menu screen.

(Note)

In the operations on the CNC.

above, an asterisk prefixed

to a circled number represents

an operation

l-127

5. OPERATION

5.6.3

Transfer to and from PMC-P (FANUC Power Mate-MODEL A/B/C/E)


to and from PMC-P. See Section 5.6 for the setting of the personal need to be set

Data can be transferred computer for 10 operation.

To transfer data to and from PMC-P, some parameters according to Item (1) below.

on the Power Mate.

Set the parameters

- FAPT LADDER 4800 bps (fixed) 1 Download //


I

. Power

Mate-MODEL A/B/C/E

PMC loading screen

1 1 Upload 1

Switchable Parameter Switchable Parameter

between 4800 bps and 9600 bps Nos. &0226 or &0227 between 4800 bps and 9600 bps Nos. &0226 or &0227

Diagnostic

screen

11 Comparison

It

Diagnostic

screen

Power Mate-MODEL

ABICE

baud rate setting

(1) Power

Mate-MODEL

A/B/C/E

setting

PMC-P needs to be made ready for 110 operation. Mate.

The operation

below is required

on the Power

[Operation ] $0 Press < DGNOSPARAM > to display the parameter screen.

*a

Position the cursor on the I!0 parameter, (Specify 0 or 1 in the I!0 parameter

then press < 0 > < INPUT > or < 1 > <INPUT

>.

setting.)

*O Set the parameters When I!0 parameter

as follows: settinq = 0

bit 7 &0006

bit 6

bit 5

bit 4

bit 3

bit 2

bit 1

bit 0

I-I-I-I-I-I-lOIll

&0009

I
I
I

&0014

I
BRATEO

I
I

&0226

BRATEO

1 0:

4800 bps

1 1 : 9600 bps

1-128

5. OPERATION

When the I/O parameter

settino

= 1

bit 7 II0006

bit 6

bit 5

bit 4

bit 3

bit 2

bit 1

bit 0

a0010

&0014

8~0227

I BRATEl 1 0: 4800 bps

BRATEl

1 1 : 9600 bps

(Note)

The mark -

represents

a parameter

not associated

with this function.

*@ After a parameter

change, turn the power off and then on again.

(2) Download

[Operation] 0 Select [PMC] on the I!0 menu screen.

Select [DNLOAD]

(download)

on the PMC menu screen.

*@ Turn on power to the CNC while holding down < 0 > and <X/AXIS

> at the same time.

*@ The indication

PMC LOADING

is output on the CRT screen of the CNC.

Enter a ROM format file name.

Downloading

is executed.

During operation, =) counts up.

the indication

EXECUTING

blinks, and the

address indication

(ADDRESS

@ When downloading

terminates

normally,

the indication

NORMAL

END

is output.

(Note)
(3) Upload

During downloading

to PMC-P, symbol and comment

data is not transferred.

[Operation] Select [PMC] on the I!0 menu screen.

Select [UPLOAD]

on the PMC menu screen.

Enter a ROM format file name.

l-129

5. OPERATION

@I The indication

PLEASE

SET UP PMC

is output.

*8

Turn on power to the CNC, then press < DGNOSIPARAM screen.

> twice to display the diagnostic

*@3 Press <NO. > on the CNC, then press <WRITE>

while holding down

< * >.

(?I Uploading

is executed.

During

operation,

the indication

EXECUTING

blinks, WRITE

and the blinks.

address indication

(ADDRESS

=) counts up.

On the CNC, the indication

When uploading

terminates WRITE

normally,

the indication

NORMAL

END

is output.

On the

CNC, the indication

disappears.

(4) Comparison

[Operation] 0 Select ]PMC) on the I/O menu screen.

Select [COMPARJ

(comparison)

on the PMC menu screen.

Enter a ROM format file name.

@I The indication

PLEASE

SET UP PMC

is output.
> twice to display the diagnostic

*@ Turn on power to the CNC, then press < DGNOSPARAM screen. *Q Press <NO. > on the CNC, then press C WRITE>

while holding down

< >-

Comparison

is executed.

During

operation,

the indication

EXECUTING

blinks, WRITE

and the blinks.

address indication

(ADDRESS

=) counts up.

On the CNC, the indication

@I When comparison CNC, the indication

terminates WRITE

normally, disappears.

the indication

NORMAL

END

is output.

On the

(5) Termination
[Operation] 0 Select [END].

The screen display returns to the main menu screen.

(Note)

In the operations on the CNC.

above, an asterisk prefixed

to a circled number

represents

an operation

l-130

5. OPERATION

5.6.4

Transfer to and from PMC-N/NA (FANUC Series 15MODEL A, -MODEL B)


to and from PMC-N. To transfer See Section 5.6 for the setting PMC-N, of the personal is

Data can be transferred computer required.

for I/O operation. See Item (1) below.

data to and from

FS15 baud rate setting

- FAPT LADDER Switchable between 4800 bps and 9600 bps [DATA TRANSFER RATE (OFF-LINE)] 1 Download b Switchable between 4800 bps and 9600 bps fDATA TRANSFER RATE (OFF-LINE)1 Upload Ib Switchable between 4800 bps and 9600 bps [DATA TRANSFER RATE (OFF-LINE)] 1 Comparison b

FS15

Title screen

II

I/O screen

j110[

FS15 baud rate settinq

(1) FS15 baud rate setting


FS15 baud rate setting 4800 bps. is required. On the FSl5, data can be transferred computer below. at either 9600 bps or

The baud rate setting on the personal Operation on the FS15 is described

needs to match the baud rate setting

on the FS15.

[Operation] *@ Press the < CNCIPMC > key.

*8

Press the soft keys [PCPRM]

and [MODE]

in this order.

*@ The following

information

is output on the CRT screen of the CNC:

PMC MODE PMC DATA INITXALIZE DATA TRANSFER RATE (OFF-LINE) DATA TRANSFER TO RAMBOARD RAM ENABLE (PC DGN,EDIT) DATA TRANSFER RATE (AUX)

OFF

ON

9600BPS MANUAL
OFF

4800BPS AUTO
ON

4800BPS

9600BPS

*@ Press the values

of both

DATA

TRANSFER

RATE

(OFF-LINE)

and DATA

TRANSFER

RATE (AUX) by moving the cursor and using soft keys.

1-

131

5. OPERATION

(2) Download

[Operation] @ Select [PMC] on the l/O menu screen.

Select [DNLOAD]

(download)

on the PMC menu screen.

*$! Press the <CNC/PMC>

key of the CNC.

*@I Press the CNC soft keys [EDIT] and [TITLE]

in this order.

61 Enter a ROM format file name.

@ B

Downloading

is executed.

During operation, normally,

the indication

EXECUTING END

blinks. is output.

When downloading

terminates

the indication

NORMAL

(3) Upload

[Operation] 0 Select [PMC] on the I/O menu screen.

Select [UPLOAD]

on the PMC menu screen.

Enter a ROM format file name.

@I Initialization

is started and the indication

INITIALIZE

EXECUTE

is output.

61 The indication PLEASE

INITIALIZE

EXECUTE is output.

disappears.

After a few seconds,

the indication

SET UP PMC

*@ Press the <CNC!PMC>

key of the CNC.

*8

Press the CNC soft keys [l/O], [FDCAS),

[OUTPUT],

[ALL], and [P-G] in this order.

@I Uploading

is executed.

During operation,

the indication

EXECUTING

blinks.

@I When uploading

terminates

normally,

the indication

NORMAL

END

is output.

(4) Comparison

IOperation] 0 Select [PMC] on the I/O menu screen.

Select [COMPAR]

(comparison)

on the PMC menu screen.

1-132

5. OPERATION

Enter a ROM format file name.

Initialization

is started and the indication

INITIALIZE

EXECUTE

is output.

The indication PLEASE

INITIALIZE

EXECUTE is output.

disappears.

After a few seconds,

the indication

SET UP PMC

*!I3 Press the < CNCPMC > key of the CNC.

*@ Press the CNC soft keys [l/O], [FDCAS],

[OUTPUT],

[ALL], and [P-G] in this order.

Comparison

iS executed.

During operation, normally,

the indication EXECIJTING NORMAL END

blinks. is output.

@I When comparison

terminates

the indication

(5) Termination

[Operation] 0 Select [END].

The screen display returns to the main menu screen.

(Note 1) In the operations


operation

above,

an asterisk

prefixed

to a circled

number

represents

an

on the CNC. PMC program without PASCAL, C

(Note 2) For FS15, it is possible UPLOAD, COMPARISON


LANGUAGE data. In this case, please change (3 of each function *@I Press the CNC soft keys [l/O], this order. [FDCAS],

as below. [OUTPUT], [LADDER], and [P-G] in

1-133

5. OPERATION

5.6.5
Before

Input/Output
PMC-CA and

for PMC-QA
the ladder

(FANUC

SYSTEM

F-MODEL
the following

D Mate)
(1) or (2) must be

program

are transmitted,

performed. Whether (1) or (2) is depended on the model of FD Mate.

(1) Setting of FD Mate PMC communicative

utility FLEX OS version

(a) File configuration The configuration of files in the floppy disk is as follows:

DRIVERS --c C

ACILOAD. FDM_SCD. FDUTILS.

BAT (Driver installation DRV 286 (Utility start file)

batch file)

UTILS

PGFD. 286 PGSV. 286 1 FDSV. 286

(b) Installing

the driver only once when power to the main unit is turned on. equipment commands. input/output After the software

The driver must be installed operating system

starts, insert the floppy disk of external example and enter the following

into drive A in the following

FD Mate Main unit To change drives 6 : >A-rReturnJ A A:> A : >CD DRIVERS r Return J A : DRIVERS/> To install the driver A : DRIVERS > ACILOAD r Return J

To change directories

Note 1)

The underlined indicates

portions

indicate

data entered

from the keyboard. by the system.

r
name

soft key entry.

Other portions The following serial

are displayed

Key entries

are not case sensitive.

explanations

are given in this format. with a logical (ser:).

Note 2)

Incorporate

the RS-232-C

driver

into memory

(The system needs to be changed the operating The following system is started.) define statement

so that the serial drive is loaded with ser: when

must be entered from the keyboard

according

to the

driver version after the driver is installed. define -s fanuc_ser In the above example, B: DRIVERS = ON enter the following from the keyboard:

> define -s fanuc ser = ON

1-134

5. OPERATION

Starting the utility The utility must be started whenever data is input or output between the PMC and the

external equipment. In the following example, the floppy disk containing external equipment input/output

software is assumed to be inserted in drive B. Procedure for Starting the Utility FD Mate Main unit To change drives A : >B A *r ReturnJ B:> B : > CD UTILS I- Return J B : UTILS/> To start the utility The screen display changes to the main screen. (Main unit) B : UTILS > FDUTILS r Return J

To change directories

==

= Utility main = = =

____----___-______-_____________________---1 : PMC-----HO/F0 2 : PMC-----Device 3 : HDIFD---Device 4 : spare 0 : Quit

Enter the desired menu number and press the RETURN the following processing. data between the PMC and the HDIFD. data between
1: Transmits

key.

The numbers

correspond

to

2:

Transmits RS-232-C).

the PMC and the external

equipment

(connected

through

3:
4:

Transmits RS-232-C).

data between

the HDiFD and the external equipment

(connected

through

This function Terminates

is not currently the utility.

used.

0:

Numbers other than the above are not accepted. If an incorrect number is entered, delete the number with the BS or DEL key and enter the

desired number.

1 - 13s

5. OPERATION

(2) Setting the UNIX version of the F-D Mate PMC communication

utilities

(a) File configuration The configuration of utility files on the distribution floppy disk is as shown below.

UTILS

FDUTILS FDSV PGFD F PGSV

(utility startup file)

(b) Driver installation

and utility startup

Operation (1) Create an appropriate hard disk. (2) Make the directory current. (3) Copy the utility software on the floppy disk (drive A) to the current directory. # # # # (4) Make the copied files executable. (5) Specify a path. (6) Start a utility. (Note) # # # doscD doscD doscp dosco chmod created in step (1) # cd directorv-name directory on the # mkdir

on the Main screen r Return J

directorv-name

r Return J

A:IUTILS/FDUTILS A:/UTILS/FDSV AYUTILSPGFD AYUTILWPGSV +x *

.
. .

r Return

r Return J J

r Return J r Return J r Return J

PATH = $PATH:.;export FDUTILS

PATH

r Return J r Return J

(Note)

The method of using the UNIX version following 1. 2. two points. must be in lowercase is unnecessary.

differs from that of the Flex version

in the

Filenames ACILOAD

letters.

1-136

5. OPERATION

(3) Preparing

transmission

in the main unit

Operation Enter 2 to display the main screen. ===

in the main unit

Utility main = = =

-----------------------------------------.-----1 : PMC -----HO/F0 2 : PMC-----Device 3 : HDIFD---Device 4 : spare 0 : Quit -----------------------------------------------Select 3 : 2

Press any key other than the control key. The message on the Vight is displayed. Change to the PMC screen

Press any key, to execute child program Press ESC key, if you stop it Read/Write ver. 1.00 Press the CTRL + ALT + HOME, or MODE key. PMC data utility

To stop this program, terminated

press the ESC key on the screen message appears:

in the main unit.

Then, the utility

is

and the following

End of child program Press RETURN key, to go ahead key returns to the main screen in (c).

Pressing the RETURN

Note)

If the CTRL + S key is pressed while the utility is running, pressing the CTRL+Q key restarts the program.

the program stops. any key other

However, than the

Pressing

(CTRL + Q) key while the program is stopped causes abnormal termination

(hang-up).

l-137

5. OPERATION

(4) Down load

Operation in the personal compu

Operation

in the F-D Mate main unit:PMC

To start the utility in the main unit of F-D Mate

3 Start the utility. (See Subset. 3.4.1.) 3 Select PMC - Device. Select 7 : 2

To put the personal computer in the reception wait status

@I Select [ PMCJ from the input/output menu screen. @ Select [DNLOAD] (download)

from the PMC menu screen. aEnter the name of the ROM

format file. a Initialization begins, and the message INITIALIZE appears. To output sequence data from the PMC The screen display changes, and PMC SIDE SET I/O DISPLAY, At KEY IN FILE NAME. is displayed D Press MODE key or press CTRL + ALT + HOME key to display the PMC screen. D Press the IO key to display the IO screen. 3 Press the FDCAS key to display the FDCAS screen. D Press the OUTPUT OUTPUT. 0, Press the LADDER LADDER. YpPress the P-G key to select P-G. 4t transmission The EXECUTING and the counter turns on and off is displayed at tht The displayed value indicating an key to select key to select EXECUT

address is counted.

bottom of the screen.

If transmission PMC displays

terminates OUTPUT

normally,

the personal

computer

displays

NORMAL

END

and the

COMPLETED.

1-138

5. OPERATION

(5) Upload

Operation

in the P-G Mate

Operation

in the F-D Mate main unit/PMC (See (3))

To start the utility in the main unit of F-D Mate To put PMC in the reception status wait

3 Start the utility.

3 Select PMC - Device. Select ? : 2 3 Press the MODE key or CTRL + ALT + HOME key to display the PMC screen. 9 Press the EDIT key to display the EDIT screen. 9 Press the TITLE key to display the TITLE screen.

To output sequence data

@ Select [PMC] from the input/output menu screen. (upload) from

from the personal computer

0 Select [UPLOAD]

the PMC menu screen. @Enter the name of the ROM

format file. @Initialization begins, and the EXECUTE

message INITIALIZE appears. At transmission The EXECUTING

turns on and off, at the

The displayed s counted.

value indicating

a size

and the counter is displayed bottom of the screen.

If transmission PMC displays

terminates

normally,

the personal

computer

displays

NORMAL

END

and the

INPUT COMPLETED.

1-139

5. OPERATION

5.6.6

Transfer to and from PMC-R series/PAl/PA3/NB/QC


serially via RS-232-C. In this case, personal computer port must be set.

Data can be transferred

See Section 5.6 for the setting of the personal computer

for I/O operation. FS16/18/15B Mate-D, F-D Mate mini

- FAPT LADDER 1 Download f

1 9600 bps14800 bps

-Power

w-1

II

9600 bps14800 bps Upload Ik 9600 bps/4800 bps

PMC (I/O) screen

II Comparison

II-

PMC (I/O) screen

Baud rate settina for FSl6/18/15B,

Power Mate-D, and F-D Mate mini

(1) Download [Operation] 0 8 Select [PMC] on the I/O menu screen. Select [DNLOAD] (download) on the PMC menu screen.

$8 Press the <SYSTEM

> key of the CNC. [l/O], [HOST], and [EXEC] in this order.

*@ Press the CNC soft keys [PMC], 0 @ 8 Enter a ROM format file name. Downloading is executed.

During operation, normally,

the indication

EXECUTING END

blinks. is output.

When downloading

terminates

the indication

NORMAL

(2) Upload

If the PMCRCRC3, programs

-CC,

or -NB is used,

language

data (C language) is executed

other

than

Ladder

can be used.

When uploading (LADDER

or comparison

from one of these PMCs, and ALL have the

one of two data types following meanings:

or ALL)

can be specified.

LADDER

LADDER ALL

Sequence Sequence

program only program and language data (C language)

l-140

5. OPERATION

Specify either data type in step 8 of the operation

described

below:

[Operation] 0 8 *a Select [PMC] on the I/O menu screen. Select [UPLOAD] on the PMC menu screen. key of the CNC. (IO], [HOST], and [EXEC] in this order.

Press the <SYSTEM>

*@ Press the CNC soft keys [PMC], @ @ Enter a ROM format file name.

Select either LADDER or ALL with cursor.

(?I Uploading @

is executed.

During operation, normally,

the indication

EXECUTING

blinks.

When uploading

terminates

the indication

NORMAL

END is output.

(3) Comparison

[Operation] 0 Select [PMC] on the 110menu screen.

C!9 Select [COMPAR] *a

(comparison)

on the PMC menu screen.

Press the <SYSTEM

> key of the CNC. and [EXEC] in this order.

*@I Press the CNC soft keys [PMC],

[I/O], [HOST],

Enter a ROM format file name.

6)

Comparison

is executed.

During operation,

the indication

EXECUTING

blinks.

When comparison

terminates

normally,

the indication

NORMAL

END is output.

(4) Termination

[Operation] 0 Select [END].

(21 The screen display returns to the main menu screen.

(Note)

In the operations on the CNC.

above, an asterisk prefixed

to a circled

number represents

an operation

l-

141

5. OPERATION

(5) CRT/MD1

and DPUMDI of the Power Mate-D


and the DPUMDI screen. When the

The NC of the Power Mate-D has the CRT/MD1 screen CRTlMDl screen is used, the procedures

for data input/output screen

are the same as those with the is used, the procedures for data

PMC-R Series ((1) to (4) above). input/output When are different

When the DPUMDI

from those with the PMC-R Series. is used, perform downloading, uploading, and comparison as

the DPL/MDI below:

screen

described

(a) Press the < DGNOS > key on the DPUMDI screen and select the diagnostic data screen.

03

Press the c READ> Follow procedures

or c WRITE>

key on the DPUMDI

screen. computer.

w
5.6.7

(1) to (4) described

above on the personal

Memory card interface in the personal computer and memory card


in a personal computer can be converted installed to a memory in the personal card format file, computer. The

A ROM format file compiled

and output to a memory card via a memory PMC program on the memory card in the memory transferred

card interface

card can be sent to the RAM of the CNC by inserting in the CNC. By reversing the procedure,

the memory can be

card interface

programs

from the CNC RAM to the memory card.

5.6.7.1
[Operation]

PMC program transfer from the personal computer to the CNC

Install a memory card interface

in the personal computer.

Compile a source program to create a ROM format file. from it.

Return to the main menu, and select [l/O] (input/output)

Select [M-CARD]

(memory card) from the input/output

menu.

F4 F5

KEY KEY

: :

Handy Memory

File card

Fig. 5.6.7.1 (a)

InputiOutput

Menu

1-142

5. OPERATION

@ Select [WRITE] (write (programmer -> memory card)).

Fig. 5.6.7.1 (b)

Memory Card Input/Output

Screen

Convert the file from ROM format to memory card format. Specify the following
l

items for execution.

Name of the ROM format file Specify the ROM format file to be converted.

Name of the memory card file Specify the name of a memory card file (accessible via a memory card interface in the

CNC) to be created by conversion,

and the drive where the memory card is inserted.

l/O i TO UC ::

&BP

WRITE

(PROCRAWR FILE

- > Memory NAME

Card) : A:YDATAAYSAMFLE. XBF llEX

ROM FORMAT

Memory Card FILE NAME : D:YSAMPLE. (Specify the MEMORY CARD drive)

Fig. 5.6.7.1 (c)

InputlOutput

(to MC) Screen

The following

operations

are performed

on the CNC side.

l-143

5. OPERATION

The following 0

two methods

can be used to insert the memory in the CNC and read programs of the PMC and the desired filename or

card output

in step @ into

the memory card interface Using the I/O function Specify M-CARD,

on the memory card.

READ,

file

number

at

DEVICE,

FUNCTION, [EXECJ.

and FILE NO. on the PMC l/O screen, programs

respectively.

7en press soft key

Sequence

are read from the memory card file created in step 0.

PMC 110 screen

PMCI/O PROGRAM
CHANNEL = 1 DEVICE = M-CARD ~;~~J..~~~Ij-j~;~ = READ DATA KIND = LADDER FILE NO. ( #NAME )
q

MONIT STOP

I EXEC I [CANCEL] [WRITE I[ READl[COMPARI

Using the BOOT SYSTEM See Appendix 5.

at power-on

time

5.6.7.2

PMC program transfer from the CNC to the personal computer


are written to a memory card, using a memory card interface as ordinary card interface in the CNC. computer, the When PMC

PMC programs the memory

card is inserted

in a memory

in the personal MS-DOS files.

programs on the memory card can be accessed

[Operation] 0 Specify M-CARD, WRITE, DATA KIND, and the desired filename (omissible) at DEVICE,

FUNCTION, key [EXEC].

LADDER, Sequence

and FILE NO. on the PMC I/O screen, programs are output to the memory.

respectively,

then press soft

l-144

5. OPERATION

PMC I/O screen

'PMC I/O PROGRAM CHANNEL = 1 DEVICE = M-CARD ;;i~iJJ#~;I;$&& = WRITE DATA KIND = LADDER FILE NO. = ( #NAME ) [.EXEC

MONIT STOP-

1 [CANCEL 1 [WRITE 1 E READ 1 [COMPARI

The following operations are performed on the personal computer side.

Install a memory card interface

in the personal computer.

Select [l/O] (input/output)

from the main menu. (See Fig. 5.6.7.1 (a).)

Select [M-CARD]

(memory card) from the input/output

menu.

Select [READ] (read (programmer

C- memory card)).

(See Fig. 5.6.7.1 (b).)

Convert

the PMC programs

output to a memory the following

card in step @ from memory

card format

to ROM format by specifying


l

items and running the utility.

Name of the memory card file Specify the name of the conversion source memory card file written to the memory

card, and the memory card drive in which the memory card is inserted.
l

Name of the ROM format file Specify the filename to be assigned to the ROM format data after conversion.
1.~3C FROM K
) ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

READ

(PROCRAMER

- > Memory

Card) #RF #EX

Memory Card FILE NAME : D:YSAMFLE. (Specify the MEMORY CARD drive) R&l FORMAT FILE NAME

A:YDATAYSMPlE.

Fig. 5.6.7.2 (a)

Input/Output

(from MC) Screen

1 - 145

5. OPERATION

Discompile

the ROM format file after conversion,

and the resultant

file will become

able to

be edited on the personal computer.

5.6.7.3

Memory card input/output function (PMC-RAl) CNC (L/R) with loader control
writes a loader control sequence program

for the PMC of the

This function MODEL

to, or reads it from, the FANUC Series 16program can be edited by specifying

B with loader control.

The loader control

sequence

the model as PMC-RAl.

(1) Writing

(programmer

- > memory card) program to a memory card, use the F8 key (L/R). with the memory card (such as editing) are the same

To write an L/R sequence (The operations

other than input/output PMC-RAl.)

as those for the conventional

[Operation] Install a memory card interface in the personal computer.

Select [INOUT]

(input!output)

from the main menu.

Select [M-CARD]

(memory card) from the input/output

menu.

Specify

the names of the desired is specified

ROM format

file and memory

card file.

(The memory

card filename

in the form of memory card drive + filename.)

Write to the memory card using the F8 key (L/R).

WRITE

fPROCRMfE%! FILE

- > Memory Card) NAME

ROM FORMAT

A:YDATAYSMfPLE. XBF

XEX

Memory Card FILE NAME : D:YSAMPLE. (Specify the MEWRY CARD drive)

Fig. 5.6.7.3

Input/Output

(to MC) Screen (model supporting

loader control)

(2)

Reading (programmer

< - memory card) sequence program from the memory card, use the same operating

To read the loader control procedure

as for the conventional

PMC-RAl.

1-146

5. OPERATION

56.8

Handy File + 3.5 floppy disk (MS-DOS format)


on a personal computer format), is converted to Handy File format and output

If a ROM format file compiled

to a 3.6 floppy disk (MS-DOS

the PMC program

can be read into the RAM of the CNC can be reversed.

via a Handy File interface connected

to the CNC.

This operation

5.6.8.1
[Operation]

PMC program transfer from the personal computer to the CNC

Compile a source program, and create a ROM format file.

Select [l/O] (input/output)

from the main menu. the input/output

Select menu.

[FDCAS]

(FLOPPY

CASSETTE

ADAPTER

& Handy

File) from

(See Fig. 5.6.7.1 (a).)

Select [WRITE]

(write (programmer

-> FLOPPY CASSETTE

ADAPTER

& Handy File)).

IKI iFDCASi

&B

\\\m-

Fl F2 FlO

KEY KEY KEY

: :

WRITE READ ESD

(PAOCRAhSA (PROCRMMR

--> < -

Handy Handy

File) File)

Fig. 5.6.8.1 (a)


Convert

FDCAS Input/Output

Screen

the ROM format file to Handy

File format

by specifying

the following

items and

running the utility.


l

Name of the ROM format file Specify the name of the ROM format file to be converted.

Name of the Handy File format file Specify the name to be assigned File) to be generated to the Handy File format file (accessible by the Handy

by conversion,

and the 3.5 disk drive to which the file is output;

5 floppy disk cannot be used.

l-147

5. OPERATION

'ARITE (PROCRAMER--> HandyFile: FiM( FORMT FILE t&ME

A:YDATACSAAlNE.PEX

HandyFile FILE !iAME : C:YSAllF'LE.:SF :Specif! the floppydisk drive!

The following

operations

are performed

on the CNC side.

Connect

the CNC and Handy File, and insert the 3.5 floppy disk generated

in step @ into

the Handy File.

5.6.8.2
[Operation]

PMC program transfer from the CNC to the personal computer

Connect

the CNC and Handy File, and output the PMC program

to a 3.5 floppy disk (MS-

DOS format).

The following

operations

are performed

on the personal computer

side.

Select [l/O] (input/output)

from the main unit. File) from the input/output

Select menu.

[FDCAS]

(FLOPPY

CASSETTE

ADAPTER

& Handy

Select

[READ]

(read (programmer

<-

FLOPPY

CASSETTE

ADAPTER

& Handy

File)).

(See Fig. 5.6.7.1 (a).)

Convert the PMC program on a 3.5 floppy disk (Handy File format) generated ROM format by specifying
l

in step 0

to

the following

items and running

the utility.

Name of the Handy File format file Specify the program name output in step 0, and the 3.5 floppy disk drive where the

floppy disk is inserted.


l

Name of the ROM format file Specify the filename to be assigned to the ROM format data generated by conversion.

1-148

5. OPERATION

I.!0

; FROM FDC.AS

:::wc-Rc3

_\\ 1: ~ .,@ux%wm

.: ~_ \\\\,\...._

READ

(PROCRAWR

<-

Handy

File

!
C:YSAWLE. :SF PEX

Handy File FILE W.AME (Specify the floppy disk ROM FORUAT FILE NAUE

drive,

: A:YDATAYSAWLE.

Fig. 5.6.8.2 (a)

Input/Output

(from FDCAS) Screen

Discompile

the ROM format file after conversion,

and the resultant

file will become

able to

be edited on the personal computer.

5.6.9

FLOPPY CASSETTE

ADAPTER + 3.5 floppy disk (P-G format)


computer is converted to Handy File format and output

If a ROM format file compiled

on a personal

to a 3.6 floppy disk (P-G format), the PMC program FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTER connected

can be read into the RAM of the CNC via a This operation can be reversed.

to the CNC.

(Caution] There are two types of adapters for access to 3.5 floppy disk drives.

Name FLOPPY CASSETTE CASSETTE ADAPTER

Specification

number

Accessible

floppy disk type 2HD 2DD

Al 38-01 SO-BOO1 A13B-0131-8001

ADAPTER3

This function

uses P-G 200

<- > MS-DOS

format

conversion ADAPTER

supported 3 cannot

by FLPGMS.

FLPGMS

does not support Similarly,

floppy

disks, so CASSETTE

be used with FLPGMS. P-G <->

this function

cannot be used on the IBM PC/AT, because

it does not support

MS-DOS format conversion.

1-149

5. OPERATION

5.7 Mnemonic Editing

57.1

Conversion of a source program to a mnemonic file

A source program is converted to a mnemonic file that can be edited with any standard text editor.

[Operation] Select [MNEEDT] (mnemonic editing) from the main menu.

The mnemonic menu screen appears (Fig. 5.7.1(a)).

1WiWW2SRCtXV3BAT&H

"5"

6 ,,V'. y,y:-< 8" ".;,, g"v ', ,O FJ@j -

Fig. 5.7.1(a)

Mnemonic Menu Screen

Select [MNECNV]

(conversion to mnemonic).

The mnemonic conversion screen appears (Fig. 57.1 (b)).

1) SOURCEPROCRAMNAFe: 2) HMINIC FILE NW 3'( ;ONEJ; DATA KIND SELECTION [ ; ; fW;M PARAWTER :

( 3 : SYmiOL& CU)IEah"T 4) MODE : FUR P-G

l-150

5. OPERATION

Specify the following


l

items:

Source program name Specify the name of the source program to be converted. Never specify an extension for the name. Up to eight characters can

be specified.
l

Mnemonic

file name file to which a source program is converted. Up to

Specify the name of the mnemonic 40 characters


l

can be specified. selection All data files can be specified or specific data

Data conversion

Specify data files subject to conversion. files can be selected.


l

Mode (setting item selection) Specify setting items. Select items from the table below, using the < t > and

< + > keys.

FOR-

P-G

P-G output format data is converted. Converts the text of a Japanese-language message to code format (Note 2). is converted.

Japanese anguage :omment (Note)

Comment Converts

data, which may include kanji characters, the text of a Japanese-language

message to Japanese-language

format (Note 3). Comment Data data, which may include kanji characters, address symbols and comments, is converted. and function instruction

WLL - OPTION

including

names treated as comments Data including all instruction

is converted. sections, operand sections, and comment

sections Converts

is converted. the text of a Japanese-language message to Japanese-language

format (Note 3). _ABELI SUB-PROGRAM Data is converted (JMPB, JMPC, and the jump destination (label) of a function instruction is not

CALL. SP, or another

instruction)

used in a sub-program mnemonic section data does

highlighted.

The step number

of the converted instruction

agree with other setting.

(The function

used in the sub-

program does not agree with the other setting.) Converts the text of a Japanese-language message to Japanese-language

format (Note 3).

(Note 1) (Note 2, 3)

The item specifying on an IBM PC/AT. Format displayed

Japanese

language

comment

conversion

cannot

be selected

on the code or Japanese-language

input

mode

screen

during

message editing.

Select (EXEC] upon completion

of item specification.

ci3 Source program is converted

to a mnemonic

file.

1 - 151

5. OPERATION

@I An error message is displayed conversion

if <RETURN

> is pressed after conversion.

The mnemonic

screen appears when

-z SPACE > is pressed after conversion.

5.7.2 Conversion of a mnemonic file to a source program


A mnemonic text file edited in a certain format using a atandard text editor is converted version of FAPT LADDER. to a source

program that can be edited with the personal computer

[Operation] 0 Select [MNEEDT] (mnemonic editing) from the main menu.

The mnemonic

menu screen appears.

Select (SRCCNV]

(conversion

to a source program).

@I The source program conversion

screen appears (Fig. 5.7.2).

: FoRP4

Fig. 5.7.2 61 Specify the following


l

Source Program Conversion

Screen

items:

Mnemonic Specify specified.

file name file to be converted. Up to 40 characters can be

the name of a mnemonic

Source program name Specify the name of the source program can be specified. to which a mnemonic file is to be converted. for the name.

Up to eight characters
l

Never specify an extension

Mode (setting item selection) Specify setting items. keys. Select items from the table below using the < + > and < + >

(Note)

The item specifying IBM PC/AT.

Japanese

language

comment

conversion

cannot

be selected

on an

1-152

5. OPERATION

Select [EXEC] upon completion file is converted

of item specification.

(?J Mnemonic @

to a source program. if c RETURN > is pressed after conversion. The source

An error message program conversion

is displayed

screen appears when

< SPACE > is pressed after conversion.

5.7.3 Mnemonic file format


If a mnemonic file created using a commercially available text editor is to be converted format. to a source

program, the mnemonic

file must be in the following

(a) Identification

code

The mnemonic

file defines data with four different

identification

codes that each begin with %.

ID code O/o @A %@E %@O to 5 % only Beginning

Description of ALL-format data data data

End of ALL-format Beginning

of unit-format data

End of unit-format

The unit-format

data mentioned

above varies from one PMC model to another as listed below.

PMC model Unit-format data L Parameter Title Symbol & comment Ladder Message l/O module %@O ~ %@l %@2 O/o @3
X X

M
TO@0

N!NAKIA % @O %@l % @2 O/o @3 %@4 % @5

P % @O %@l %@2 %@3


X X

I series/PAl/PA3/QC/NB/NB: % @O %@l % @2 % @3 % @4 O/o @5

%@l %@2 /0@3


X

%@4

(b)

Linefeed code Control ignored. character LF (OAH) is defined as a linefeed code. Control character CR (ODH) is

(c) Reserved symbols


0

r;J

This special character


l

is reserved

for use in ladder data. to separate ladder data from a as a comment. and

A semicolon comment.

is used in the ladder data section Characters that follow a semicolon

are treated

When a mnemonic a comment

file is converted

back to a source program, a semicolon

that follows it are not generated.

1-153

5. OPERATION

r:j

This special character


l

is reserved for use in ladder and I/O module data.

A coton is used in the ladder data section to separate a net number from ladder data. Data that precedes a colon is treated as a net number. data section to separate a colon a channel as a

A colon number channel

is also used in the I/O module from 110 module data.

Data that precedes

is treated

number. SEQ NB2), mnemonic file has

In case of PMCRB4!RB4(STEP below format.

SEQ/RB5.!RBG)/RC4RC4(STEP

%@A r %@2-c R0200.0 UNIT 3 POWER KEEP UNIT-3 POWER ON II $1 KEEP POWk?-ON R0200.1 UNIT $1 SPOWER$$ 3 ACT KEEP UNIT-4 $$POWER$ ON Control character (See 10.2) Description of symbol and comment (See 10.3) ID code (See 10.1)

R0300.0 KEEP UNIT-4 POWER ON $1 KEEP POWER ON PO008 OPEN FRONT $1 OPEN FRONT COVER LO100 $1 % % @3 RD R1OO1.O OR R120.3 AND R1000.2 WRT Y2000.4 ( Net comment 3 RD R1OO1.O AND R1000.2 WRT Y23.4 (*SP 3 RD R1O1.O OR R123.4 AND R100.2 WRT Y200.4 %
y

INITIALIZE INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE

is written in here. Any characters computer is permitted.

you enter by using personal

Description

of net (See 10.4(l))

comment

Designation

of new page (for ladder diagram printing)

(See 10.4(2))

I%
@E file converted with version 08.1 or earlier is able to be converted to source program with version 08.4 or later. But a mnemonic file converted with version 08.4 or later is not able to be converted to source program with version 08.1 or earlier.

Note) A mnemonic

1-154

5. OPERATION

1)

ID code The ID code for symbol and comment Another ID codes are not changed. data has been changed to %@2-C.

RB4RB4 Data kind

(STEP)RC4;RC4

(STEP)

Ver. 08.4 or later System parameter Title Symbol/comment Ladder Message l/O module % @O %@l %@2-c % @a % @4 % @5

Ver. 08.1 or earlier % @O %@l % @2 %@3 % (94 % @5

Note) For PMC-RB5!RBG/NB2

is Ver 08.5 or later.

2)

Control character The dollar character character S is used as control character in the mnemonic file. file. Every dollar

in the sentence

must be described

as $$

in the mnemonic

3)

Symbol and comment

data

(1) Description of address and symbol


Describe the address data and the symbol strings in a same line. Describe the address data to top of line and the symbol strings describe or horizontal tabulation character as delimitter. after address data

with blank character 1 R0200.0

UNIT -- 3

POWER

(2) Description

of relay comment

and coil comment and coil comment after address defined in (1). marks after mark $1 is relay comment. And

Describe the relay comment The first string between

two single quotation

next string between two single quotation 1 $1 KEEP POWER ON

marks is coil comment.

KEEP UNIT-3 POWER ON

Blank character

or horizontal

tabulation

character Mark of comment data line (only $1)

1-155

5. OPERATION

When relay comment single quotation marks.

is not used, a part of relay comment

must be described

by double

$1

INITIALIZE

OF SEQUENCE

Note) Every single quotation


described as $

mark in the relay comment file.

and coil comment

string

must be

+ *I in the mnemonic

4)

Ladder data

(1) Description

of net comment data is specified by (* and 3 characters.

The net comment

(2) Designation Designation

of new page (for ladder diagram printing) of new page for ladder diagram printing file. must be described as $P or $p in

the mnemonic

Characters

I Designation

Means of new page

$P or $p

(for ladder diagram printing)

1-156

5. OPERATION

5.7.4 Sample mnemonic files (single-format)


(a) Parameter

PMC-L

ce
1

1
1. D address size

4001 01 501 301

(0 to 400 bytes) panel is used


(1: YES, 0: NO)

2 3 4 5 6 81

2. Whether an operators

3. Size of the area used for timers

(0 to 400 bytes) (0 to 400 bytes) (0 to 400 bytes) (0 to 400 bytes)

4. Size of the area used for counters 5. 4-digit BCD display address 6. 2-digit BCD display address

101
501 tEoB1

PMC-M!M

(l/O LINK)/PMC-M

(MMC)

se
1

0 1
3901 1. D address size 2. Whether an operators panel is used (0 to 400 bytes) (1: YES, 0: NO) (0 to 400 bytes) (0 to 400 bytes) (0 to 400 bytes) (0 to 400 bytes) (100 to 200%) (0: 16 ms, 1: 8 ms) (0: Division, 1: Non-division)

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 01

11 2001 401 201 101 1501 11 11 IEOBI

3. Size of the area used for timers 4. Size of the area used for counters 5. 4-digit BCD display address 6. 2-digit BCD display address 7. Ladder execution B. Ladder execution 9. Division/non-division time period method

(Note)

The parameter (MMC).

in Item 8 above (ladder execution

period) is not applicable

to PMC-M

PMC-P

ae
1 %l

01 20481
1. D address size (0 to 2048 bytes)

IEOBI

1-157

5. OPERATION

PMC-N/N

(VO LINKRB4)

%@ 0

1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8

4040~ BINARY1 SOSPC-N1 8000001


581 0001 8100001

9 10 sl

NOi 041

[EOBI

m
PMC Series Counter data type (Binary or BCD) (0 to 100%) PASCAL execution time Setting not required (PC-N (fixed)) PASCAL TCB start address PASCAL PMC screen processing time time ratio Ladder execution (000 to 050%) PASCAL data start address Level-3 synchronization (NO: Asynchronous, 10. PMC edition (Note) Set a value subtracting

(4040: N, 4045: N (I!0 LINK))

(0 to FFFFFF (hexadecimal)) (0 to 99%) (Note)

(0 to FFFFFF (hexadecimal)) YES: Synchronous)

(PMC edition (2-digit))

100 from an actual value for the

"7.Ladder execution

time.

(Example)

When an actual value desired for the ladder execution time is 125%, set 025 to that setting.

PMC-RAl

!RA2IPAl

/PA3PB4RB4

(STED)/RB5/RBG

%@ 0

1
2. 3. Counter data type Whether an operators (Binary or BCD) panel is used (YES: Used, NO: Not used)

2
3

BINARY1
No1

PMC-

RAll

14. PMC model

(PMC-RAl/PMC-RA2PMC RB4iPMC-RB4 (STEP SEQ) PMC-

81 [EOBI
(Note) When specifying the KEY address, follows: YES in Item 3 above (whether LED address,

PAl/PMCPA3/PMCRB5/PMCRBG)

an operators

panel is used), specify as

KEY image address,

and LED image address

3 YES X0000 YOOOO ROOOO ROOlOl

1-158

5. OPERATION

PMCRB,RB2RA3RB3

se
2 3 4 7 9

0 1 BINARY1 NO1 PMC-RB1 1001 YES1

2. Counter data type 3. Whether an operators 4. PMC model time method

(Binary or BCD) panel is used (PMC-RB, (YES: Used, NO: Not used) PMCRB2 or PMC-RB)

7. Ladder execution 9. Division/non-division

(100% (fixed)) (NO: Division, YES: Non-division)

01 [EOBI (Note 1)
When specify specifying YES in Item 3 above LED address, (whether an operators address, panel is used),

the KEY address,

KEY image

and LED image

address as follows:

3 YES X0000 YOOOO ROOOO ROOlOl

(Note 2)

The parameter

in Item 9 above

(division/non-division

method)

is not applicable

to

PMCRB2/RA3/RB3.

PMCRCIRC3iRC4IRC4

(STEP)

%e 0
2 3 4 5 7 9

1 Counter data type Whether an operators PMC model Start address of language (Binary or BCD) panel is

BCDS. ND1 PMC-RCl 000000 100s. NOi

used (YES: Used, NO: Not used)


(fixed)/PMC-RC4) data

(PMCRCRC3

program link control statement (0 or 800000 to 8FFFFF (hexadecimal))

81
[EoBl

Ladder execution Division/non-division

time

(1 to 150%) YES: Non-division)

method (NO: Division,

(Note 1)

When specify

specifying the

YES

in Item 3 above LED address,

(whether

an operators address,

panel

is used),

KEY address,

KEY image

and LED image

address as follows:

3 YES X0000 YOOOO ROOOO ROOlO5.

(Note 2)

Parameter

9 Divisioninon-division

method

is not available for PMCRC3.

1-159

5. OPERATION

@I PMC-QC/NB:NB2

%@ 0 1

2 3 4 5 6 7

BCDJ NOSPHC-QCl 000000 501 1001

2. Counter data type 3. Whether an operators 4. 5. PMC model Start address of language

(Binary or BCD) panel is used (YES: Used, NO: Not used)

(PMC-QCPMC-NB!PMC-NB2) program link control statement (0 or 200000 to PFFFFF (hexadecimal)) data

81
fEoB1

6.

Percentage

of language time

program execution (Always 100%)

time

(1% to 99%)

7. Ladder execution

(Note)

If YES is specified addresses

in item 3 (whether

an operators

panel

is used),

specify

the

of KEY, LED, KEY image, and LED image as follows:

3 YES X0000 YOOOO ROOOO ROOlOl

lb)

Title

(common

to all models)

%@

11
MACHINE MACHINE CNC PMC EDITION PROGRAM DATE PROGRAM ROM REMARKS1 WRITTEN
OF

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

TOOL TOOL 7 PMC NAMES PROGRAM NO.1 DRAWING

BUILDER NAMES NO.1 NO.1

NAME

PROGRAMING1 DESIGNED BY1 BYi

el
fEOB1

(c)

Symbols

and comments

(common

to all models)

1 x000.0
%@ 2

2PX.M 2PY.M

START BELT CONVEYER LIMIT SWITCH ON1

x000.1

%l (EOBJ

l-160

5. OPERATION

Symbols and comments

(at using the expanded

symbol function)

%@2-c

Symbol

R0200.0 UNIT-3-POWER $1 'KEEP POWER ON' 'KEEP UNIT-3 POWER ON' Relay comment Coil Comment

R0200.1 UNIT-2-ACT $1 *$*P~wER$$' R0300.0


$1

*KEEP UNIT-~ $$PowER$' 0~'


IControl code

'KEEP POWER ON' OPEN-FRONT INITIALIZE

'KEEP INIT-

POWER ON'

PO008 LO100 $1 " % [EOBI

$1 'OPEN FRONT COVER' 'INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE'


no Relay comment

(d)

Ladder

(common

to all models)

FOR -- P

%@ 31 RD X0.41 OR WRT SUB RD. SUB


21

Y80.61 DSOO.ll 11 NOT


401

X3.01

81911 03001 SUB 21

81 [EOBI

1 - 161

5. OPERATION

FULL- OPTION

%@3 1 NOOOOl: SUB N00002: RD SUB N00003: RD SUB N00004: RD SUB N00005: SUB N00006: SUB YOOO07: SUB VOOOOB: SUB YOOO09: RD DEC WRT 300010: SUB 300011: SUB I1

71 Pl x0.0 68 LlOO x0.1 73 LlOO x0.1 65 P2 66 P2 69 LlOO 72 71 P2 RO.0 DO 21 DO.0 72 64

; SP

;(SUBPRl ;(XADRSl ; JMPBl ;(LABELl ;(XADRS2 ; JMPCl ;(LABELl ;(XADRSZ ; CALL1 ;(SPlOOO ; CALLU5. ;(SPlOOO ; LBL 1 ;(LABEL~
; SPE

) [SUB PROGRAM

DATA NO.011 1

) [JUMPB LABEL LOOOOl] 1 ) [LABEL Looooi] 1


)

[JUMPB LABEL Looooi] J [LABEL Looooi] 1 [JUMPB LABEL LOOOOl]l DATA NO.lOOO] 1 DATA NO.lOOO]J

) )

) [SUB PROGRAM ) [SUB PROGRAM

1 [LABEL LOOOO~] 1

1 ) [SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.1000

: -1 ; (SPlOOO

11

;(RADRSOO ) 1 ;(DADRS04 ) 1

SPE 1

; END 1

1-162

5. OPERATION

FULL-OPTION

(at using the expanded

symbol function)

%@3 1 NOOOOl: SUB 71 Pl


; SP [_,

Symbol Relay comment

;(SUBPRl ;

) "SUB PROG. N0.01"

[SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.011 1 L-Coil comment ) "JUMPB LABEL Lool" l-_-1
no Comment

N00002: RD SUB

x0.0 68 LlOO

;(XADRSl ; JMPBJ ;(LABELl ;(XADRSZ ; JMPCJ ;(LABELl


; LBL

)l
no Relay comment

; [LABEL ~ooool] 1A N00003: RD SUB x0.1 73 LlOO N00004: SUB 69 LlOO N00005: SUB N00006: SUB N00007: RD
DEC

) "JUMPB LABEL LOOl"$ )l

; [LABEL ~00001 11 1
)1

;(LABELl
; SPE

; [LABEL LOOOOlJ1 72 71 P2 RO.0 DO 21 DO.0 72 64 1


)

; (SPlOOO

-1

"SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.l"l

;(RADRSOO ) 1 ;(DADRSOII ) 1

WRT N00008: SUB N00009: SUB 81

1
; SPE 1 ; END 1

1-163

5.

OPERATION

@ LABEL/SUB-PROGRAM

H3

1 SP RD JMPB
RD JMPC

;UBPRl

71

;<Pl

>

[SUB

PROGRAM

DATA

NO.011 1

XADRSl :<Xo.o LABEL1 :<LlOo XADRSZ ;<Xo.l LABEL1 ;<Lloo XADRSZ ;<Xo.l SPlOOO :<P2 SPlOOO ;<P2 ;<LlOOO
1

> [JIJMPBLABEL LOOOO1]1 > [LABEL Looool] 1 > [JUMPB LABEL ~ooool] 1 > [LABEL L00001] 1 > [JUMPB LABEL Looool] 1 > [SUB PROGRAM > [SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.looo]1 DATA NO.lOoo] 1

RD CALL CALLU LABEL1 iPlOO0 LBL


SPE

> [LABEL Looooi] 1 > [SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.lOoo] 1

SP RD DEC WRT
SPE 1

;<P2 RADROO ;<RO.O DADR04 ;<DO

1 1
'

21
DO.0 1

END 1 1

1
LABEL/SUB-PROGRAM (at using the expanded symbol function)

6)

%@3 1 SUBPRl

Address

Relay comment

SP

SUBPRl :<Pl r
Symbol

>. "SUB PROG. N0.01" DATA NO.011 1


Coil comment -

; [SUB PROGRAM RD JMPB RD JMPC LABEL1 LBL SPE 1 SPlOOO SP RD DEC WRT
SPE 1

XADRSl ;<XO.o LABEL1 ;<LlOO

> 'JUMPB LABEL LOOl"1

>l
Looooi] 1

[LABEL

XADRS2 ;<XO.l LABEL1 ;<LlOO ;<LlOOO


;

> "JUMPB LABEL LOOl"l > [LABEL Looool] 1 >1

[LABEL Looool] 1 > "SUB PROGRAM NO.l"l ' '

;<P2 RADROO ;<RO.O DADR04 ;<DO

21
DO.0 1

END 1 %

1-164

5. OPERATION

(e) Message
re
A0

(other than PMC-L, PMC-M/M (I/O LINK)/M (MMC), PMC-P)

4 1
0. 0 2100020 ATC

DOOR

NOT SPEED KEY SWITCR

CLOSE1 ARRIVA ONi

AOO.l L SIGNAL AO0.2

2101022 NOT 2100020

SPINDLE ON1 EDTOK

%l
[EOBI

(f1 I/O module (other than PMC-UP)


%@ 5

x000
YO08

1
1 1 0 0 1 4 ID64Al
OD64Bl

81 L [EOBI
(Note) The ID code depends on the model as follows: . 0 %@4 : PMC-M/M (I/O LINK)/PMC-M (MMC) %@5 : PMC-N/N (I/O LINK), PMC_RAl/RA2/RB/RB2/RC

1-165

5. OPERATION

5.7.5 Sample mnemonic files (all-format)


(a) PMC-M

1 %@0 1
%@ A

1 2 8 9

3901 11 11

11

el ee 11
01
02 MACH MACH

INE INE WRITTEN RKSl

TOOL TOOL

BUILDER NAME1

NAMES

09

ROM
REMA

BYA

10

sl %@ 2 1 x000.0
x000.1

2PX.M 2PY.M

START BELT CONVEYER LIMIT SWITCH ONS.

%l %@ 3 1
SUB RD. SUB 11 NOT x3.01

401

21
81911 03005 SUB SUB 21

481

%l se 4 1

x000
YOO8

1 1

1 4

ID64Al OD64Bl

%l %@ E 1 [EOBI

1-166

5. OPERATION

PMC-N 1

1 %@0 1
%@ A

1 2 9 10 %l

sosol BINARY1 NO1 041

%@ 11 MACHINE 01 02
09

TOOL TOOL WRITTEN

BUILDER NAME1 BY1

NAME1

MACHINE ROM REMARKS1

10 sl

%@ 21 x000.0 x000.1

2PX.M 2PY.M

START BELT CONVEYER LIMIT SWITCH ON1

sl %@ 3
SUB RD. SUB

1 11 NOT K3.01

401

21
81911 DO001 SUB SUB %l %@ 4 1 AOO.0 AOO.l L rl %@ 51 x000 YOO8 %l %@ El tEoB1 1 1 0 0 1 4 ID64Al OD64Bl SIGNAL 21 481

2100020 2101022 NOT

ATC SPINDLE ON1

DOOR

NOT SPEED

CLOSE1 ARRIVA

1-167

5. OPERATION

(cl

PMC-FIB

1 se 0 1
%@ A
2 3 BCDJ. NO1

1001 YES1

%l %@11
01 02
09

MACHINE MACHINE ROM REMARKS1 WRITTEN

TOOL TOOL

BUILDER
NAME1

NAME1

BY' J

10

%l %@2 1 x000.0
x000.1

ZPX.M ZPY.M

START BELT CONVEYER LIMIT SWITCH 0 N 1

sl oe
SUB RD. SUB

1
11 NOT K3.01

21
81911 D3001 SUB SUB

401

21 481

sl %@4 1
AOO.0 AOO.l L SIGNAL 2100020 2101022 NOT ATC SPI ONS. DOOR NDLE SP N
OT

CLOSE1 ARRIVA

EED

x000
YOO8

%l %@ 5 1
1 1 0 0 1 4 ID16 OD32

%l %@ E 1 [EOBI

cl Al

l-168

5. OPERATION

(d)

PMC-RB4

%@A

%@O1 2 BINARY& 3 NO1 4 PMC-RB4

1 %@l1
% 01 MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME1 10 REMARKS1 % 1
ae2-c 1

RO200.0 UNIT-3-POWER1 'KEEP UNIT-3 POWER ON'1 $1 'KEEP POWER ON' R0200.1 UNIT-2-ACT1 'KEEP UNIT-4 $$POWER$' ON'J. $1 '$'P~wER$$'
RO300.0 1

'KEEP UNIT-4 POWER ON'1 $1 'KEEP POWER ON' OPEN-FRONT1 PO008 $1 'OPEN FRONT COVER' 1 INITIALIZE1 LO100 'INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE'& $1 " $1 $@3 1 RD RlOOl.03. 3R R120.3 1 9ND R1000.2 1 nlRTY2000.4 1 (* Inscribe the net comment here. Any characters 1 which are input with personal computer can be used. R) RD R1OO1.O1 9ND R1000.2 1 dRT Y23.4 1 form feed position (in Ladder diagram) (* SP l1 RD R1O1.O 1 OR R123.4 1 AND R100.21 WRT Y200.41 % 1 %@a
AOO.0

Net comment

2100020 ATC DOOR NOT DLOSEJ AOO.l 2101022 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL SIGNAL NOT ON 1
%
X000

%@5

1 0 1 IDlBC& YO08 1 0 4 OD32Al

1 %@E 1
%

1-169

5. OPERATION

5.7.6

The note if the step sequence function is selected when setting a model
method, mnemonic need following instructions notes: cannot be coded.

When using the step sequence The mnemonic conversion

functions

1)

Programming

by Mnemonic program

instructions cannot be created with mnemonic instructions. It is impossible to

A step sequence

create a step sequence

program with a text editor, or to read the program conversion.

into FAPT LADDER

by means of mnemonic-to-source

2)

Source-to-Mnemonic If source-to-mnemonic subprograms step sequence

and Mnemonic-to-Source conversion is executed

Conversions for a step sequence step sequence source program, being only ladder If a to

are converted source

to mnemonics,

subprograms

ignored. then

program

is subjected

to source-to-mnemonic

conversion,

mnemonic-to-source

conversion,

the original source program will not be replicated.

3)

Source Program Conversion A program can be converted

using Mnemonics by using mnemonics, as shown below:

PMC-RB3

, *

PMCRC3

t (STEP SEQ)

A program

for the PMC-FIB4

(STEP

SEC?) cannot

be converted 7.2.

for use with the PMCRC4

(STEP SEC), because

of the reason explained (For details

in Section

The program can be converted see the description of the

if a ROM file is used, however. decompiler.)

of this conversion,

l-170

5. OPERATION

5.7.7 User batch file execution


The batch file FLMNE.BAT can be executed by suspending the execution of FAPT LADDER.

A users own batch file generated text editor can also be executed.

by editing the contents

of the FLMNE.BAT

file with a standard

Examole 1

The execution

of FAPT LADDER

is suspended

and text editor VZ is activated.

(In this case,

VZ must be defined in the environment

variable PATH beforehand.)

[Operation ] Use a standard text editor to create the batch file FLMNEBAT as follows:

vz
Select MNEEDT (mnemonic editing) from the main menu.

The mnemonic

menu screen appears.

Select ([BATCH]

(user batch file execution).

The following

message appears:

Execute 'FLMNE.BAT'. Add parameter(s)? [A(Add), N(Not add), S(Stop)]

Specify

A (Add), and specify

*.HEX

as the parameter.

VZ is activated

and a list of files

with the extension

.HEX is displayed.

To restart FAPT LADDER. terminate

VZ.

IReturn

to FAPT LADDER. Hit any key! I


The screen display returns to the mnemonic menu screen.

Press any key.

Example 2

The

execution

of

FAPT

LADDER

is

suspended. commands

Then,

the

command Create

processor as

COMMAND.COM follows:

is activated

and MS-DOS

are enabled.

FLMNE.BAT

COMMAND

1 - 171

II. APPLICATIONS
(NOTES ON THE PC ENVIRONMENT)

1. COMMON OPERATIONS

FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PGAT

1. COMMON OPERATIONS

FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

1.1 Function for Transferring Data between the P-G and PC


This function is used to transfer data in ASCII (mnemonic) format between a P-G (including the

Mate and Mark II) and a PC via an RS232 cable. FLOAD98, and the command

The command

for NEC PC9801 series PCs is

for IBM PC/ATs is FLOADAT.

Use this function (data exchange provided

to transfer function)

the sequence

program

between

the P-G and a personal

computer

if

cannot

be used with 3.5 floppy,

for example,

in a system with the P-G not provided with a

with a 5 floppy disk drive or in a system

with a personal

computer

3.5 floppy disk (1.2 Mbytes) drive.

1.1.1

Command input during startup

(1)

Uploading Loads the FAPT LADDER mnemonic data into the PC from the P-G via the RS232 port.

FLOAD98 FLOADAT -

[name of file for storing uploaded data] [name of file for storing uploaded data] -

-u (for PC9801) -u (for IBM PC/AT)

When a file with the same name as the file specified current directory, the following message is displayed.

for receiving

data already

exists

in the

File is exist.

Over write?

<Y/N >

(2)

Downloading Loads the FAPT LADDER mnemonic data into the P-G from the PC via the RS232 port.

FLOAD98 FLOADAT _

[name of file for storing downloaded [name of file for storing downloaded

data] data] _

-d (for PC9801) -d (for IBM PC/AT)

As shown above, the load commands

have the following

two parameters:

-u: Uploads data from the P-G to the PC. -d: Downloads data from the PC to the P-G.

(Note)

The above parameters

can be specified

with either lowercase

or uppercase

characters.

2-l

1. COMMON

OPERATIONS

FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

1 .1.2
PC side

Communications

settings

NEC PC9801 Series (MS-DOS SPEED command)

baud rate: character parity: stop bits: X parameter: length:

4800 or 9600 7 bits even parity 2 bits none

IBM PC/AT Series (PC DOS MODE command)

MODE COMI: MODE COMl:

4800,E,7,2 9600,E,7,2 (for 9600 baud)

P-G side IO NC,CNl,Fl ,F6 (for 9600 baud)

10 NC,CNl,Fl,F6,BRlO

(Note 1) The baud rate can be set to either 4800 or 9600.


baud rate is set to 9600, the parameter for the P-G.

However,

note that when

the PC

BRlO must be added to the baud rate setting

(Note 2) It is necessary to set these communications


using this function, 1). please restore (Chapter

setting only for doing this operation. settings as the section

After 2.1

the communications

The CN number is not fixed. CNl to CN4.

For the P-G or P-G Mark II, the CN number can be any setting from to CN3. However, Use the

For the P-G Mate, the CN number can be any setting from CNl selected 1.

note that the CN number cables specified

here must match the CN number of the IO command.

in Appendix

2-2

1. COMMON

OPERATIONS

FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

Operation examde
During uploading Operation procedure Example of input and screen contents

c PC > < PG > Turn on power. < PG > Enter IO command settings.

; IONC,CNl
; i Settings)

,Fl ,FG(,BRlO)

c PC > PC9801 Series: Enter SPEED command settings. IBM PC/AT Series: Enter MODE command < PG > Store transmission settings.

(See Section 2 of Communications

i : i Press the [F2] key to select menu item no.2. FLOAD98 FLOADAT FILE NAME -u FILENAME -u is displayed. START

data in P-G memory.

< PC > Execute

FLOAD98.

Enters waiting state. Enters waiting state.

i i

Execute FLOADAT.

i < PC > < PG > Set [F6] ON. Select no.4 on the menu. i

LOADER

c PG > Select any entry from 1 to 7 on the submenu. 3egins transmission. Completes transmission. e PG > Returns to the menu. ( PC > The message Operation displayed, ANY KEY. followed Complete is i =zPC > Operation i ; i Complete is displayed. HIT ANY KEY is displayed. i c PG > EXECUTING is displayed.

by the prompt HIT

Hit any key to end operation.

During

downloading Operation procedure Example of input and screen contents

< PC > < PG > Turn on power. < PG > Enter IO command settings. settings. ; i i < PG > Turn on [Fl] menu. key. Select no.2 on the IO NC,CNl,(BRlO,)Fl,FG (See Section 2 of Communications Settings) is displayed.

< PC > Enter SPEED command

! =zPG > EXECUTING

Enters waiting state. ; ; FLOAD98 FLOADAT FILE NAME -d FILENAME -d

< PC > Execute FLOAD98. Execute FLOADAT.

Begins transmission. Completes transmission. <PG> Returns to the menu. Operation Complete is

i <PC>

Output

Start is displayed.

< PC > The message displayed, ANY KEY.

: < PC > Operation i i

Complete

is displayed.

followed

by the prompt HIT

HIT ANY KEY is displayed.

Hit any key to end operation.

2-3

1. COMMON

OPERATIONS

FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PGAT

1 .1.3

Protocol

Durinq uploadinq When the FLOAD98 or FLOADAT command is executed begins. on the PC side, a communications DC 3 is

request is issued for the P-G and reception sent and transmission is completed.

After all data has been received,

0 8 Q @

DC 1 code is sent to the P-G (data transmission Data is received. Completion code is received and reception

request).

is completed.

DC 3 code is sent.

Transmission output.

and reception

both use the l-byte

machine-dependent

BIOS call for input and

Durina downloadinq After the P-G issues FLOADAT is activated a transmission request, the P-G enters begins. the waiting state. FLOAD98 or

in the PC, then transmission is completed.

After all data has been sent. DC 4

is sent and transmission

0 8 @ @

The P-G issues DC 1. DC 2 code is sent to the P-G. Data is sent. DC 4 code is sent.

Transmission output.

and reception

both use the l-byte

machine-dependent

BIOS call for input and

1.1.4

BUSY control
speed is faster than reception In the PC9801 processing, series, BUSY control is performed by

When the transmission issuing

the DC 1 and DC 3 codes. is set to off, which

the X parameter support

in the DOS SPEED In the

command

allows the application

to provide

for BUSY control.

IBM PC/AT series, there is no X parameter,

which effectively

has the same result.

2-4

1. COMMON

OPERATIONS

FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

1.1.5 Data start and end codes


The system will automatically is used. terminates. When determine codes which of the following are used, an error seven pairs of start and end codes message is displayed and operation

none of these

(Note)

The end codes

shown here must appear at the beginning of a line. In

other words, strictly speaking, a data reception end code is

actually denoted by the sequence code. appearing CR + LF + an end within comments

End codes (% etc.)

are ignored.

1.1.6 Data conversion (return codes)


(1) When an LF code (OAH) is received, (ODH) followed by LF (OAH). it is converted into two characters, the first of which is CR

(2) When a CR code (ODH) is received,

it is discarded.

(3) When an end code (DE) is received,

CR (ODH) and LF (OAH) are appended

to it in that order.

1.1.7 Transmission and receive data


Until a data start code (DS) is received, data is discarded.

1 1 1 1 . . ..-Discarded Valid data I...

After the end code (DE) has been sent or received, downloading, then the file is closed.

DC 3 is sent for uploading

or DC 4 is sent for

2-s

1. COMMON

OPERATIONS

FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

1 .1.8

Error detection

and messages
four types of errors.

This software detects the following

(1) When

there is an error in the command

line

Error in the file name, -u. or -d. Parameter FLOAD98 Error FILENAME -u/-d set parameter. (FILNAME, upload or download.)

(2) When

the specified

file cannot be found cannot be opened. I

Output file cannot be found or file for receiving

I~- ~~~

Cannot open output file

(3) When data not in the FAPT LADDER format is sent or received Wrong data received

(4) When there is a definite problem with the start code, Start Code error detected or there is a definite oroblem with the end code

IEnd code

error detected

This software only detects errors in the command This software does not support detection

line and in the FAPT LADDER format. of FAPT LADDER data.

of errors in the contents

Messaaes

When the file name specified the following

as the file for receiving

data already

exists

in the current

directory,

message is displayed. Over write? <Y/N >

File is exist.

2-6

1. COMMON

OPERATIONS

FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

1.1.9
1. 2. 3.

Error detection

and handling

Incorrect entry found in the command line. Specified file cannot be opened. Data not in the FAPT LADDER format was sent or received.
The following 0 0
l l l

causes can be considered

for the above errors:

The end code has been omitted (% or %@E was omitted). The start code has been omitted (%@, where Garbage data exists at the beginning of the file.
l

is A or 0 to 5. was omitted).

Garbage data exists between each unit of data. The file format is completely different from the FAPT LADDER format.

When any of the above errors is detected,

the current operation

is canceled.

During screen.

downloading,

if an error

is detected

on the PC, the system

will return

to the DOS

At the same time, a %, %@E or other end code is sent to the P-G to return it to the

menu screen.

4. Others

When, for some reason, data transfer is interrupted (When the power to the PC or P-G is interrupted during operation, etc.)

When data transfer

is interrupted

during

uploading,

the system

will enter a waiting + <C >). corrupt

state until

data transfer is restarted. When data transfer

(To interrupt

the waiting state, press cCTRl_> downloading,

is interrupted

during

the data becomes

and data

transfer must be started over from the beginning.

2-7

1. COMMON

OPERATIONS

FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PCiAT

1.2 Convert the PMC Type of Sequence Program


By changing the mnemonic file, it is possible to convert some PMC type sequence program to

another type of it.

1.2.1 Converting by system parameter editing


On the following parameter However, different. PMC type, it is possible data. usable functional instructions and range of address are to edit the different PMC type data by changing system

of the mnemonic

format of the system parameter,

1~

CNC TYPE

PMC TYPE PMCRAl/RA2/RA3/RB/RB2/RB3/RB4/RB!YRB6~RC/RC3/RC4

FS16f 18-T/M Power Mate-MODEL D

PMC-PA1 /PA3

[Example:

PMC-RB

+ PMC-RC3] the original source program to mnemonic fife to PMCRC3 LADDER system file.

(1) (2)

Set the PMC type to PMC-RB and convert Change the system parameter PMC type

of the mnemonic on FAPT

with a standard text editor. and convert the mnemonic

(3) Set the file(+(2))

to PMC-RC3

to source program.

Original %@A %@O

file (PMC-RB)

Converted

file (PMCRC3

%@A %@O 2 BCD 3 NO


b

2 ECD 3 NO 4 PMC-RB 7 100 9 YES % %@l 01 ABC-KIKAI 02 S-DRILL

Change system parameter

4 PMC-RC3 5 000000 6 50 7 100 % %@l 01 ABC-KIKAI 02 S-DRILL

%@5 X000 1 YO08 1 %


%@E

0 0

1 ID16C 4 OD32A

$65 X000 1 YO08 1 8 %@E

0 0

1 IDl6C 4 OD32A

2-8

1. COMMON

OPERATIONS

FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

1.2.2

Convert with signal address

converter

CONVERTER FILE NAME FS()T CNV.SYM

APPLICABLE PMC-uM/M(MMC) (FSO-T)

PMCCNC -+ PMC-RAl

TYPE iRA2IRA3IRB

REFERENCE FANUC PMC PROGRAMMING (LADDER

MATERIALS

/RB2RB3RB4RB5 RBG/RC/RC3/RC4 (FS16/18-T) + PMCRAl/RA2/RA3/RB /RB2/RB3!RB4/RB5/ RBG/RC/RCB/RC4 (FS16/18-M)

MANUAL

LANGUAGE) B-61 863E

FSOM

CNV.SYM

PMC-UM/M(MMC) (FSO-M)

PM-C_CNV.SYM

PMC-P (Power Mate -MODEL C)

PAllPA (Power Mate -MODEL D)

(Note)
[Example:

The converter

file is stored in the directory

APPENDIX

of module floppy disk.

PMC-P + PMC-PA11

(1) (2)

Set PMC type to PMC-P, and Set PMC type to PMC-PAl.

convert the original source program to the mnemonic And input the source program name and select

file. (+A.) at edit

[END]

mode without editing the ladder program. (3) Convert the source program(2) to the mnemonic file. (+B.)

(4) Quit FAPT LADDER, and activate any standard text editor. (Select the mnemonic file name(3) to edit.) (5) Replace the symbol and comment (PM-C.CNV). (+C.) file (PMC-PAl) to the ladder data of the original data of the mnemonic file (PMC-PAl) to the converter file

(6) Replace the ladder data of mnemonic mnemonic file (PMC-P). (+D.) (7) Complete

the text editor, and activate FAPT LADDER. and convert the mnemonic file@) to source program. data.

(8) Set PMC type to PMC-PAl,

(3) Select edit mode, and delete the symbol and comment

2-9

1. COMMON

OPERATIONS

FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

Convert file PM-C - CNV.SYM %@2 A. Original file (PMC-P)

60004.3 G68.3 60005.0 695.0 60005.2 695.2 60005.3 G95.3 60005.6 G83.7 G0006.2 675.2 60006.4 674.4 60007.2 G68.2 G0007.5 684.5
%@A %@O B. Converted file (PMC-PAl)

%@A %@O 1 2048 % be1 B


b@2 b b@3 ?D X21.4

2 BINARY 3 NO 4 PMC-PA1 % eel % se2


c D. insertion ,-

X1027.4 X23.4 X1027.5 X23.5 X1027.6 X23.6 X1027.7 X23.7

iRT G121.4 tD.NOT X22.3 fRT.NOT 6122.3 :UB 1 IUB 2 fRT 6121.4 !D.NOT X22.3 rRT.NOT 6122.3 UB 1 UB 2
@E

I$-

b ae3 b se4 b se5 b b@E

2-10

1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

1.2.3 Using data in a sequence program for another program


Data (such as title, symbol & comment, ladder, message, and I/O module method. data) in a sequence

program can be used for another sequence

program, by the following

The range of addresses Refer to the programming

used varies from one model to another. manual of the respective models.

They may have to be modified.

[Example

: Using the symbols

& comment

data of the PMC-FIB for the PMC-RC3]

%@A %@O

%@A

2 BCD 3 NO 4 PMC-RB 7 100 9 YES % eel

%@O 2 BCD
3 NO

4 PMC-RC3 5 000000 6 50 7 100 9 YES % %@l X000.0 ZPX.M X000.1 ZPY.M

%@2 x000.0

2PX.M

x000.1 2PY.M

1.3 Standard Symbol Data


When a mnemonic file and the standard by FANUC. symbol data are combined, it is possible to use the

standard symbol name provided

CNC TYPE FS16/18-T FS16/18-M Power Mate-MODEL Power Mate-MODEL D H

DATA FILE NAME F16&F18-T.SYM FlG&F18-M.SYM PM-D.SYM PM-H.SYM

(Note)

The standard symbol data is stored in the directory

APPENDIX.

2-11

1. COMMON

OPERATIONS

FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

1.4 Changing
Each parameter

Printer Output Format


file of this software can be rewritten using a commercially frames can be changed. available text editor so

that the output format shown in each of the following -AMROFTRP. 1 Diagram output % 1. 2. 3. 4.
L

DAT

Change the paper selection name Set the top margin Set the net interval Set the printer model and

paw
-CROSSING. DAT

(Setting the cross-reference list output format) 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Set the output format guidance information Set the output information Specify the output format Set the read/write coil guidance information Specify the linefeed Specify the page break 5. 6. 7.

-PR201-10 . INF PR201-15 . INF PR201-A4 . INF PRlO-A . INF PRlS-A . INF PRA4-A . INF ESC-P-10 . INF ESC-P-15 . INF ESCPl O-A. INF ESCPl5-A. INF -FANUC-10. INF Set the line spacing Set the left margin Set the title of printout

For these parameter

files, do not change any item not described

here.

2-12

1. COMMON

OPERATIONS

FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

: LI : z

#PAPER=lO-G : flO-A=lO-inch/ASCII i LENGTHL=ll i LENGTH=11 : WIDTHL=lO : WIDTH=10 ; PTCHL=lS/lZO

Print format

:.......)

.:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ..: lo-inch/ASCII . *lo-inch/graphic 15-inch/ASCII 15-inch/graphic A4 portrait/ASCII A4 portrait/graphic

b-1

- ,:gq: .,...

. .. .:.:,~:.:,~~:-:
>:: ,. : :

6:~:~7~8~,.g~~10 ,.y F
:;

~j$.#).. ,,..
:.

.((.,., .,...,._._.
I-

LEFTMGL=O LEFTWG=O TOPMGL=O TOPMG=O LCNTL=4 C_FI LE+-ij O_FILE;PRTDAT.DMP #END,:' #lQ'G=lO-inch/graphic LENGTHL=ll LENGTH=11 WIDTHL=lO WIDTH=10 PTCHL=lS/lZO

A.

SETUP screen (diaqram output)

b-2

LEFTMGL=O LEFTWG=O TOPMGL=O TOPMG=O

:.
: : : : .*.

B. /
.. ..:.. >:

AMROFTRP.DAT

file

:,:...:.. .

:... ,,.. .

::., ~ ,,,.,.... .,>,,: ..... ...... ,.,

C-l.

l .lNF files selectable at #l O-A jindicated aoainst a white backaround)

C-2. l .lNF files selectable at #10-G lindicated aaainst a white backaround)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._...... (Example) If lo-inch/graphic is selected in A: 0 In 8, setting b-2 is valid. @ In C-2, a setting of PR201-lO.INF isvalid. i . . . . . . . ...................................................................................

2-13

1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

1.4.1 Changing the paper selection name


This item makes it possible to change the name of each choice during diagram output format

Name of file to be edited 9MROFTRP.DAT

Point of change

Settings

#l O-A = lo-inch!ASCII

Arbitrary

character

string consisting (or 15 full-size)

of

#l O-G = 1O-inch!graphic #15-A = 15inch/ASCII #15-G = 15-inch/graphic #A4L-A = A4 portrait/ASCII #A4L-G = A4 portrait/graphic

up to 30 half-size characters

(Note)

#A4L-A = and #A4L-G = are unavailable

in the IBM PC/AT system.

1.4.2 Setting the top margin


This item makes it possible to specify the top margin of a diagram when it is output.

Name of file to be edited AMROFTRP.DAT

Point of change

Settings

TOPMGL = 0 TOPMG = 0 (for each form)

Decimal number

1.4.3 Setting the spacing between the LADDER net


By modifying changed this item, the spacing between the LADDER nets used during diagram printout can be

in the manner shown below.

NO0003 C 00001 +00006 NO0004 D YO.7 00001

II

YO.0 l 00006

II

YO.0
l 00006

YO.7 00001

YO.1

YO.0
.00006

YO.1

YO.7 00001

YO.2 +00008

NO0005 E

YO.0
+00006

YO.1

YO.7 00001

YO.2 +00008

When LCNTL = 4

When LCNTL = 5

2-14

1. COMMON

OPERATIONS

FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PCiAT

File edited AMROFTRP.DAT

Modifications LCNTL = 4 (Set for each sheet)

Settings Specify either 4 or 5 I

1.4.4 Setting the printer model and print paper


This item can change the printer model and print paper that are specified during paper selection.

PR201 is not usable in the IBM system.

Name of file to be edited AMROFTRP. DAT

Point of change #l O-A : C;FILE =

l .lNF that can be


set PRlO_A .INF PR201_10 .INF ESCPlO_A.INF ESC_P_lO . INF FANUC_10. INF .INF PRlO_A PR201_10 .INF ESCPlO_A. INF ESC P lO.INF FAN%zlO. INF PR 15-A .INF PR201_15 .INF ESCP15 A. INF ESC_P_i5. INF .INF PRlS_A PR201_15 .INF ESCPIS A.INF ESC _ P1 15.INF PRA4_A PR201_A4 .INF .INF

Printer name PR201 PR201 VP1000 VP1 000 FANUC printer PR201 PR201 VP1 000 VP1000 FANUC printer PR201 PR201 VP1000 VP1 000 PR201 PR201 VP1000 VP1000 PR201 PR201

Print paper type/print 1O-inch 1O-inch 1O-inch 1O-inch 1O-inch 1O-inch 1O-inch 1O-inch 1O-inch lo-inch
15inch

mode

continuous continuous continuous continuous continuous continuous continuous continuous continuous continuous

form/ASCII form/graphic form/ASCII form/graphic form/ASCII form/ASCII form/graphic form/ASCII form/graphic form/ASCII form/ASCII form/graphic form/ASCII form/graphic form/ASCII form/graphic form/ASCII form/graphic

#10-G . C.-FILE =

#15-A

C-FILE #15-G

continuous 15-inch continuous 15-inch continuous 15-inch continuous continuous continuous continuous continuous

C;FILE

15-inch 15-inch 15-inch 15-inch

#A4L-A : (Note) C;FILE =

A4 portrait, cut sheet/ASCII A4 portrait, cut sheet/graphic

#A4L-G : (Note) C;FILE =

PRA4_A PR201_A4

.INF .lNF

PR201 PR201

A4 portrait, cut sheet/ASCII A4 portrait, cut sheet/graphic

(Note)

This item is not supported

in the IBM system.

2-15

1. COMMON

OPERATIONS

FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

1.4.5 Setting the line spacing


This item can specify the line spacing of a diagram when it is output. one specified according to the descriptions in Section 1.4.4. The file to be edited is the

Name of file to be edited l .INF LPI LDRLPI

Point of change

Settings

(H) (1 B) (C) (120) ; (H) (1 B) (C) (T15) ;

(H) (1 B) (C) (T < decimal number > ) ; (H) (1B) (C) (Tedecimal number >) ;

1.4.6 Setting the left margin


This item can specify the left margin of a diagram when it is output. one specified according to the descriptions in Section 1.4.4. The file to be edited is the

Name of file to be edited

Point of change LMARGIN (H) (1B) (C) (LOOO); 1

Settings

I(H) (1B) (C) (LKdecimal

number>)

2-16

1. COMMON

OPERATIONS

FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC,AT

Environment

settings for diagram printout

- example

1 (settings

in file AMROFTRP.DAT)

When 1 is selected as the printout paper

#PAPER = 10-G L #10-A= 10 inch/ASCII LENGTHL = 11 LENGTH = 11 WIOTHL = 10 WIDTH = 10 PITCHL = 15/l 20 PITCH = 20/l 20 LINESL = 83 LINES = 55 RATIOL = 2/3 RATIO = 2/3 GRAMODL = 14 GRAMOD = 16 ANKMODL = 0 ANKMOD = 1 LEFTMGL = 0 LEFTWG = 0 l TOPMGL =0 * TOPMG = 0 * LCNTL = 4 L C FILE = PRlO AJNF O-FILE = PRTtiAT.DMP &ND L #10-G = 10 inch/graphic LENGTHL = 11 LENGTH = 11 ;/w&i ; A0 PITCHL: 15/l 20 PITCH = 20/l 20 LINESL = 83 LINES = 55 RATIOL = 2/3 RATIO = 213 GRAMODL = 14 GRAMOD = 16 ANKMODL = 0 ANKMOD = 1 LEFTMGL = 0 LEFTWG = 0 l TOPMGL = 0 . TOPMG = 0 + LCNTL = 4 * C-FILE = PR20l_lO.INF OF&E = PRTDAT.DMP + #I 5-A = 15 inch/ASCII LENGTHL = 11 LENGTH = 11 WIDTHL = 15 WIDTH = 15 PITCHL = 15/l 20 PITCH = 20/l 20 LINESL = 83 LINES = 55 RATIOL = 213 RATIO = 213 GRAMODL = 16 GRAMOD = 16 ANKMODL = 1 ANKMOD = 1 LEFTMGL = 0 LEFTWG = 0 + TOPMGL = 0 + TOPMG = 0 + LCNTL = 4 . C-FILE = PRl S_A.INF OF&E = PRTDAT.DMP *#15-G-15 inch

Changing the types of printout paper The name is changed from 1:lO inch to l:NEC 10. see Fig. 52(e) in Part I.) *

#PAPER = I O-G #lo-A=NEC 10 LENGTHL = 11 LENGTH = 11 WIDTHL = 10 WIDTH- 10. PITCHL = 15/l 20 PITCH = 20/l 20 uw:L ;E RATIO; = 2/3 RATIO = 213 GRAMODL = 14 GRAMOD = 16 ANKMODL = 0 ANKMOD = 1 LEFTMGL = 0 LEFTWG = 0 ;c$w-=,5 LCNTL = 4 C-FILE = PRlO_A.INF 2EFlkE * PRTDAT.DMP #l O-G = EPSON 10 LENGTHL = 11 LENGTH = 11 WIDTHL = 10 WIDTH = 10 PITCHL = 15/l 20 PITCH = 20/l 20 LINESL = 83 LINES = 55 RATIOL = 2/3 RATIO - 2M GRAMODL = 14 GRAMOD = 16 ANKMODL = 0 ANKMOD = 1 LEFTMGL = 0 LEFTWG = 0 TOPMGL = 0 ym& ;40 C-FILE :ESCPlO A.INF fEF&E = PRTDAf.DMP 115-A = 15 inch/ASCII LENGTHL = 11 LENGTH = 11 WIDTHL = 15 WIDTH = 15 PITCHL = 15/l 20 PITCH = 20/l 20 #L ;k RATIO; = 2/3 RATIO = 2M GRAMODL = 16 GRAMOD = 16 ;;EIg;L 71 LEFTMGLZ 0 LEFTWG = 0 TOPMGL = 0 TbPMb = 0 LCNTL = 5 C FILE = PR15 A.INF O-FILE = PRT@AT.DMP #END *#15-G--15 inch

Changing

the upper margin

(The upper margin is set to ) 5 characters.) Changing the types of printout paper * (The name is changed from 2:15 inch to 2:EPSON 10. See Fig. 5.2(e) in Part I.)

When 2 is selected as the printout paper

Changing

the type of printer

) (The printer is changed to EPSON VP1000 and the paper is changed to IO-inch forms.)

When 3 is selected as the printout paper

Changing the spacing between :he LADDER nets * :The net spacing for the -ADDER diagram is widened.)

(Note)

An asterisk (*) indicates

data which can be modified.

2-17

1. COMMON

OPERATIONS

FOR THE

PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

Environment

settings for diagram printout

- example 2 (settings

in fife PR201_1O.INF)

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

PRZOlH3 CNTINF CRLF FORMF CPI CANCEL LDRCP I * LPI * LDRLP I * LMARGIN RMARGIN LDRCHAR JPNSET JPNRESET 1
. . . . . .

(H) W)(C) (T2D); (H) w (C) (Tl5) ; (H)WW)(LDDD); (H) W (C) t/D781 ; (H) (18) (C) (50014); (HwB)ww; (H) W W (H) ;
. . . . . .

Setting the spacing between lines (Line spacing is set to 25.) I I

Setting the left margin (Left margin is set to 5 characters.)

PRZOlH3 CNTINF (
CRLF FORMF CANCEL W)(OD,OA); yw{:

CPI LDRCP I LPI LORLP I LMARGIN RMARGIN LORCHAR JPNSET JPNRESET

OWhH); (H) (1B) (C) (Q) ; (H)W)WT25); (HWWC)(Tl5); (H) (1B) (C) (LOD5) ; (H) (18) (C)(/078); (H) (16) (C) (50014); (H) W) w (K); (H) W (C)(H);

(Note)

An asterisk (*) indicates

data which can be modified.

2-18

1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

1.4.7 Setting the title of printout


This item can change specified according the title of a diagram when it is output. The file to be edited is the one

to the descriptions

in Section 1.4.4.

Vame of file to be edited :INF SYS-TITLE (C) (

Point of change ~~

-T
(C) (<any characters > ) ;

Settings

character

string consisting (or 30 full-size)

System parameter

of up to 60 half-size

CMT-TITLE (C) ( Symbol & comment ) ;

LAD-TITLE (C) (* Ladder diagram ) ;

IO-TITLE (C) (* I!0 module data ) ;

MSG-TITLE (C) ( Message data 7 ;

TIT-TITLE (C) ( Title data 7 ;

CRS-TITLE (C) ( Cross-reference ) ;

BIT-TITLE (C) ( Bit address map T ;

LS-TITLE (C) (List file 7 :

(Note)

Half-size

katakana characters

cannot be used.

1.4.8 Setting the cross-reference list output format guidance information


This item can specify reference guidance listing. characters to be output as guidance information to be output at the beginning during cross-

In the CROSSINF.DAT

file, lines with no semicolon

are valid as

information.

Name of file to be edited CROSSINF.DAT GUIDE =

Point of change

Settings

Any character to 19 bytes

string consisting

of up

2-19

1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

1.4.9 Setting the cross-reference list output information


This item can specify step and/or net numbers step and net numbers CROSSINF.DAT information. file, are specified, lines with which to be output as cross-reference is to be printed at the information. If both In the

first can also be specified. are valid

no semicolon

beginning

as cross-reference

Name of file to be edited CROSSINF.DAT NET-INF =

Point of change

Settings

When only the net number is output: NET-INT = 1 STEP-INF = 0 When only the step number is output: NET-INT = 0 STEP-INF = 1 When the net and step numbers output in the stated sequence: NET-INT = 1 STEP-INF = 2 When the step and net numbers output in the stated sequence: NET-INT = 2 STEP-INF = 1 are are

STEP-INF =

1.4.10 Specifying the cross-reference


This item enables a character the CROSSINF.DAT

list output format


of the step and net numbers. are valid. In

string to be printed at the beginning at the beginning

file, lines with no semicolon

Name of file to be edited CROSSINF.DAT 1 FORM =

Point of change

Settings

I Character

string + %s

(Note)

Only letters in lowercase

are valid as %s.

Z-20

1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

1.4.11 Setting the cross-reference list read/write coil guidance information


This item can set a comment semicolon at the beginning about coil attributes. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no

are valid.

Vame of file to be edited XOSSINF.DAT READ = WRITE =

Point of change

Settings

Character
13 bytes.

string consisting

of up to

When coils are indicated graphic symbols,

using

specify as shown as the

below, and select graphic diagram output format. READ = -I IREAD = -I IREAD = READ = -l/l-l/l-I I-I I-(/): : : : : :

WRITE = -()WRITE = -()-

1.4.12 Specifying the cross-reference list linefeed


This item can insert a space line between semicolon at the beginning are valid. addresses. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no

Name of file to be edited CROSSINF.DAT 1NL =

Point of change

IDecimal
as the linefeed count,

number

(Note)

In this case, space lines as many as the specified addresses. addresses.) (If 0 is specified

value plus 1 are inserted no space line is inserted

between between

1.4.13 Specifying the cross-reference list page break


This item can specify a page break between no semicolon at the beginning are valid. address types. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with

Name of file to be edited FF =

Point of change

Settings

:ROSSINF.DAT

0 = the page is not advanced 1 = the page is advanced

2-21

1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

1.4.14 Setting the output format guidance


A desired character the CROSSINF.DAT valid. string can be output as guidance file, data of a line beginning when the cross reference list is printed. In (;) is

with a character

other than a semi-colon

File edited CROSSINF.DAT

Modifications GUIDE =

Settings Desired character bvtes string of up to 19

1.4.15 Setting the output information


As the cross reference output information, step numbers, net numbers, or both can be output.

When both step and net numbers In the CROSSINF.DAT valid.

are output, the order in which they are printed can be specified. with a character other than a semi-colon (;) is

file, data of a line beginning

File edited CROSSINF.DAT

Modifications NET-INF = STEP-INF =

Settings Only net numbers NET-INF = 1 STEP-INF = 0 Only step numbers NET-INF = 0 STEP-INF = 1 Net numbers and step numbers are are output. are output.

output in that order. NET-INF = 1 STEP-INF = 2 Step numbers and net numbers are

output in that order. NET-INF = 2 STEP-INF = 1

1.4.16 Setting the output format


A character string can be printed in front of each step or net number. with a character other than a semi-colon In the CROSSINF.DAT file,

data of a line beginning

(;) is valid.

File edited CROSSINF.DAT

1 I FORM

Modifications =

I I Character

Settings string + %s

(Note)

With %s,

only the lowercase

letter s is valid.

2-22

1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

1.4.17 Setting the read/write coil guidance


A comment beginning about each coil attribute with a character can be specified. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, data of a line

other than a semi-colon

(;) is valid.

File edited CROSSINF.DAT READ =

Modifications Character

Settings string of up to 13 bytes.

WRITE =

To print a coil with graphic characters, specify as follows and

select graphic diagram output.

READ=READ=-IIREAD= READ=

1 I- -I/j-: -I/I-: -1 I-I I-(I): : : :

WRITE = -()WRITE =

-()-

(Note)

With %s, only the lowercase

letter s is valid.

1.4.18 Setting line feed


Blank lines can be inserted data of a line beginning between the data of different addresses. In the CROSSINF.DAT file,

with a character

other than a semi-colon

(;) is valid.
-1

File edited CROSSINF.DAT NL =

Modifications Decimal value

Settings

(Note)

Blank lines of the specified (If zero is specified

number

plus one are inserted

between

the data of different

address types.

as the line feed value, no blank lines are inserted.)

1.4.19 Setting form feed


The printing of the data of each address type can be started on a new page. In the

CROSSINF.DAT

file, data of a line beginning

with a character

other than a semi-colon

(;) is valid.

File edited CROSSINF.DAT FF =

Modifications

Settings 0 = Form feed is executed. 1 = Form feed is not executed.

2-23

1. COMMON

OPERATIONS

FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

Environment
l

settings for diagram output - example 3 (sample setting 1 of the CROSSINF.DAT file

file)

Sample setting of the CROSSINF.DAT :

GUIDEsSTEP No./NET No. NET-INF=2 STEP-INF-1 FROM=S%s/N%s READ--I I- -I/I- : WRITE=-()-(/): NL=l FF=O ;

0 Sample cross reference 6

output

1 [A:YFLADDER4(SAMPLE]
*** Address x0.0 -II-Yl+ x0.1 Cross reference Symbol Comment ***

PAGE 1 STEP NO./NET No.

: S00045/N00009 SOOO88/NOOO20

SOOO49/NOOO12 S00053/N00013 SOOO94/NOOO2 SOOO54/NOOOl2 SO0059/N00015

S00082/N00017

-It-+
YO.0

s00050/N00010 S00077/N00029

S00065/N00017

Double writing S00045/N00009

U-Q-:
RO.0 -Ii-++

SOO128/NOOO62

S00256/N00098

: S00009/N00003
S00022/N00010

S00047/N00019 SOOOO2/N00001

SOOOl2/NOOOO8 S00014/N00009 SOOOl5/NOOOlO S00024/N00012 S00033/N00015 S00045/N00017 S00074/N00032 S00079/N00035

2-24

1. COMMON

OPERATIONS

FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

Environment
l

settings for diagram output - example 4 (sample setting 2 of the CROSSINF.DAT file

file)

Sample setting of the CROSSINF.DAT

GUIDE-Step number NET-INF=O STEP-INF=l FROM=S$s READ=read WRITE=Write NL-0


FF=O :

0 Sample cross reference

output

[A:YFLADDERYSAMPLE] l ** Cross reference

** Step number

PAGE 1

Address Symbol Comment x0.0 : SO0045 SO0049 SO0053 SO0082 SO0088 SO0094 Read

x0.1 Read YO.0


Write

: SO0050 SO0054 SO0059 SO0065 SO0077 Double writing : SO0045 SO0128 SO0256

RO.0
Read Write

: SO0009 SO0012 SO0014 SO0015 SO0022 SO0024 SO0033 SO0045 so0047 so0074 so0079 : soooo2

2-25

III. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS

3. THE STEP SEQUENCE

FUNCTIONS

1. OVERVIEW
1.1 What is a Step Sequence ?
The step sequence is one method for programming the sequence control governed by a

programmable flow chart. Therefore

controller.

This method features

the direct representation as a subprogram,

of the control using the ladder

flow on a method. to

Each block of processing it provides

is described visualized

an easy-to-understand

flow of the processes

and is well-suited

the control of entire processes. For details of the step sequence method, refer to the following manual.

FANUC PMC-MODEL
PROGRAMMING

PA1 /PA3/RAl /FWWtA3/RB/RB2/RB3/RB4/RBS/RB6/RC/RC3/RC4~NB/NB2 MANUAL(LADDER LANGUAGE) B-61863/06

1.2 Programming with the Step Sequence Method


The programming editing function with step sequence method is supported by Fapt ladder, not but by the built-in

on FANUC PMC-MODEL

RB4!RB6/RC4/NB2. or ladder, is used.

Setting a model in Fapt ladder decides which method, step sequence

1.3 A Program Configuration Screen


If a model that supports the step sequence subprograms. To enable this, a subprogram function is selected, a program can be edited in units of

configuration

screen has been added. and editing of a target subprogram.

This screen lists subprograms,

and supports the selection

EDIT(LADDER/STEP

SEQUENCE)

RCa(STEP SEQ) [A:yFLYDATAYSFCOl] PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)

0 LEVEL1 0 i0"'tiUOO1.' 0 0 PO008 0 0 PO021 0 . . . . 0 PO101 0

LEVEL2 PO002 PO009 PO022

0 0 0 0 . .

LEVEL3 PO004 0 PO005 PO014 0 PO015 PO024 0 PO025 . .

0 PO006 0 PO016 0 PO026 . . 0]PO406

0 0

PO007 PO017 q]POO27 . .

PO202

0 JPO304

q]PO405

qJPO407

Sub-program

: PO001

DELETE

NEW

ZOOM

3-l

3. THE STEP SEQUENCE

FUNCTIONS

1.4 The Configration

of a Sequence

Program

A sequence program consists of the following 5 kinds of program unit; - The 1st level of ladder
- The 2nd level of ladder - The 3rd level of ladder - Subprograms of ladder sequence - Subprograms of step sequence

LEVEL 1 (LADDER)

LEVEL 2 (LADDER)

LEVEL 3 (LADDER)

Sub

Program Pl (Step Sequence)

Sub

Program P2 (LADDER) 1

ISub

Program P3 (LADDER)

Sub Program Pn (Step Sequence)

3-2

3. THE STEP SEQUENCE

FUNCTIONS

1.5 Data Flow

-PC9801*IBWPC/AT Source program Ladder 1st level Ladder 2nd level Ladder 3rd level Subprogram Subprogram Pl P2 7 Mnemonic program Mnemonic conversion A mnemonic program without step sequence

Compilation/Decompilation

Object code

I
L

ROM format program I


t

'71

Input/Output

Input/Output

Input/Output

Transfer data

Floppy cassette

Memory card

4
- RS232C

4
- Handy File. - FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTER

4
- Memory card

-CNC

I
v
1) [PMCI 2) II/O1 3)[HOST]

+
1) [PMCI 2) I I/O1 3)[FDCAS]

v
1) IPMCI 2) II/O1 33) [MCARD] (Boot process also can read the memory card)

The operation of soft key when input/output

3-3

3. THE STEP SEQUENCE

FUNCTIONS

2. SETTING A MODEL
2.1 Operation

(1)

Starting FAPT LADDER At the MS-DOS prompt, key in FLADDER.

(2)

Displaying

the initial screen and other information have been displayed, press any key.

Once the system edition, copyright.

FAPT

LADDER

AOEB-92014502#EN Ver 08.0 (C) 1994.07.22 1991 FANUC LTD

Copyright

END ? (Y:END, 0THER:RESUME MENU)

(3) Displaying

the main menu as shown below, press the < F7 > (SETUP) key.

When the menu screen is displayed

MAIN MENU Fl F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 FE F9 FlO KEY KEY KEY KEY KEY KEY KEY KEY KEY KEY : : : :
:

[A:YFLYDATAYSFCY EDIT PRINT COMPILE DISCOMPILE LINK I/D SETUP MNEMONIC EDIT UTILITY END

: :
:

: :

EDIT

COMPIL

DISCPL

I/D

SETUP

UTILTY

END

3-4

3. THE STEP SEQUENCE

FUNCTIONS

(4) Setting the PMC model To use the step sequence (model which supports function, select PMC-XXX(STEP function) SEQ or PMC-RB6 or PMC-NB2)

the step sequence

from the listed models.

SETUP

RCQ(STEP SEQ)

PMC-RAl PMC-RA2 . . PMC-RB4


.
.

(STEP SEQ)

* PMC-RC4
. .

(STEP SEQ)

Select by cursor and hit [Enter] key. END

COPY

3-5

3. THE STEP SEQUENCE

FUNCTIONS

3. EDITING
This section describes how to create a step sequence program.

3.1 Basic Operation


(1) Displaying the main menu

Press the < Fl > (EDIT) key.

MAIN MENU Fl F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 FlO KEY KEY KEY KEY KEY KEY KEY KEY KEY KEY : : : : : : : : : : EDIT PRINT COMPILE DISCOMPILE LINK I/O SETUP MNEMONIC EDIT UTILITY END

[A:YFLYDATAYSFC%

EDIT

COMPIL

DISCPL

I/O

SETUP

UTILTY

END

(2)

Selecting

the program to be edited

Enter the name of the source program to be edited.

SELECT SOURCE PROGRAM

Rc4(sTEP SEQ) [A:YFLYDATAYSFC%

SOURCE PROGRAM NAME : TEST

EXEC

END

Press the c Fl > key.

The screen changes,

depending

on the program to be entered.

1)

If a new program name is specified: The model setting screen is displayed. Then, the edit menu is displayed. Re-confirm the selected model.

2)

If the specified selected model:

name

is that of a program

created

for a model

which

differs

from

the

The selected

model is automatically

changed

according

to the specified

program.

Then,

the edit menu is displayed. 3) If the specified name is that of a program created for the selected model:

The edit menu is displayed.

3-6

3. THE STEP SEQUENCE

FUNCTIONS

To return to the main menu, press the < FlO> up to eight alphanumeric characters,

or < ESC>

key.

As the program name, enter

without an extension.

(3) Displaying the editing menu Press the < F2 > (LADDER/STEP

SEQUNCE)

key.

EDIT Fl F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 FlO KEY KEY KEY KEY KEY KEY KEY

RCI(STEP SEQ) : : : :
:

[A: YFL~DATAYsFcY

: :

TITLE LADDER / STEP SEQUENCE SYMBOL h COMMNET MESSAGE I/O MODULE SYSTEM PARAMETER END

1 TITLE ILADSFC ISYMBOL IMESSAG IMODULEISYSPRM 1


I
I I I I

I
I

I
I

I END I
I

(4) Subprogram

configuration

screen screen is displayed as shown below:

The subprogram

configuration

EDIT(LADDER/STEP

SEQUENCE)

RC4(STEP SEQ) [A:YFLyDATAYSFCOl] PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)

0 . . . 0 0
. . 0

LEVEL1 ........... . 0 m;iJ)@ti$., 0 PO008 PO021 0 0


. .

LEVEL2 PO002 PO009 PO022

0 0 0 0
. .

LEVEL3 PO004 0 PO014 0 PO024 0


. .

PO005 PO015 PO025

0 0 0
. .

PO006 PO016 PO026

0 0
. .

PO007 PO017 qJPOO27

PO101

PO202

q]PO304

q ]PO405

q]PO406

q]PO407

Sub-program

: PO001

DELETE

NEW

ZOOM

3-7

3. THE STEP SEQUENCE

FUNCTIONS

Note

1)

The 3rd ladder level can be omitted. If the [ZOOM] key was used screen to nest a program to a certain depth, and if the key,

Note 2)

subprogram

configuration

is displayed

upon a single press of the [MAIN] key was pressed

the editing of the subprograms Such subprograms

for which

the [ZOOM]

is suspended.

are marked with A].

(5)

Step sequence Position

diagram to a program marked with 01, then press the [ZOOM] or <RET> key.

the cursor

The step sequence

editing screen is displayed

as shown below:

DIT(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE)
,..:.)))):. .... .,:,: (..>:t:i J@J$,

Rc4(sTEP SEQ) [A:YFLYDATAYSFC~~] PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)

s3

cl Sll

s13

q s21

cl s31

4 (Note 1) Note 1)
The current The entire position screen of the cursor on the screen across is indicated. the screen to consists of 32 elements

and 64 elements

from top to bottom.

The cursor is positioned

any element on the screen.

3-8

3. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS

3.2 Creating a Step Sequence 3.2.1 Creating a subprogram of the step sequence
EDIT(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) RCI(STEP SEQ) [A:~FL~DATAfSFCOl] PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)

0 LEVEL1 0 LEVEL2 ;/$;;-'i:&jflQ~!n ,.. . . . . ]POOO2 .: . . . i........ i,,. 0 PO008 0 PO009 0 ]POO21 0 PO022
. . . .

0 0 0 0
. .

LEVEL3 PO004 0 PO014 0 PO024 0


. .

PO005 PO015 PO025

0 0 0
. .

PO006 PO016 PO026

PO007 PO017 q]POO27


.

0 0

I
Following keys are useful in this screen. Function key : Deleting a subprogram ] : Creating a new subprogram ] : Modifying a subprogram

DELETE

NEW

ZOOM

Other keys [ROLL UP] : Displaying previous screen

[ DELETE] [NEW [ZOOM

[ROLL DOWN] : Displaying

next screen

Meaning of display

EDIT(LADDER/STEP
Edit (LADDER/STEP PMC-RC4 [A: Y FL..

SEQUENCE)
:

RC4(STEP SEQ) [A:%FLYDATAYSFCOl]


FAPT LADDER editing screen The list screen of subprogram Setting a model Current directory

SEQUENCE)

: : :

(STEP SEQ)

I
PROGRAM

PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)


: Remarks which is one of the title data

aLEVEL
LEVEL1 LEVEL2 LEVEL3 : : :

q LEVEL2

OLEVEL3 I

The 1st level of ladder The 2nd level of ladder The 3rd level of ladder (In case of PMC-RC4 the 3rd ladder level can be omitted, in case of PMCRB4

the 3rd ladder level does not exist.)

PO001

q]POOO2
a subprogram

PO004

PO005

PO006 0

PO007

Cl

-:

of the ladder of the step sequence

01

a subprogram

3-9

3. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS

(1) Creating a new subprogram Press the [NEW] key.

New program

name ? m

Enter the number of the subprogram

to be created (P200, for example).

Press the [F2 ] key.

(2) Modifying -

a subprogram of the subprogram key. to be modified position (P200, for example), the cursor to P200 then press the then press the

Key in the number [ZOOM] [ZOOM] or <RET>

Alternatively,

or <RET > key.

If a subprogram message

number

marked

with

A ] (P21, for example)

is selected,

the following

is displayed:

Editing

this

subprogram

is not completed. (Yes/No) [Yl 1


from suspended previous editing and edit

Continue to select it 7

To continue session,

the editing

session

using

the results

obtained

press the < RET > key.

To cancel the results of the previous

editing session

the subprogram

from its original state, enter < N >.

3.2.2 Creating a step sequence program


The basics and configuration FANUC PMC-MODEL of the step sequence Supplementary are described Description in the following document: (Ladder Language)

RB4/RC4

of Programming

B-61 863EI05-3

On the step sequence cursor.

screen,

different

soft keys are displayed,

depending

on the position

of the

When the cursor is on the step line, following

softkey menu is displayed.

I
cl

I
cl] s2

:ti;:ili;;$;$

...I

I
0 s20

+cl

La s30

101

01

-+ JHP

FUNC

CHK

ZOOM

3-10

3. THE STEP SEQUENCE

FUNCTIONS

1
1

0 UJI
01
I

I:

Step subprogram Initial step subprogram Block step subprogram Line for link Jump to label

[ tLBL

Label for jump The end of block step

1:
I: I :
] :

I
[

ACHK

I:
] ] ] : : :

[
1

( FUNC

Various functions Grammatical Zooming checking

[ +JMP

( ZOOM

into a subprogram

When the cursor is on the transition

line, following

softkey menu is displayed.

FUNC

CHK

ZOOM

I:
1: I:

Transition

I l[ l==

I : Divergence of selective sequence


Divergence Line for link Convergence Convergence of selective sequence sequence of simultaneous sequence

I I I t[t==
[
[ FUNC [ CHK

I :
1:
I ] ] ]

of simultaneous

:
: : : Various functions Grammatical Zooming checking

[ ZOOM

into a subprogram

(1)

Entering a step Position the cursor to the desired input position, Then, enter a step number and subprogram then press the [Cl] key.

number.

Pressing the [n]

key causes a step to be created, as shown below. assigned.

A free step number is automatically

iii;iij,t~.:.:.~.:.Y::: ~~~
.;:.S

$5

::::!,:i-i_._:~: ..,.:.._
STEP ACTION :. Sl . . . . . :? l-1

JMP

+LBL

-L

FUNC

CHK

ZOOM

The specified

subprogram

number (PlO in this example)

is displayed

below Sl.

3-11

3. THE STEP SEQUENCE

FUNCTIONS

STEP : 81 ACTION : PlO l-l

To change the step number, press the <RET>

key to position the character cursor .? on

STEP and use the [BS] key to change the number.

.:$:f :B~~:.:~ ~~~~:


T;f;y
)::::::,

.:

::::::...:.:.:.:.:.~..~:
.). :.:.:, :.:.: :.

.. ..... :.:.::.: ,,i;;,;i;y::::::::: :>:.. ,... ,.:.:::::::::

STEP : Slg ACTION : PlO l-l

(2) Entering a transition


Position the cursor to the desired input position, then press the [ + ] key. Enter a subprogram number Press the [ + ] key.

ACTION : .:$
l-2
FUNC CHR

ZOOM

Enter a subprogram number.

I
o)i

,:ilFI:t:~:~::s:~~~~~~
:..:::p::; ;I:,. ,.:

.\: ..
.),.

:.:~~~~~ 3 : .::.::. ....:: j::+ ::~.~:~,~.~::~~~:~,:::~.:,~,.~:i.~


.::.;

,:,

: +

:........, ..:.:::>,. .> ... ... ;,.;.. : ...i.;:; 1:::....::.:.I,., :..

ACTION : $100 l-2

3-12

3. THE STEP SEQUENCE

FUNCTIONS

(3) Divergence

of selective

sequence

Position the cursor to the desired input position and press the [ 1 --_I key.

FUNC

CHR

ZOOM

Position the cursor to the desired input position and press the [ 1 -_I key.

(4) Convergence

of selective

sequence key.

Position the cursor to the desired input position and press the [ f -]

ACTION : PlO& 2-4

1 +. I+_Il=zl

It-_lt__l

FUNC

CHK

ZOOM

3-13

x g
u -

z
-

z II II c i -

z II II t -

j_ -

II II + -

II II -_, -

I + -

I + -

+ -

t -

3. THE STEP SEQUENCE

FUNCTIONS

Specifying

a label for jump destination (step line), then press the [LBL] key.

Position the cursor to the desired input position Then, enter a label name.

Press the [+

LBL] key.

LABEL

Ll@;

l-l
FUNC CHR ZOOM

JMP

+LBL

Enter a label name.

STEP : Sl ACTION : PlO l-l

3-15

3. THE STEP SEQUENCE

FUNCTIONS

(8)

Specifying a label jump Position the cursor to the desired input position (step line), then press the [+ JMP] key. Then, enter a label name. Press the [+ JMP) key.

LEBEL :

A...
$$

2-3

JMP

LBL

FUNC

CHK

200?4

Enter a label name.

+- L10

101 s1 I

, q ]s 2

f-r
PlOO PlOO

PlOO

I::,::' :.i,jjj.~:~:i'i.li~:~;i: :;.; ._ .,;::;. '; y<.:.y ;I:;:-"' :i'i.:.:?.i':... &A:itxiO


., :,,; ,:>, ::: ...... .I.:::::i.: ...... .y, .:.:...:.:.:;.:.:.:.:.:.: :~~:~.~:~::...:::::::~::::~:~:~:::::

LEBEL : Llfi: 2-3

3-16

3. THE STEP SEQUENCE

FUNCTIONS

(9)

Deleting an element Position the cursor to the element to be deleted, then press the [DEL] key.

Select

the element

by the <DEL> key and press

the

<return>

key

In the example shown above, two figures (elements) selected. video.

of a selective

branch and transition in reverse

are

Specify the element to be deleted with the narrow cursor, displayed in reverse video, press the [DEL] key.

To position the cursor displayed

To restore the

state shown above, press the (ESC] key.

If the [RETURN] the following

key is pressed in the state shown above, the selective

branch is deleted and

screen is displayed:

3-17

3. THE STEP SEQUENCE

FUNCTIONS

To specify another figure, press the [DEL] key again.

I
I01 Sl
..I

... ,..,....... .
>:..A .. .. .. :

.:..

:::..

... :~l;;;i;~g~. .

.k
.,

Inserting an element Position the cursor to the desired insertion mpty row, press the [INS] key. o create an empty column, press the [SHIFT] and [INS] keys. position, then press the [INS] key. To create an

STEP ACTION

: S2 : p 2 0 0 @$ l-3

3-18

3. THE STEP SEQUENCE

FUNCTIONS

Press the (INS] key.

l-3

Press the [SHIFT]

and [INS] key.

IO1 Sl

c
Pl Cl Sll cl s21

I
STEP : S2 ACTION : PlO2

I
l-3

3-19

3. THE STEP SEQUENCE

FUNCTIONS

(11) Search

_.. .,. ..,::,,... : .. $5:": ;;. t (, ~, :)>>::..,: : >: : :.::.: . . .. ".."."..."~>;.> .:.,.::.:.> z:. .: . .?.... ,.i.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,., Pl Pll

g$j::$i:.;.:l:li: I-J

q;;..;. = = = = = i= ,, =
....::::. ...:j:::ji(ij:j. ..;:.II:;::: :.:.::: jj ::..:.

SlO

Cl s20 t P21

T2

cl SlO I

Cl s20 I

If the [F8] (FUNC) key is pressed in the state shown above, a pop-up menu is displayed shown below:

as

Fl F2 F3 F4
FS

Search Copy Move Main List cl Sll


I

Y3
Press the [Fl]

cl s21
I

(Search) key.

A pop-up menu is displayed,

as shown below:

Pl

Fl F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7

Step Action Label symbol Position Top Bottom

3-20

3. THE STEP SEQUENCE

FUNCTIONS

Then, press the (Fl]

(Step) key.

Another

pop-up menu is displayed,

as shown below:

Enter the step number to be searched The system starts searching

for (S20, for example),

then press the < RET > key.

through the part subsequent

to the cursor.

Copying

or moving an element

Press the [F8] (FUNC) key.

Pl

3-21

3. THE STEP SEQUENCE

FUNCTIONS

When the [F8) (FUNC) key is pressed, a pop-up menu is displayed

as shown below:

Fl F2 F3 F4 FS

Search Copy Move mAin List

Press the [F2) (Copy) key.

The system prompts the operator to enter a start point.

ACTION : Specify Start position

l-2

Position the cursor to the desired start point (position 2-3 in the example press the < RET > key.

shown below), then

The system prompts the operator to enter the end point.

It

Pl
,.:: $;;;y;: .gi.lj?

q]S2
Pl
i

,(, ,.:.: ,.,.: ;;::,&T ..:*:... 1 s20

:,:.: .>.::.:::::: ,. ... ...... .._ :: :: :::::.::::::

..:.:.:..q:-: IJ :..:.. ./\. ...:.: ...., ,.,.. : ::::.y:::: ::: .,. ,.:. ::,:;. :: :.,::.:,,. .. :::.; .j,. :.;. .,,.. ,...,i :::::.::::::.;::.:.+:

Pll
+ +

P21

ACTION : Specify End position

2-3

3-22

3.

THE STEP SEQUENCE

FUNCTIONS

Position the cursor to the desired end point (position 3-4 in the example shown below), then press the < RET > key. The system prompts the operator to specify a copy destination.

qlS2
p1 i

;;; ~~~ :~~~~~~:~~~~ I:::iliii:ll:i:li#i:~,::,:~:~:~:~~: ::.. j..:.:...: .....:>:...:.:i\:.: :::.zy :i.~.I_:~~I:I:I:i.i:~~~~~~~~~:~~:~:,,~,~~ ,., :i,i:I:I:I:II:i:II:I:i::I:i6:i: . . ,. . . . ...\. . ..\\ .:. . . . . . . ._.. ,, ., ,,,,,.,,, :j;j;y ;:~~:~,~:~:~:~:~:~:~::::::.,.~~.~::i:~.~r~:~~:::~~:..~, ::;:;:y:;:~:..:::::::::.:.:.:..:.: ._.,. :.:.::;::::::: .. .........:.: . ... .. .y,,: :...::::z::i ,:, :::.:;;:: ::~~~~~::5::iili:~Bi:~:~~:::::~: C. :,;:;i:@!:qgg .; ,,,. <,, ,::I:~;~~ws ~~;~~~:;:,::.;..:,, q.:.: . . . . . . . . . . . . ,.( ,.l,L..i_ :.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:i(.:.,.;.. .,.,.,... :.:.:..,:.:.:.:.:. ;: ..:,, :::;:y:i:::; ,::: ,.,. :,:::,:::::::z:i:: L............. .....:..: :.:.:::::::::::::::::::::::: I:::.::: ,,):,: ::,:,...: .,.y:: i:,., :.:..... ::.:f+;~:::.:.:.::::::.:.:::.:.:.: ..:.. ....:,. + .., c

:z: J::

ACTION : Specify End position

3-4

Position the cursor to the desired copy destination then press the < RET > key. The specified

(position 4-3 in the example shown below),

part is copied.

Pl

ACTION : PlOO

When a part is copied, The S address is not copied. The P address is copied. Assign a free number. change the address.

If required,

3-23

3. THE STEP SEQUENCE

FUNCTIONS

(13) Returning procedure

from the ZOOM destination

to the program configuration screen, displayed

screen (MAIN).

To return to the program configuration below.

when editing was started, follow the subprogram,

The system assumes that the editing of the step sequence key was pressed, is suspended.

from which the [ZOOM] The edited subprogram

is not saved in the source program file.

Press the [F8] (FUNC) key.

_....\\.. ........................ $1:: ::;;g:: :.:;:::y:y:;:~:: _, ,.,.,. .. ,.,_

$Q;

..Y y.*

$.:rii:

1 SlO

~~~~

tpll

Cl s20 i P21

After pressing

the [F8] (FUNC) key

F3 F4

Move

F5

mAin List

rfter pressing

the (F4] (MAIN) key

EDIT(LADDER/STEP

SEQUENCE)

R~~(~TEP PROGRAM:(STEP

SEQ) [A:YFLYDATAYSFC~~) SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)

LEVEL1 $@,iip;&#$

LEVEL2 0 ~0002

LEVEL3 0 PO004

pooo5

poooe

p(JoO7

q ~0008
A]~0021 . . 0 ~0101

0 PO009 0 PO022 . b ~0202

0 PO014 0 PO024 . . q JPO304

0 PO015 0 PO025 . . 0JPO405

q PO016
0 PO026 . . c]]PO406

0 .

PO017

q lPOO27
&PO407

3-24

3. THE STEP SEQUENCE

FUNCTIONS

If the subprogram

whose previous

editing session was suspended message is displayed:

(marked with A])

is

selected again for editing, the following

Editing this subprogram is not completed. Continue to select it ? (Yes/No 1 [Yl

To continue Otherwise,

the previous

editing session, press the [RET] key. editing session is cancelled.)

enter N. (The result of the previous

(14)LIST
The list of subprograms edited is displayed. referenced by the stepsequence subprogram that is currently being

Press the (F8] (FUNC) key.

:.:::::.:::::ii::I:i8iiiiiiii i_i:.::~~.::;:.; :~~~~~~~

7====j =
Cl SlO
cl s20
t

....... ..:::...::.:.;.: ........:.:,:.:::.:::.::::::~:;::~::,: .I... ... ....... .. .I + :::,t .:: ~i;::i:::i::i::_:~::.~

Pl

Pll

P21

After pressing the [F8] (FUNC) key

Pl =II=I=t=III Fl F2 F3 F4 F5 Search Copy Move mAin List

After pressing the [F4] (LIST) key

EDIT(LADDER/STEP OJP200 0 0 PO008 PO021 0 0

SEQUENCE)

R~~(~TEP SEQ) [A:YFLYDATAYSFCO~] PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)

PO009 PO022

0 0

PO014 PO024

PO015

q PO025

0 0

PO016 PO026

PO017

q ]POO27

I
3-25

MAIN

CHANGE

ZOOM

3. THE STEP SEQUENCE

FUNCTIONS

Following

keys are useful in this screen.

Function [ MAIN

key ] :Displaying configuration the subprogram screen

Other keys [ROLL UP] : Displaying previous screen

[ROLL DOWN] : Displaying

next screen

[ CHANGE [ ZOOM

] :Creating ] :Modifying

a new subprogram a subprogram

Screen display

q ]P200
I

The subprogram

which is being edited is displayed. numbers for which The subprogram

If the [ZOOM] are arranged the [ZOOM]

key is pressed

to nest the first is

program to a certain depth, the subprogram which they are nested.

from the left in the order in key was pressed

displayed

at the left end.

( 0

PO008

PO009

[I3 PO014

PO015

PO016

PO017

Subprograms following cl cl] (15)Checking : :

referenced

by the subprogram

that is currently

being edited

are listed with the

mark: : Ladder subprogram Step sequence subprogram

the syntax

Press the [CHK] key.

t
j:,...,

Pl
.;:.(.:.:.:.:.~:.~::::::::::,

gqc. :.::.:::,:::I:.:,:,::::....:.

0 ;-,~:il~:~:~~
;,.,; ::~...,.,.:

:.:7 ./.

s1 0

I
0 t s20

:,t-ll~~ Pll

P21

3-26

3. THE STEP SEQUENCE

FUNCTIONS

If the step sequence

is satisfactory,

the following

message is displayed:

$."f: "
.:.:.::

~~~~~~~~ I
... . ... . .....

.....

: : : >: :

... .................... .;...::..:.::;: .: ..?..): ..: ..:.:.::::

..................
..

slo

.:.::.:..:. .. .: :.:::j::::::::

:>::z: .::i;i::,i:i::llii;ili:iliiilcy;
2;:s:: ............ ......> ...
. :.:.
....................

...................

Pl
t t

Pll

Check completed

If the step sequence

is invalid, the following

message is displayed:

Pl

~11 [Chart
I

Sequence

error

1
I

I
(16)Modifying

I
a subprogram key.

(ZOOM)

Press the [ZOOM]

~~~~~~~l,;~~.~ i= = = = 7= :::::::: :;:;:::::::; ;::: :.:,:g:>::;:;:i:


~~:~~~~di 0
Pl SlO
. ::.:i.:.:.:::::+ :. .2;. t :; :.... ::,:::.::.:: : :;$,.,,,,,;,:., .jjj,::jjj:,:~~g::j:~::

cl s20
t

Pll

P21

cl SlO Y2
I

Cl s20
I

3 - 27

3. THE STEP SEQUENCE

FUNCTIONS

When the [ZOOM]

key is pressed, the figure pointed by cursor decides

the type of subprogram

which is to be edited.
L

Figure 0 101 01 t

Meaning Step sequence

of the figure

Subprogram

to be edited

subprogram subprogram subprogram

Ladder subprogram Ladder subprogram Step S8qU8nC8 subprogram Ladder subprogram

Initial step sequence block step sequence Transition

(17)End of modifying Press the [ESC] key.

Fl F2 F3 F4 F5

Save(update) Quit Edit save Rename, Optimize

h quit

h quit

Menus

Menu

Save Quit Edit Rename optimize

I IEnd
End

Editing

Result of editing

Display

IOptimized
Discarded Continued Updated Optimized and continued Not optimized Optimized Optimized

Continue End Continue

3-28

Z LJJ CL

APPENDIX

1 DATA TRANSFER

CABLES

APPENDIX

1 DATA TRANSFER

CABLES

Use the cables below to transfer data from a PC to a CNC, ROM writer (FA writer or PMC writer), or P-G (P-G Mark II or P-G Mate).

1.

For PC9801 PC980 1 25pin male connector On-line cable 25pin male connector CNC, ROM writer, or P-G

2.

For IBM PC/AT IBM PC/AT g-pin female connector 25pin male connector 25pin female connector IBM PC/AT cable CNC, ROM writer, or P-G On-line cable

II 25-pin male connector

3.

For IBM PS/2 IBM PSI2 25-pin female connector 25-pin male connector 25-pin female connector IBM PS/2 cable On-line cable

25-pin male connector 1 CNC, ROM writer, or P-G

Al-l

APPENDIX

1 DATA TRANSFER

CABLES

On-line

cable

(AOSB-0031-K8Ol/K802)

2 SD RD 4

2 SD RD 4 RS 5 I cs ER DR

RS
25dn male connector I cs ER DR 5

25-pin male connector

CD

ZI 7

E 7

CD SG

SG
1 1

FG

FG

IBM PC/AT cable

1 CD 2 RD 3 SD g-Din female connector 4 ER 5

8 CD 3 RD 2 SD 20 ER 7 SG 6 DR 4 RS 5 cs 22 Cl 25-pin female connector

SG
6 DR 7 RS 8

cs
9

Cl

Al-2

A!
P

APPENDIX

2 FUNCTION FOR OPERATING THE PMC-UM WITH RAM

APPENDIX 2 FUNCTION FOR OPERATING RAM 1. GENERAL


This appendix describes the procedure for operating

THE PMC-L/M WITH

the PMC-L using built-in

RAM or the PMC-M

using the optional

RAM board.

It also describes

related notes.

2.

HARDWARE

CONFIGURATION

(1) PMC-L
No extra hardware is needed. with the ROM and without The PMC-L is operated with ROM only when the PMC-L is provided the Ladder Edit Cassette (printed circuit board).

(2) PMC-M
The optional RAM board is necessary. It is also necessary OEl to mount the Ladder Edit Cassette and OE2, on the memory board. or to mount ROMs for the PMC-M on the ROM sockets,

Mount the PMC-M ROMs on the sockets as shown below.

ROM number OF1 OF1 -_) +

Socket location on the memory card OEl OEl

Memory card (A16B-1212-0210)

(Note 1) When the PMC-M is provided with the ROM board, it is operated with ROM whether
the Ladder Edit Cassette is mounted or not. using the Ladder Edit Cassette on the PMC-M stored

(Note 2) When a ladder program is modified


provided in the ROM board, and the modified DGNOS ladder diagram display

with the ROM board, the PMC-M executes

the original

ladder program

ladder program is displayed function. The program

on the screen with the executed and the

being

program being displayed

are different.

A2-1

APPENDIX 2 FUNCTION FOR OPERATING THE PMC-L/M WITH RAM

3.

RAM OPERATION
shown below to perform the RAM operation.

Follow the flowchart

(1) PMC-L

Yes

Contents of the backup RAM

No

Is the EPROM

Parameter for displaying the PMC load select screen

Yes

(Note) Ladder programs stored in the EPROM are copied to the RAM.

=I pk
(see Section 4)

A2-2

APPENDIX

2 FUNCTION FOR OPERATING THE PMC-L/M WITH RAM

(2) PMC-M

Contents of the backup RAM


I

Yes

Is the EPROM ROM operation No (Note) Ladder programs stored in the EPROM on the ROM board are copied to the RAM.

Parameter for displaying the PMC load select screen

Yes

PMC LOADING ADDRESS:OOOOH DATA: OOH

==k
RAM

(Note) Transferring ladder programs from the FAPT LADDER is needed. RAM contents are deleted when the power is turned off.

PMC load select screen i (see Section 4)

AZ-3

APPENDIX

2 FUNCTION FOR OPERATING THE PMC-L/M WITH RAM

(3) Notes on RAM operation Follow the description

in the PMC-M

below.

@ When a ladder oroaram sent from the FAPT LADDER is executed Mount memory the ROMs board. for the PMC-M into the sockets usually

on RAM ooeration on the that is that

used for the PMC-L management software

Write data into the ROM using the PMC-M as that used for transferring

the same version only contains

a ladder program.

A ladder program

the END code (SUBl,

SUB2, and SUB48) can be used. a program which can

When a ladder program is sent from a ROM or a floppy disk that contains be executed, follow the description above.

When a ladder oroctram chanaed RAM ooeration Merhod 7: Mount the

or created usina the Ladder Edit Cassette

is executed

on

Edit Cassette.

The

PMC-M

management

software

in the

Edit

Cassette executes Mefhod 2: Mount sockets

the ladder program. Also mount the ROMs for the PMC-M board. The into the

the Edit Cassette. usually used

for the

PMC-L

on the memory

PMC-M

management

software in the ROM executes

the ladder program.

To change above.

a ladder

program

which

is executed

on RAM

operation,

follow

the description

If an attempt

is made to perform

RAM operation

in conditions

other

than those

described

above, ROM parity alarm 604 is issued. operation.

Satisfy the above conditions

first.

Then perform RAM

A2-4

APPENDIX

FUNCTION FOR OPERATING THE PMC-UM WITH RAM

4.

PMC LOAD SELECT SCREEN


on hardware configuration.

The PMC load select screen shown below varies depending

When the Edit Cassette is not mounted Item (5) in Fig. 4 is not displayed.

When the PMC-L is not provided When the PMC-M

with ROMs on the sockets; with ROMs on the sockets nor the ROM board is not

is not provided

mounted on the PMC-M; Item (2) in Fig. 4 is not displayed.

PMC LOAD SELECT ( 1) LOAD FROM I/O (2) LOAD FROM EROM (3) RUN (4) RUN WITHOUT PMC (5) EDIT LADDER PUSH l-5 KEY :
Fig. 4

Whether

the PMC load select screen is displayed CNC parameter.

or not is determined

by the setting of DPCRAM,

a bit of the following

NO.71

I #7

DPCRAM #6 #5 #4 #3 #2

I #l #O

DPCRAM

1: 0:

The PMC load select screen is not displayed. The PMC load select screen is displayed.

A2-5

APPENDIX

3 ERROR MESSAGES

APPENDIX 3 ERROR MESSAGES 1. MAIN MENU/SETTINGS


Message xxx executable Hit any key! file not found. Description and action to be taken

Executable file xxx does not exist in the system directory. System directory is not specified in the declaration made by environment variable PATH. Main memory is insufficient. Arrange setup so that sufficient main memory can be acquired (500 KB or more). Error occurred while loading executable file xxx.

Insufficient memory. Hit any key!

xxx process error. xxx file l/O error.

Hit any key!

I/O error for the xxx file occurred during system setup for the type of machine being used. The executable file of compiler Install the system again. was not found.

Not found I_COxxx.EXE.

Not found FLxxx.TBL.

No system setup file was found. There is no machine type setting file that can be used by the compiler. install the system again.

A3-1

APPENDIX

3 ERROR MESSAGES

2.

ERRORS AT [LIST] COMMAND


Message (compilation & printer) FILE DATA Meaning and Dealing

MAKING WRITING

DATA TABLE SELECTED

Data table for target program list is making. When source program list screen exit, writing selected files into P INTERF.DAT. There is no P INTERF.DAT in current directory.

OPEN ERROR P_INTERF.DAT HIT ANY KEY... READ ERROR P_INTERF.DAT HIT ANY KEY... WRITE ERROR P HIT ANY KEY... NOT ENOUGH KEY... FILE ALREADY KEY... MEMORY. HIT ANY INTERF.DAT

Reading error about P INTERF.DAT.

Writing error about P INTERF.DAT.

Memory is not sufficient screen.

for source program list

SELECT.

HIT ANY

- The number of selected

file is out of range.

NOT BE SELECTED

FILE, YET.

When any file are not selected as target file, you cant move the cursor to target file list screen. Specified strings is not found. (Search for file name) Specified strings is not found. (Search for PMC model) files

NOT FOUND IN CURRENT DIRECTORY. HIT ANY KEY... NOT FOUND SPECIFIED HIT ANY KEY... STRINGS.

NOT MODIFIED EXTEND, ALREADY SELECTED FILES. HIT ANY KEY... ABSOLUTE PATH MUST BE SPECIFIED. HIT ANY KEY... INPUT ERROR DIRECTORY L-IIT ANY KEY. NAME.

- You cant change the extension, when selected are exist in select file list screen. - Absolute path must be specified, [DRIVE ] command. with using

Specified directory name is not found, with using [DRIVE] command.

A3-2

APPENDIX

3 ERROR MESSAGES

3.

EDITING (SOURCE PROGRAM SELECTION)


Message Description and action to be taken

Insufficient

memory.

There is not sufficient main memory for loading an executable file. An area of 500 KB or more is required. Disk space was used up during file l/O. System setup file xxx does not exist in the system directory. Software management system directory. file xxx does not exist in the

nsufficient

disk space.

\lot found xxx Set-up file.

\lot found xxx PMC-OS file.

(xx file I/O error.

I/O error occurred for file xxx during creation of a source program file. Invalid characters appear in the name, xxx, of the input source program file. Machine type for the input program and the machine type for the system (common table file) do not agree. Perform proper system setup for the type of machine being used. Neither the input program name nor the output program name were specified when a source program name was specified. File already exists with the name specified for the output program. To overwrite this file, enter 3. To cancel, enter N. Specified input/output program name does not exist. A new file is being created. Specify an output program name. Names of the input program and output program do not agree and the input program does not exist. Symbol and comment contain error(s). data in input program xxx

llegal xxx Source-program

name.

inachine Kind And Input Program Not >onsistency! PMC series is xxx.

lease Appoint Program Name

Output Program Already Exist! All Right? (Y/N)

nake New Source Program

lease Appoint Output Program Name Ippointed Input Program Not Exist

xx Symbol & Comment

data broken.

A3-3

APPENDIX

3 ERROR MESSAGES

3.1 Ladder Diagram

Editing

Message ILLEGAL OPERATION -

Description

and action to be taken

Only the RETURN key was pressed. Address data input is incorrect. Editing is not being performed within the limits when creating function instructions. Function instructions cannot be created while the cursor is on the right-hand side. Editing buffer was exceeded during net creation.

EDIT BUFFER OVER 70LINE/l NET OVER LARGE NET APPEARED 256STEP/l MNEMONIC NET OVER BUFFER OVER

Editing cannot be continued due to the large size of nets being edited. Make nets smaller.

Attempt was made to make a LADDER program of more than 21,840 (24,000 when an EMS board is used) steps. Too many items in data table Non-numeric character(s) were specified for [COPY], [INSLIN], ]C-UP], or [C-DOWN]. Input address was specified in a coil. Data table contains invalid character(s). Relay or coil address is not specified. Relay or coil is required. Horizontal lines in LADDER diagram are unconnected. Vertical lines in LADDER diagram are incorrect. Function instruction parameters have not been set.

SET COUNT OVER INPUT INVALID

ADDRESS

BIT NOTHING

RELAY OR COIL NOTHING HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL

VERTICAL ARAMETER -ADDER

LINE ILLEGAL NOTHING

ILLEGAL

LADDER diagram is incorrect. Incorrect net found when [COPY][MOVE] was specified. Error found on the screen during a search beyond the screen. Unnecessary An incorrect relay or coil exists. net was found.

ERROR NET FOUND

3ELAY OR COIL FORBIT LEASE COMPLETE NET

LLEGAL NETS CLEARED

Net which did not match the specified level of the stack was found and deleted from the LADDER program which was read in. Specified search. address was not found during address

ADDRESS BIT NOTHING

-UNCTION

NOT FOUND

Specified function function instruction

instruction search.

was not found

during

A3-4

APPENDIX

3 ERROR MESSAGES

Message STACK REGISTER OVER (8bit) ERR -

Description

and action to be taken

There are 9 or more continuous stacks in the LADDER program which was read in. There is not enough data area for the specified Disk space insufficient Error occurred Error occurred during writing file.

NOT EXIST APPOINT FILE NOT READ DISK SPACE NOTHING FILE NOT WRITE INSUFFICIENT KEY!

DATA SIZE

when reading data from a file. when writing data to a file.

MEMORY.

HIT ANY

- Area to be used in editing could not be acquired.

3.2 Other Editing (Applicable to Title, Message, and Comment, and I/O Module Editing)

System Parameter,

Symbol

Message File Read Error! File Write Error! File I/O Error! Hit Any Key Hit any Key -

Description

and action to be taken

File could not be read. File could not be written. File I/O error occurred. Work area for message editing could not be acquired due to insufficient memory. Symbol data already exists that is identical symbol data that was input. Nonexistent address was specified. data was to

Hit Any Key

Not Enough Space

Same Symbol Data Exist

No Definition

Address Appointed

Data Save Error

Error occurred when symbol or comment being registered in the work area.

Not Found Data Error

Required data could not be found during symbol data lookup. There is an input error in the l/O module settings. There is an error in the group that was input. There is an error in the base that was input. There is an error in the slot that was input. There is an error in the ID code that was input. Undefined Specified search. key was specified. address could not be found during

Input Data Invalid Appointed Appointed Appointed Appointed group Not Exist Base Not Exist Slot Not Exist ID Code Not Exist

Input Key Not Used Invalid Address Appoint

Invalid Value

Error -

Out-of-bound value was input. Data other than a numeric value was input. Addresses panel. have not been set at the operation

Operate Panel Address

A3-5

APPENDIX

3 ERROR MESSAGES

4.

PRINTER
Message Description and action to be taken

DATA INPUT ERROR

There is an error in the data input in the setup screens such as the type selection screen for diagram output. Nonexistent file name was entered in the source program selection screen. Machine type codes in the common the management file do not agree. table file and

NOT FIND FILE

DIFFERENT

MACHINE

CODE.

WRITE ERROR COMONDAT.TBL. HIT ANY KEY... NOT EXIST AMROFTRP.DAT. HIT ANY KEY... WRITE ERROR AMROFTRP.DAT. HIT ANY KEY... DATA INVALID AMROFTRP.DAT. HIT ANY KEY... NOT ENOUGH MEMORY. HIT ANY KEY... FILE READ ERROR. HIT ANY KEY...

Error occurred when a program name was written to the common table file. AMROFTRP.DAT exist. (print format data file) does not

Error occurred when the paper size was written to AMROFTRP.DAT. Data in AMROFTRP.DAT system program. is incorrect. Reinstall the

Tried to acquire memory but there was no memory area of a sufficient size. There is no title file or system parameter file. Either symbol or comment file could not be found during LADDER diagram printing or cross-reference printing. Existing file could not be read in. [BREAK] key was pressed during printing.

CHANCEL PRINTER HIT ANY KEY... SEL SWITCH OFF DATA INVALID xxxxxxxX. HIT ANY KEY... OPEN ERROR OUTPUT HIT ANY KEY... FILE. OUTPUT. -

SEL button of the printer is off. Error occurred data file.

Turn it on.

during reading of the print format

Error occurred during opening of output file. is not sufficient space on the disk. No output file is specified file.

There

OUTPUT FILE NOT DEFINED. HIT ANY KEY... OUTPUT FILE ALREADY OVER WRITE (YIN) WRITE ERROR OUTPUT HIT ANY KEY... CANCEL FILE OUTPUT. HIT ANY KEY... SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA BROKEN. HIT ANY KEY... EXIST.

in the print format data

File exists with the same name as the output file. Enter Y to overwrite or N to cancel output. Error occurred during writing to the output file. There is not sufficient space on the disk. [BREAK] key was pressed during file output.

FILE.

Symbol and comment

data files are invalid.

A3-6

APPENDIX

3 ERROR MESSAGES

5. COMPILATION,
Message Error title 80

DECOMPILATION,

AND LINKING
Description and action to be taken by PMC was found

Character code not permitted during title compilation.

Illegal OP. PANEL (PARAMETER). Proceed to discompile using NO

System parameter that specifies use of the operation panel was specified and there was an invalid address specified in the external DI (KEY data) address, external DO (LED) address, PMC image address (DI), or PMC image address (DO). This system parameter is forcibly turned off and processing is continued (PMC-R series only). Size of a message exceeded the system. Character code not permitted during message compilation. the maximum size for

Error message 60

Error message 61

by PMC was found

Error symbol/comment

70

During compilation, the size of a symbol or comment exceeded the maximum size for the system. During compilation, when the message area was extended, symbol and comment data overflowed the permitted ROM size. Character code not permitted during symbol compilation. Character code not permitted during comment compilation. by PMC was found

Error symbol/comment

71

Error symbol/comment

72

Error symbol/comment

73

by PMC was found

Error ladder 40 Error end 2

During LADDER compilation, the size of the LADDER program exceeded the maximum size for the system. During LADDER compilation, when the symbol and comment area was extended, the LADDER program overflowed the permitted ROM size.

Error ladder 41

Error ladder 42 Error end 2

Invalid intermediate LADDER code was found during LADDER compilation. - Invalid LADDER object was found during LADDER decompilation. There is an invalid intermediate intermediate code file. There are no intermediate There is no #LA file. code in the

Error ladder 48

Error end 25

codes for the LADDER.

Error end 3 Error end 4

Number of partition codes exceeded

99.

Execution time for the first level ladder exceeds the PMC default value or the time set in the system parameter.

A3-7

APPENDIX

3 ERROR MESSAGES

Message Error end 17 -

Description

and action to be taken

END2 was found before END1 or END1 was not found before the LADDER program ended. END3 was found before END2 or END2 was not found before the LADDER program ended. END3 was not found before the LADDER program ended. (Does not include third level ommission mode.) There is more than one ENDl. There is more than one END2. There is LADDER program code following END1 exists in common END2 exists in common END3 exists in common control mode. control mode. control mode. END3

Error end 18

Error end 19

Error end 20 Error end 21 Error end 24 Error end 5 Error end 6 Error end 7 Error end 11 Error end 12 Error end 13 Error end 8 Error end 9

END1 exists in jump control mode. END2 exists in jump control mode. END3 exists in jump control COM exists in common mode.

control mode.

COME exists in common control mode in which the number of coils is specified. COME exists outside of common JMP exists in jump control mode. JMPE exists in jump control mode in which the number of coils is specified. JMPE exists outside of jump control mode. WRT or WRT.NOT function instruction WRT.NOT. does not exist following that requires WRT or a control mode.

Error end 10 Error end 14 Error end 15

Error end 16 Error end 27

Uarning end 29

Number of coils was specified in a machine type for which the number of JMP coils cannot be specified. The parameter is forcibly set to 0 (JMPE specification mode) and processing is continued. Number of coils was specified in a machine type for which the number of COM coils cannot be specified. The parameter is forcibly set to 0 (JMPE specification mode) and processing is continued.

Narning end 30

A3-8

APPENDIX

3 ERROR MESSAGES

Message Error link 90 Error link 92 -

Description

and action to be taken

During linking, SO record was not found before the end of the load module. Different S record exists before the SO record.

During linking, the value for the record length area in the S2 record was less than 4. - S record other than SO, S2, S8, or S9 was found. - No S8 or S9 record was found before the end of the load module. During linking, an attempt was made to load a load module into an area other than the specified address area. No source program was specified decompilation. for compilation or

irror link 93

\lot appoint source program name

riot appoint ROM format file name

ROM format file name was not specified compilation, decompilation or linking. No load module file name was specified

for

Jot appoint load module file name Iut of memory

for linking.

- Work area required for processing cannot be acquired. This occurs because a device driver which requires a large amount of memory is resident, because data is too large, or for some similar reason. Not enough space is available on disk for file creation during compilation, decompilation or linking. Name specified for ROM format file during compilation already exists.

Jot enough space

:ile already exist ?enewal (Y/N)? rogram already exist ?enewal (Y/N)? qead error

- #CN file of the source program specified for decompilation already exists. #CN or #PA file of the source program specified compilation does not exist. Some sort of disk l/O error occurred. for

Iead error

lead error -

ROM format file specified for decompilation or linking does not exist. Machine type of the ROM format file specified for decompilation differs from the machine type specified in the machine type setting. Some sort of disk I/O error occurred. Load module file specified for linking does not exist. Some sort of disk l/O error occurred. Some sort of disk I/O error occurred. Some sort of disk I/O error occurred.

Vrite error Vrite error

A3-9

APPENDIX

3 ERROR MESSAGES

Message (System parameter) Read error

Description

and action to be taken

- Some sort of disk I/O error occurred. (Note) When no #PA file exists for the specified source program, the following message is displayed. Cannot read source program j-l-j-\. - Some sort of disk I/O error occurred. (Note) Error termination does not occur even if no #TA file exists for the specified source program. - Some sort of disk I/O error occurred. (Note) Error termination does not occur even if no #IO file exists for the specified source program. - Some sort of disk I/O error occurred. (Note) Error termination does not occur even if no #ME file exists for the specified source program. - Some sort of disk I/O error occurred. (Note) Error termination does not occur even if no #SY file exists for the specified source program. - Some sort of disk I/O error occurred. (Note) Error termination does not occur even if no #Cl file exists for the specified source program. - Some sort of disk I/O error occurred. (Note) Error termination does not occur even if no #LA file exists for the specified source program.

(Title) Read error

(I/O module)

Read error

(Message)

Read error

Symbol)

Read error

Comment)

Read error

:Ladder) Read error

System parameter) :Title) Write error

Write error

Some sort of disk I/O error occurred. Some sort of disk I/O error occurred. Some sort of disk I/O error occurred. Some sort of disk t/O error occurred. Some sort of disk I/O error occurred. Some sort of disk I/O error occurred. Some sort of disk I/O error occurred.

I/O module) Write error Message) Write error

Symbol) Write error Comment) Write error

Ladder) Write error EXECUTING

Time-consuming processing is being performed during compilation, decompilation, or linking. (Note) This is not an error message.

A3-10

APPENDIX 3 ERROR MESSAGES

6.

COMPILE ERRORS
two basic groups:

Compile errors can be divided into the following

Error:Processing

is stopped because of a fatal error.

The processing

can not be continued

unless the cause of the error has been removed.

Warning: Processing The processing

of a subprogram

for which a warning is output is stopped. is continued.

of other subprograms

6.1 Path O/warning


001 - Editing sub-program (Cause) has not completed ( Pn ) (Pn.$SJ) has not been completed.

The editing of a subprogram

002

- Multiple (Cause)

sub-program

with same number exist ( Pn ) program have identical numbers.

A ladder program and step sequence

003

. The title data which could not be display on the CNC was replaced with space code (Cause) The title data contains for example). a code which cannot be processed (a Japanese code,

004

* Illegal OP.PANEL( (Cause) Although

PARAMETER

). Proceed to discompile

using NO.

the system parameter

for the use of the FO machine operatorspanel

is set to YES, the DI/DO address data is not specified.

6.2 Path O/error/password 005


* Verification (Cause) error. is invalid.

The password

006

* This word can not be used as password.Try (Cause) (Action) The entered password Enter another password. is not valid.

another word.

007

* Only alphabetical (Cause)

and numerical

characters

are allowed.

A non-alphanumeric

character

is specified.

6.3 Path O/error/others


008 - Not appoint source program. (Cause) No source program name is specified.

009

* Not appoint ROM format file name. (Cause) No ROM file name is specified.

A3-11

APPENDIX

3 ERROR MESSAGES

010

- Not enough disk space. (Cause) There is insufficient free space on the disk.

011

- Out of memory. (Cause) There is insufficient free space in memory.

012

* xxx Source-Program (Cause)

name illegal.

The source program name is invalid.

013

- xxx file not found. (Cause) An installation error may have occurred. Retry the installation.

014

* xxx read error. (Cause) The source program may have been damaged or destroyed.

015

* xxx write error. (Cause) A write error occurred, the cause is not known.

016

-xxx file already exist. (Cause) A ROM file having the same name exists. (warning)

017

* xxx Source-program (Cause)

not found.

The xxx source program cannot be found.

018

- xxx(System (Cause)

parameter)

read error. data of xxx may have been damaged or destroyed.

The system parameter

019

* xxx(Title) (Cause)

read error. The title data of xxx may have been damaged or destroyed.

020

* xxx(V0 module) read error. (Cause) The I/O module data of xxx may have been damaged or destroyed.

6.4 Path l/warning


001 - Not found Sub-program. (Cause) An empty file was compiled.

002

* Sub-program (Cause)

number is different

from Source-program.

The specified

program number does not agree with a stored programnumber.

003

* There is no SP instruction (Cause) The specified Alternatively,

at the head of the subprogram. does not begin with the SP instruction. file has been damaged or destroyed.

subprogram

the data of the specified

A3-12

APPENDIX

3 ERROR MESSAGES

004

* SP instruction (Cause)

was detected

in the subprogram.

Data was already present before SP instruction.

005

* There is no SPE instruction (Cause) Data remained

at the bottom of the subprogram.

after SPE instruction.

006

- There is an undefined (Cause)

instruction. instruction is stored.

A code of other than a step sequence

007

* Specified (Cause)

value for a parameter The parameter

of the xxxx instruction

is outside the range. range.

of the xxxx instruction

falls outside the predetermined

008

* An illegal program number is specified (Cause) The program number specified predetermined range.

for the xxxx instruction. for the xxxx instruction falls outside the

009

- An illegal label number is specifed for the xxxx instruction. (Cause) The label number specified predetermined range. for the xxxx instruction falls outside the

010

- The label of xxxx is used twice or more. (Cause) A label number is duplicated within a single subprogram.

011

* The number of label exceeds (Cause)

the limit. number of labels that can be

An attempt was made to exceed the maximum defined in a single subprogram.

012

* Illegal DSTEP (Cause)

instruction

was detected, is not defined. Alternatively, the definition of the DSTEP

The DLBL instruction instruction

is duplicated.

013

* LADDER execution (Cause) (Action)

time at the 1st level is too large. time of the first level exceeds the predetermined limit.

The overall execution

Reduce the size of the program of the first level. . is other

014

* The coil number specification (Cause) The parameter than 0. (Action)

of JMP instruction

is not allowed.

of the JMP instruction

(number of coils to be jumped)

Specify 0 for the parameter.

015

- The coil number specification (Cause) The parameter other than 0. (Action)

of COM instruction

is not allowed. (number of coils to be controlled) is

of the COM instruction

Specify 0 for the parameter.

A3-13

APPENDIX

3 ERROR MESSAGES

016

* There is no LADDER program. (Cause) (Action) The level 3/subprogram Add an END3 or SPSPE is empty. instruction.

017

- The symbol data which could not be displayed code. (Cause) The symbol contains

on the CNC was replaced with space

a code other than 20H to 7EH or OAH.

018

- The comment code. (Cause)

data which could not be displayed

on the CNC was replaced with space

The comment

contains

a code other than 20H to 7EH or OAH.

019

* The message data which could not be displayed code. (Cause) The message contains

on the CNC was replaced with space

a code other than 20H to 7EH or OAH.

6.5 Path l/error


020 * Not found FLCOMMON.MSG (Cause) An installation file. Retry the installation.

error may have occurred.

021

- Not found FLCOSTEP.MSG (Cause) An installation

file. Retry the installation.

error may have occurred.

022

- Not found FLxxxxx.TBL (Cause) An installation

Set-up file. error may have occurred. Retry the installation.

023

* FLxxxxx.TBL (Cause)

Set-up file broken. error may have occurred. Retry the installation.

An installation

024

* Insufficient (Cause)

disk space. There is insufficient to the file. free space on the disk, preventing data from being output

(Action)

Delete any unnecessary

data from the disk.

025

* LADDER program exists beyond END instruction. (Cause) A program is specified after the END instruction.

026

* The number of label exceeds (Cause)

the limit. the limit (up to 256 for each

The number of labels used exceeds level/subprogram).

027

- There is no label of Lxxxx. (Cause) (Action) The jump destination label for the JMPB instruction is not defined.

Define the label with the LBL instruction.

A3-14

APPENDIX

3 ERROR MESSAGES

028

- The label of Lxxxx is used twice or more. (Cause) The definition of the label is duplicated.

029

* There is no END1 instruction. (Cause) A program of level 1 does not end with an END1 instruction.

030

* There is no END2 instruction. (Cause) A program of level 2 does not end with an END2 instruction.

031

- There is no END3 instruction. (Cause) A program of level 3 does not end with an END3 instruction.

032

* There is no LADDER program. (Cause) The program of level 1 or 2 is empty.

033

* There is no SP instruction (Cause)

at the head of the program. of a subprogram is not SP.

The first instruction

034

. Illegal SPE instruction (Cause)

was detected. is not preceded by the SP instruction.

The SPE instruction

035

- LADDER program exists beyond END1 instruction. (Cause) Within level 1, a program is specified after the END1 instruction.

036

- LADDER program exists beyond END2 instruction. (Cause) Within level 2, a program is specified after the END2 instruction.

037

* LADDER program exists beyond SPE instruction. (Cause) In a subprogram, a program is specified after the SPE instruction.

038

* END1 instruction (Cause)

cannot be used excluding

the 1st level. was attempted within level 2 or 3.

The use of the END1 instruction

039

. END2 instruction (Cause)

cannot be used excluding

the 2nd level. was attempted within level 1 or 3.

The use of the END2 instruction

040

* END3 instruction (Cause)

cannot be used excluding

the 3rd level. was attempted within level 1 or 2.

The use of the END3 instruction

041

* END instruction (Cause)

cannot be used. was attempted within level 1.

The use of the END instruction

042

* Program number is different (Cause) The subprogram parameter

from program name. in the

file number does not agree with the number specified

of the SP instruction.

A3-15

APPENDIX

3 ERROR MESSAGES

043

- The size of LADDER program is too large. (Cause) (Action) The object size of the ladder program exceeds Reduce the size of the ladder program. the predetermined limit.

044

* The range controled (Cause)

by COM instruction

is beyond END1 instruction. before the COME instruction.

An END1 instruction

was encountered

045

* The range controled (Cause)

by COM instruction

is beyond END2 instruction. before the COME instruction.

An END2 instruction

was encountered

046

* The range controled (Cause)

by COM instruction

is beyond END3 instruction. before the COME instruction.

An END3 instruction

was encountered

047

- COM instruction (Cause) (Action)

was detected

in the COM mode. before the COME instruction. then restart control with the

A COM instruction Terminate

was encountered

control with the COME instruction,

COM instruction. 048

- Illegal COME instruction (Cause)

was detected. cannot be found before the COME instruction.

The COM instruction

049

* The destination (Cause)

of JMP instruction

is beyond END1 instruction. before the JMPE instruction.

An END1 instruction

was encountered

050

. The destination (Cause)

of JMP instruction

is beyond END2 instruction. before the JMPE instruction.

An END2 instruction

was encountered

051

- The destination (Cause)

of JMP instruction

is beyond

END3 instruction. before the JMPE instruction.

An END3 instruction

was encountered

052

* JMP instruction (Cause) (Action)

was detected

in the JMP mode. before the JMPE instruction. then restart control with the JMP

A JMP instruction Terminate instruction.

was encountered

control with the JMPE instruction,

053

* Illegal JMPE instruction (Cause)

was detected. cannot be found before the JMPE instruction.

The JMP instruction

054

- LADDER program exists beyond END3 instruction. (Cause) Within level 3, a program is specified after the END3 instruction.

055

* LADDER program is broken. (Cause) No instructions can be recoonized.

A3-16

APPENDIX

3 ERROR MESSAGES

056

* There is no coil in the functional (Cause) No output instruction output.

instruction is specified

which needs the coil. after a functional instruction which requires

057

* SP instruction (Cause)

can not be used in the main program. was attempted within the main program.

The use of the SP instruction

058

. SPE instruction (Cause)

can not be used in the main program. was attempted within the main program.

The use of the SPE instruction

059

* END1 instruction (Cause)

can not be used in the subprogram. was attempted within a subprogram.

The use of the END1 instruction

060

* END2 instruction (Cause)

can not be used in the subprogram. was attempted within a subprogram.

The use of the END2 instruction

061

- END3 instruction (Cause)

can not be used in the subprogram. was attempted within a subprogram.

The use of the END3 instruction

062

* Specified (Cause)

value for a parameter instruction.

of the functional

instruction

is outside the range. of a functional

An illegal value has been specified

for the parameter

063

* An illegal program number is specified (Cause)

for the CALL instruction. for the parameter of the CALL

A non-P address has been specified instruction.

064

An illegal program number is specified (Cause)

for the CALLU instruction. for the parameter of the CALLU

A non-P address has been specified instruction.

065

. An illegal program number is specified (Cause)

for the SP instruction. for the parameter of the SP instruction.

A non-P address has been specified

066

. There is an undefined (Cause)

instruction. instruction which is not

An attempt was made to use a basic or functional supported by the selected model.

067

* There is no SPE instruction (Cause) A subprogram

at the bottom of the subprogram.

does not end with the SPE instruction. in the subprogram. was encountered before an SPE instruction.

068

* SP instruction (Cause)

was detected

An SP instruction

069

* The range controled (Cause)

by COM instruction

is beyond SPE instruction. before a COME instruction.

An SPE instruction

was encountered

A3-17

APPENDIX

3 ERROR MESSAGES

070

* The destination (Cause)

of JMP instruction

is beyond SPE instruction. before a JMPE instruction.

An SPE instruction

was encountered

071

* CALL instruction (Cause)

cannot be used excluding

the 2nd level. was attempted within level 1 or 3.

The use of the CALL instruction

072

* CALLU instruction (Cause)

cannot be used excluding

the 2nd level. was attempted within level 1 or 3.

The use of the CALLU instruction

073

. The range controled (Cause)

by COM instruction

is beyond END instruction. before a COME instruction.

An END instruction

was encountered

074

- The destination (Cause)

of JMP instruction

is beyond END instruction. before a JMPE instruction.

An END instruction

was encountered

075

* The range controled (Cause)

by COM instruction

is beyond SP instruction. before a COME instruction.

An SP instruction

was encountered

076

* The destination (Cause)

of JMP instruction

is beyond SP instruction. before a JMPE instruction.

An SP instruction

was encountered

077

- The range controled (Cause)

by COM instruction

is beyond CALL instruction. before a COME instruction.

A CALL instruction

was encountered

078

. The range controled (Cause)

by COM instruction

is beyond CALLU instruction. before a COME instruction.

A CALLU instruction

was encountered

079

- The destination (Cause)

of JMPB instruction

is beyond COM instruction. the JMPB instruction of common from the outside to the

An attempt was made to execute

inside, or from the inside to the outside,

line control.

080

* JMPC instruction (Cause)

cannot be used in the main program. was attempted within the main program.

The use of the JMPC instruction

081

. An illegal label number is specified (Cause)

for the JMPB instruction. as the parameter of the JMPB

A non-L address has been specified instruction.

082

* An illegal label number is specified (Cause)

for the LBL instruction. as the parameter of the LBL instruction.

A non-L address has been specified

083

- An illegal label number is specified (Cause)

for the JMPC instruction. as the parameter of the JMPC

A non-L address has been specified instruction.

A3-18

APPENDIX

3 ERROR MESSAGES

6.6Path 2/warning
001 * Unreferenced (Cause) subprogram Pxxxx. is

A subprogram encountered.

which is not called by a CALL or CALLU instruction

6.7 Path 2/error


002 * Data too large. ( message + symbol + comment (Cause) The total size of the message, predetermined limit. )

symbol, and comment data exceeds the

003

* Data too large. ( ladder + step sequence (Cause) predetermined limit.

) data exceeds the

The total size of the ladder and step sequence

004

- Data too large. ( message + symbol + comment + ladder + step sequence (Cause) The total size of the message, data exceeds the predetermined symbol, comment, limit.

ladder, and step sequence

005

* The number of label exceeds (Cause)

the limit. ( xxxx net in LEVELx.#LA

The total number of labels used within LEVELl, the predetermined limit.

LEVEL2, or LEVEL3 exceeds

006

* The label of Lxxxx is used twice or more. ( xxxx net in LEVELx.#LA (Cause) An identical or LEVELB. L address is specified

) LEVEL2,

for two or more labels in LEVELl,

007

* Program exists beyond END inctruction. (Cause) A program including

( Pxxx.#LA

) by another program.

an END instruction

is followed

008

- There is no label of Lxxxx. ( xxxx net in LEVELx.#LA (Cause) The destination

label of JMPC cannot be found in LEVEL2.#LA.

009

* The label of Lxxxx exists in the COM mode. ( xxxx net in Pxxxx.#LA (Cause) The destination label of JMPC is found between

COM and COME.

010

- The label of Lxxxx to refer exists in another level. ( xxxx net in Pxxxx.#LA (Cause) The destination label of JMPC is found in LEVELl.#LA

or LEVEL3.#LA.

011

- There is no subprogram (Cause) The subprogram

Pxxxx. ( xxxx net in LEVELx.#LA

to be called by CALL or CALLU cannot be found or is empty.

A3-19

APPENDIX

3 ERROR MESSAGES

7. INPUT AND OUTPUT


Message INVALID RECEIVE DATA TIME OUT ERROR Description and action to be taken

Data other than IS0 codes was sent. During reception processing, a command was sent from the PC, but there was no response within a certain period of time. Confirm for the receiving side that the power is on, settings are correct, cables are properly connected, parameters (baud rate and stop bits) are correct, and that CONFIG.SYS is correct. No xxx.DAT files exist in the directory containing FAPT LADDER. Install the system again. Specified ROM format file does not exist on the disk [write and verification for the ROM writer, download and comparison for the PMC]. Specified file already exists [read operation for the ROM writer, upload for the PMC]. To overwrite, enter Y. To change the name of the file, enter N. There is an error in the ROM parity of the specified ROM format file [write operation for the ROM writer]. There is an error in the ROM parity of the specified ROM format file [download for the PMC]. To download in this state, enter Y. To cancel, enter N. There is an error in the ROM parity of the specified ROM format file [read operation for the ROM writer, upload for the PMC). No data was received during transmission [read operation for the ROM writer, upload for the PMC]. Press the break key to interrupt processing, then check cable connections and the power supply, etc. of the sending side.

xxxx.DAT file format error. 4it any key VOT EXIST APPOINT =lLE ROM FORM

ALREADY EXIST FILE! 3JPERSCRlPTlON REAL FILE? (Y/N)

3OW PARITY ERROR OF APPOINT -ILE

3OM PARITY WARNING OF 4PPOINT FILE. CONTINUE TO TRANSFER? (Y/N)

3OM PARITY WARNING APPOINT FILE

OF

NAITING FOR RECEIVE. WHEN TO STOP. PUSH BREAK KEY

NITIALIZE

EXECUTE

Work file is being created during upload from PMC (PMC-N). Checking ROM data parity [write operation for the ROM writer, download for the PMCJ. Wait while processing is performed. Inserted cassette or module is incorrect present machine type (PMC-N, 431. Cannot open specified Cannot close specified Cannot write to specified ROM format file. ROM format file. ROM format file. for the

4OM ID UNMATCH

ERROR

:ILE OPEN ERROR :ILE CLOSE ERROR ILE WRITE ERROR

A3-20

APPENDIX

3 ERROR MESSAGES

Message

Description I-

and action to be taken ROM format file.

IFILE READ

ERROR

Cannot read from specified

I-

ROM FILE > ROM ERROR

During writing, the specified ROM format file could not be fully written to ROM (cassette or module). ROM file format is incorrect. There is not enough space on the disk for the work file area (512K bytes) [PMC-N]. EROM is installed with incorrect EROM is faulty. Cannot write to EROM because it has not yet been erased. EROM has not yet been erased. orientation.

IROM

FILE FORMAT

ERROR ERROR

I-

WORK FILE INITIALIZE

ROM SET ERROR EROM OUT LEVEL ERROR

IWIIT.5
DATA SEND ERROR PARITY ERROR RUNNING WRITER! ERROR ROW TYPE ERROR PORT ERROR (OVER RUN) PORT ERROR (PARITY)

- The number of the sent data items does not match that of the received data items. A parity error occurred during data transfer.

The ROM writer is being used. Incorrect type of ROM

Overrun (determined by the status check information from I/O ports) Parity error (determined by the status check information from I/O ports) Framing error (determined by the status check information from I/O ports) Break interrupt error (determined by the status check information from I/O ports) Time-out error (determined information from I/O ports) by the status check

PORT ERROR (FRAMING)

PORT ERROR (BREAK INTERRUPT)

Data transfer error (determined information from l/O ports)

by the status check

TIMER SET/CANCEL

ERROR

The system timer malfunctions. Update the text file (FL10 AT.DAT) information. For details, see the comments of the file.

A3-21

APPENDIX 3 ERROR MESSAGES

8.

MNEMONIC

EDITING
(System Parameters >
Description System parameter character(s). and action to be taken is followed by invalid

8.1 Mnemonic Editing


Message
Invalid qualifier.

Unknown

data number.

Data number was specified the system parameters. System parameter System parameter data. contains contains

that does not exist in

Illegal value. Out of value.

invalid numerical out-of-bound

data.

numerical

Expected

a multiple of 5.

System parameter required to be a multiple of 5 is not a multiple of 5. System parameter required to be a multiple of 2 is not a multiple of 2. System parameter contains invalid character(s).

Expected

a multiple of 2.

Illegal character(s). Data not found. Too many characters in 1 line.

There is no system parameter data.


System parameter contains a line of data that exceeds the maximum allowed number of characters.

Illegal data number. Too long strings.

System parameter contains invalid data number(s).


System parameter contains character exceeds the maximum length. System parameter System parameter contains data that

Illegal address Expected parameter(s) Illegal OP. PANEL (PARAMETER) Proceed to discompile using NO.

an invalid address.

is missing or incomplete.

As OP.PANEL (parameter) of the system parameters is invalid, it is assumed to be NO and operation continues.

A3-22

APPENDIX

3 ERROR MESSAGES

8.2 Mnemonic Editing

<Title Data B
Description Title data is followed Specified and action to be taken by invalid character(s). number does not exist. the maximum length.

Message Invalid qualifier. Unknown data number.

data identifier

Too long strings. Include KANA or KANJI character(s). Illegal character(s) Data not found. Too many characters in 1 line.

Length of title data exceeded

- Title data contains Title data contains

m-type characters. invalid character data.

There is no title data. Title data contains a line of data that exceeds the maximum allowed number of characters. Data identifier number specified is incorrect.

Illegal title number.

8.3 Mnemonic Editing

(Symbol

and Comment Data >


Description Comment and action to be taken

Message SYMBOL data not found.

data exists, but there is no symbol data. data is followed by invalid

Invalid qualifier.

Symbol and comment character(s). Invalid character comment data.

Illegal character(s).

data was specified

in symbol and

Illegal address.

Invalid address was specified comment data. Symbol and comment address data. Mnemonic data.

in symbol and

Redefinition

of address data.

data contain identical

Redefinition

of symbol data.

symbol data contains

identical

symbol

Include KANA or KANJI character(s) comment data.

in

Comment data which contains m-type characters was converted without the m-type character conversion option (J option). There is no symbol or comment data.

Data not found. Too long characters in 1 line.

Symbol or comment data contains a line of data that exceeds the maximum allowed number of characters. Only symbol data was converted Only symbol or comment the address. Mnemonic bounds. data contains for the address. for

Comment data not found. Symbol or comment data not found.

data was converted

Out of address limits.

an address that is out of

A3-23

APPENDIX 3 ERROR MESSAGES

8.4 Mnemonic Editing


Message Expected address.

(LADDER

Data >
Description Basic command and action to be taken

has no address. by invalid character(s).

invalid qualifier. Expected parameter(s).

LADDER data is followed Function Function Function instruction instruction instruction

has no parameters. is missing parameters. has too many parameters.

Not enough parameter(s). Too many parameters. Illegal address. Out of address limits. Undefined instruction. name.

Unspecifiable Out-of-bound Data contains Unspecifiable

address was specified. address was specified. an undefined function command. was specified.

Invalid functions

instruction

Cannot specify byte address on basic instruction. Cannot specify the input address with coil. Cannot specify the odd address.

Byte address was specified

in a basic command.

Address coil.

which cannot be output was specified

in a

Odd address was specified cannot be odd.

for an address that

Illegal value of parameter.

Numeric parameter of a function contains an incorrect value.

instruction

Dut of parameter

value.

Numeric parameter of a function instruction contains a value that exceeds the maximum. Bit address was specified in the byte address parameter of a function instruction. Address which cannot be output was specified the output address parameter of a function instruction. for

Cannot specify bit address of oarameter. Cannot specify the input address.

Cannot specify the address prohibited Jsing as parameter.

Address which cannot be specified as a parameter was specified as a function instruction address parameter. Invalid address was specified in a function instruction address parameter. Invalid value was specified instruction data table. in the function

llegal address of parameter.

llegal value of parameter.

3ut of value in data table.

Out-of-bound value was specified instruction data table. LADDER data contains output.

in the function

_ogical product remains in register(s).

a register which is not

_ogical operated with unused ,egister(s).

Operation was performed with a register which was not input in LADDER data.

A3-24

APPENDIX

3 ERROR MESSAGES

Message Not enough control condition(s). -

Description Function instruction insufficient. Too many function

and action to be taken control conditions are

Too many control conditions. Expected control condition(s).

instruction

control conditions. control conditions.

There are no function

instruction

Data not found. Unexpected address.

There is no LADDER data. in a section that does not

- Address was specified require an address. -

Unexpected

parameter(s).

Parameter was specified for a function that does not require parameters.

instruction

Unexpected

control condition(s).

Basic command was specified for a function instruction that does not require control conditions. Coil was specified for a function does not require coils. instruction that

Unexpected

coil(s).

Too many characters

in 1 line.

Mnemonic data contains a line of characters exceeds that maximum allowed number of characters. Function instruction bound address. Function instruction address. Function instruction bound address. parameter contains

that

3ut of address limits of parameter.

an out-of-

llegal address in data table.

data table contains

an invalid

3ut of address limits in data table.

data table contains

an out-of-

A3-25

APPENDIX

3 ERROR MESSAGES

8.5 Mnemonic

Editing

<Message

Data>

Message Too long strings. -

Description

and action to be taken the maximum

Length of message data exceeds allowed length. Invalid address was specified setting address. Message data contains

Illegal address.

for the message

Include KANA or KANJI character(s). Invalid qualifier. Data not found. Too many characters in 1 line.

m-type characters. by invalid character(s).

Message data is followed

There is no message data. Message data contains a line of characters exceeds the maximum allowed number of characters. Message address. Message Mnemonic mnemonic setting address contains that

Out of address limits of address.

an out-of-bound

Illegal character(s). Not found data at $ address.

data contains

invalid character

data. Only

message data was not specified. address data was specified. type and data machine

Cannot convert PMC series.

in case of specified

Specified machine not agree.

type do

A3-26

APPENDIX

3 ERROR MESSAGES

8.6 Mnemonic Editing

<I/O Module Data>


Description and action to be taken by invalid character(s).

Message Invalid qualifier. Illegal address.

I/O module data is followed Invalid address specified address. Out-of-bound address.

for l/O module data

Out of address limits.

address specified

for I/O module data

Not found group data. Illegal value in group data.

l/O module data has no group data. Group data of I/O module data contains value. Group data of I/O module data contains bound value. l/O module data has no base data. Base data of I/O module data contains value. Base data of l/O module data contains bound value. I/O module data has no slot data. Slot data of l/O module data contains value. Slot data of I/O module data contains bound value. I/O module data has no module name. I/O module data has an invalid module name. Output module is specified the l/O module data. Input module is specified the I/O module data. at the input address of an invalid an invalid an invalid

Out of value in group data.

an out-of-

Not found base data. 811egal value in base data.

Dut of value in base data.

an out-of-

Vat found slot data. llegal value in slot data.

3ut of value in slot data.

an out-of-

\lot found module name. nvalid module name. Cannot specify output module at input Iddress. Cannot specify input module at output address. 2annot specify same group, base and ;lot. rot.9 value of base and slot is over.

at the output address of

Group, base, and slot data of I/O module data have the same data. Sum of base and slot data of I/O module data exceeds the maximum allowed value. There is no I/O module data. I/O module data contains a line of characters exceeds the maximum allowed number of characters. Specified machine type and conversion machine type do not agree. data that

Data not found. Too many characters in 1 line.

2annot convert in case of specified MC series.

A3-27

APPENDIX

3 ERROR MESSAGES

9. STEP SEQUENCE
Error message Illegal source code Symbol file read error Comment file read error

EDITING ERRORS
Description The input file data is illegal. The symbol data cannot be read. The comment data cannot be read.

Title file read error Memory allocation Insufficient error

The title data cannot be read. Sufficient memory space cannot be allocated. free space on the specified drive.

disk space

There is insufficient

Buffer size over Number of nest branch too big Number of branch too big Size of table buffer too big Unconnected Selected step sequence diagram

The program is too large. The program contains The program contains too many branches. too many branches.

The program is too large. A line is not connected. The program contains The program contains A syntax error is found. A step line contains A transition an illegal code. an illegal code. too many branches. too many branches.

branch error

Parallel branch error Syntax error Step line syntax error Transition line syntax error

line contains

Cannot insert Cannot make diagram

The program is too large. The wrong soft key was pressed to change an element. The point at which a branch must be closed is left as a horizontal line. The jump destination The specified cannot be found.

Horizontal

fine illegal

Jump forward check error File open error File close error Check incomplete Chart sequence error error

file cannot be found.

The file cannot be closed. The source program contains The sequence The beginning is incorrect. of the sequence is incorrect. an illegal code.

Chart start code error Chart end code error Jump close error -horizontal line duplicate 3ranch unconnected 3ranch sequence error

The end of the sequence An instruction The sequence

is incorrect. after a label jump.

is encountered is incorrect.

error

A branch is not closed. A branch is invalid.

error

A3-28

APPENDIX

3 ERROR MESSAGES

Error message Cannot copy diagrams Cannot move diagrams Illegal specified position

Description The program is too large. The program is too large. The corresponding The specified coordinates cannot be found.

Strings not Found Step Number Duplicate Error

character

string cannot be found.

The specified subprogram. The specified The temporary

step number is being used by another

Label Number Duplicate Cannot delete temporary Same sub-program

Error file

label is used in two or more positions. file cannot be deleted. extension,

name exists

A file having the same name, but a different exists. The specified address data exceeds predetermined range. No subprogram number is specified. the

Input invarid

Expected

address of nest branch too big

Sub-program

An attempt was made to nest a program to a level of eight or more, by using the [ZOOM] key.

A3-29

APPENDIX

4 MODULAR PROGRAMMING (PMC-RA3/RB3/RC3 ONLY)

APPENDIX 4 MODULAR PROGRAMMING (PMC=RA3/RB3/RC3 ONLY)


The PMCRA3/RB3RC3 has special sub-program functions that allow modular programming.

When the sub-program unbroken sequence

function

is used, a Ladder program,

which

must have been coded as an

before, can be coded in units of sub-programs. enables FAPT LADDER to manage a program by dividing it into two or

The sub-program more modules

function

(modular programming.) by the ladder diagram to a program editing function to produce to connect a

The modular

programming

is accomplished

module from a program modules.

and connect

a module

and the compile

function

In the later part of this book, the terms module 0 Module : Logical unit of a program. program.

and source A module

program

mean the following: correspond to a sub-

does not always

A single module can be the first or second half of the main program unit of a program stored on a floppy disk or hard disk

or a group of sub-programs.
l

Source program

: Physical

1.

LADDER DIAGRAM
a source program

EDITING FUNCTION

(1) Dividing
l

The function

copies or moves a part of a source

program

and creates

another

program,

to

which a name is specified. 0 The function produces a module from a program.

Source program

Module

A4-1

APPENDIX 4 MODULAR PROGRAMMING (PMC-RA3/RB3/RC3 ONLY)

(2) Combining
l

source programs combines all or part of a source program to another source program that is

The function being edited.

The function

combines

a module (program) to another program. Module Source program Source program

Source program

. . .. .. *..* _.... *

......

...

Edit . . ...*. . ... <.....

For the details of (1) and (2), see (8) Copying 5.1.2, Ladder Diagram Editing.

Sections

of a Sequence

Program

in Section

2.

COMPILE FUNCTION
modules compiles a batch of separately edited programs and unites the programs. in a control statement (text file having the

(1) Combining
l

The function files

0 The

to be combined #LS).

can be specified

extension

0 The control statement 0 The function

is coded by the [LIST] command

on the compile or print screen.

can handle modules

(files) made up of any units (nets or sub-programs). Control statement (MAINFILE.#LS) File selection MAINFILE SUBFILEI SUBFILE . SUBFlLEn

MAINFILE.#LA SUBFILEl.#LA SUBFILE2.#LA . . SUBFILEn.#LA

1Main program
I
1

1
I
I

ROM data Main program Sub-program Sub-program . . Sub-program n 1 1 2 I 1 1

1Sub-program I Sub-program
I

1 1 2 , I
I

For details, see Section 5.3, Compilation.

A4-2

APPENDIX

4 MODULAR PROGRAMMING (PMC-RA3/RB3/RC3 ONLY)

(2)

Control statement

(.#LS file) text file in which the source programs See the following example. to be combined are coded in

The .#LS file is a MS-DOS

the order in which they are combined.

Sample control statement

(File name = MAIN.#LS)

Parameters,

symbols,

comments,

the title, and other data, except data for the ladder, from the

first program are used for the second and later programs.

(3) Advantages 0 Programs can be edited quickly and easily because small source programs 0 A source changing program its name. in the control statement can be used for another are handled. purpose only by

Program

Program 2

ESub-program ..................

A4-3

APPENDIX

5 BOOT SYSTEM OPERATING

PROCEDURE

(FOR THE FSZO)

APPENDIX 5 BOOT SYSTEM OPERATING (FOR THE FS20)


This appendix describes how to use the BOOT SYSTEM

PROCEDURE

for the FS20.

The operating

procedure refer to

varies from one CNC model to another. the respective manuals.

For other models such as the FSlSB

(PMC-NA),

AS-1

APPENDIX

5 BOOT SYSTEM OPERATING

PROCEDURE

(FOR THE FSZO)

Hold down the [NEXT] key and a soft key at its immediate left simultaneously, and switch on the NC. The IPL screen will appear (00).

(NEXT]

The (0

entry to 0).

procedure

is described

below

@ @

Hold dowrf both simultaneously. Switch on the power.

SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU 'liB:i';~~f~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~, 2. SYSTEM'DATA 3. SYSTEM DATA CHECK DELETE @ Place the cursor on 1. SYSTEM DATA LOADING using [UP] or [DOWN], then press [SELECT].

*** MESSAGE l ** SELECT MODE AND HIT [SELECT] [ YES I[

[SELECT] ~0 11 up

KEY.

1 [ DOWN ] DATA LOADING

'SYSTEM

Place the cursor on the desired filename using [UP] or [DOWN], then press [SELECT].

FILE DIRECTORY ~~~~~~~~ TEST. DAT END


l ** AND HIT

*** MESSAGE SELECT FILE

[SELECT] ~0 1[ up

KEY.

=-I
0 Press [YES] or [NO].

[SELECT] [ YES

1[

1 [ DOWN

t
*** MESSAGE *** LOADING OK ? HIT

I
Cy

[YES] OR

[NO] KEY. UP ][ DOWN ] I /

1
I
j 1

(SELECT][ YES
I *** MESSAGE *** HIT [SELECT] KEY. ILLEGAL FORMAT FILE [SELECT] I YES I[ NO

][

NO
I

][

]I

UP

I[

DOWN

A file in a format that cannot be handled by the BOOT SYSTEM was selected. End of entry

I
:\ LOADING COMPLETE. I[ HIT NO [SELECT] I[ up KEY. I[ DOWN

[SELECT] [ YES

AS-2

APPENDIX 6 MEMORY CARD COMPATIBILITY (FOR THE PMC-RAl/RA3, NB, AND QC)

APPENDIX 6 MEMORY CARD COMPATIBILITY (FOR THE PMGRAlIRA3, NB, AND QC)
If a CNC or off-line programmer operating on an upgraded edition is used to output a sequence

program to a memory card, the sequence programmer operating

program may not be able to be input to a CNC or off-line

on an earlier edition (see below). A08B-XXXX-J502, A08B-XXXX-J501, editions editions 06.3 and later 06.2 and later

Series 4080, edition 06

Series 4080, edition 04 Series 4047, edition 01 Series 4054, edition 01 CNC

AO8B-XXXX-J502,

editions

06.1 and later

Off-line programmer

: Operating

on an upgraded edition f+___ -+ ___+ : Unconditionally possible

: Operating

on an earlier edition

: Possible under some condition

Cases 0, below.

0,

0,

and 0,

where

input/output

is possible

under

some condition,

are explained

A6-1

APPENDIX 6 MEMORY CARD COMPATIBILITY (FOR THE PMGRAVRA3, NB, AND QC)

Cases 0 output Input : :

and @ No special operation is required. to enter a sequence program.

Use the BOOT SYSTEM

Case 0 Output : To output a sequence program, specify the output format as 1 (S-format) on the

PMC l/O SETUP screen shown below. value (put in effect by pressing

Note that for the output format, the default is 0 (binary).

soft key [INIT])

PMC I/O PROGRAM CHANNEL DEVICE ~~~~4~~~1 = 1 = M-CARD _ "RITE

MONIT STOP

DATA KIND = LADDER FILE NO. = ( #NAME ) [ EXEC l[CANCEL][WRITE ][ READ ](COMPARJ I [SETUP ]

[DELETE][ LIST ][FORMAT][

PMC SETUP M-CARD

MONIT STOP

:.,.. :,.......i OUTPUT FORhfAT(pROGRAM) +$$:_ii; (O:BINARY,l:S-FORMAT)

[INPUT ] [
Input : To enter a sequence program,

II
select

I[
F6 (input/output),

1 [ INIT 1
then F3 (Handy File &

memory card) from the main menu screen.

Case @ output : Output a sequence program to a memory card by selecting F6 (input/output), then

F4 (FLOPPY CASSETTE Input : Select F6 (input/output),

ADAPTER

& Handy File) from the main menu. card) from the main menu; a sequence

then F5 (memory

program can be read as usual.

A6-2

APPENDIX

7 CAUTIONS

FOR USING THE 0:s

APPENDIX 7 CAUTIONS
(1) MS-DOS version 05.0

FOR USING THE O/S

DOSKEY.COM When DOSKEY.COM is used in insertion mode, pay attention to the following:

Insert mode specification

DOSKEY.COM/INSERT

Be

careful

especially

when

the

AUTOEXEC.BAT

contains

a command

line

of

DOSKEY.COM.

When

DOSKEY.COM

is used in insert

mode on the PC-9801,

the symptom

described data type

below occurs.
l

When an attempt on the conversion

is made to move the cursor to 3) Select conversion to mnemonic screen, the cursor disappears,

but the desired

data type is selected normally. This symptom does not occur on the IBM/PC or compatible.

[Measure] Use DOSKEY.COM in replace mode.

(2) Windows

3.1

SMARTDRV.EXE When SMARTDRV.EXE is used with write caching enabled, pay attention to the following:

Enable write caching

SMARTDRV.EXE

Be

careful

especially

when

the

AUTOEXEC.BAT

contains

a command

line

of

SMARTDRV.EXE.

When SMARTDRV.EXE
l

is used with write caching enabled,

the following

symptom

occurs.

The following entry.

alarm occurs during a read from the PMC or FA/PMC writer, disabling

Alarm message

Received OVERRUN

data invalid

(for the PC-9801) (for the IBM/PC and compatible)

[Measure] When SMARTDRV.EXE is used, disable write caching for the following disk drives:

a. b.

Drive where the FAPT LADDER system exists Drive where ROM format files are created

A7-1

APPENDIX

8 TOOL FOR CHANGING

MESSAGE

DATA (CHGMES)

APPENDIX 8 TOOL FOR CHANGING


This function is a tool(CHGMES) for easy changing

MESSAGE DATA (CHGMES)


the message data incorporating sequence

program of FANUC PMCs . This tool extracts only message data from Handy file format file. The message data in CNC(PMC) can be replaced with this extracted data, if both message data

size are the same. This tool is usefull when it is necessary example: Supporting multi-lingual to use some message data files in one ladder program.(For

message.)

c Method of Message size Check > (1) Memory map information is output when the source program is compiled. changing ladder and the ladder for

Please check each symbol top address of the original changing to be the same value. the message data execute

(2) This tool for changing execute

with the compare

file,

then this tool

the same check of the message data size.

c Applied PMCs > FANUC PMC-MODEL RAlIRA2!RA3iRB/RB2/RB3/RBWRC/RC3/RC4/NB

1.

PROCEDURE

OF THE MESSAGE

DATA CHANGING

(1) Load the basic message ladder file of handy file format to the NC by using the memory card or floppy disk on the PMC input!output (2) Input the CHGMES file format). data on the NC is changed ([I!01 screen). by loading the output file of this tool on the PMC command operation with ([I/O] screen). data for changing and dummy ladder

the message

file(handy

(3) The message input/output

operation

2.

OPERATING

ENVIRONMENT
operating environment for this tool.

It is necessary (1) Memory

to use following

235Kbytes LADDER. (2) Temporary

or more main memory

is required

when activating

this function

without

FAPT

files generates following temporary files for work area on the drive/directory which

This function

is set by environmental This function generate

variable TMP temporary files

of PC-DOS. on the route directory of current drive when

environmental It is necessary $TMPD.T-,

variable TMP

is not set. disk space for these temporary files.

to free max.65KBytes $TMPW.T

(= 00-99) automatically.)

(These temporary

files are deleted by this function

A8-1

APPENDIX

8 TOOL FOR CHANGING

MESSAGE

DATA (CHGMES)

(3) Hard disk It is necessary


l l

to use following

disk space. 68KBytes

For installation To generate temporary (In case of environmental files variable TMP

65KBytes

of PC-DOS set on hard disk) TOTAL 133KBytes

3.

INSTALLATION
copy EXE-FILE (_CHGMES.EXE) to any directory from FAPT LADDER system floppy

Please

disk(Vol.3). Key in I_ CHGMES * CHGMES.EXE * RB3DUMMY.SFM Example command. files(.SFM) on the installed directory, * ASC2lMG.EXE * RB3BASIC.SFM are used to confirm then following files are generated. : : Execute files (.EXE) example files(.SFM) by activating example * IMG2ASC.EXE * RB3MES.SFM the installation

of this function

4.

ACTIVATION
command at the DOS prompt activated in the utility.(No.9 of FAPT LADDER main

Key in following menu). Or,Please

change the directory

in which this tool is installed. when the PATHis set.)

(It is not necessary Then key in following

to change the directory command.

CHGMES

[INPUT FILE]

[OUTPUT

FILE]

[PMC TYPE]

( [COMPARE

FILE] )

<return> data

INPUT FILE

: : A handy file format file that consists

of a dummy ladder and message ladder file.

to replace the message data in the basic message Create this file by compiling

the source file and converting

to a handy file

format file using FAPT LADDER. OUTPUT FILE : : A handy file format message file created by this tool. This file contains only message data. data in the CNC memory can be

By loading this file to the CNC, message substituted. PMC TYPE : : PMC TYPE (RAl or RA2 or RA3...etc.)

Please key in PMC TYPE that is defined

<Applied

PMCs>

item.

Error will occur at key in other than applied PMCs. COMPARE (Optional) FILE : : Basic message ladder file (Handy file format) outline. size of the INPUT FILE Then, replaced and you the can

Please refer to the Fig.Operation This tool compares FILE that only message to determine the

COMPARE guarantee crashing

if there will

is a match.

message

be correctry

without

other data when you load the OUTPUT

FILE to CNC.

A8-2

APPENDIX

8 TOOL FOR CHANGING

MESSAGE

DATA (CHGMES)

<Outline

of Operation 7 Message for changing + Dummy ladder Generation, Editing +

Basic message ladder +

t I COMPILATION

Check the SYMBOL top address by memory map display.

+,

+,

J INPUT/OUTPUT (F4:FLOPPY CASSETTE

t Handy File)

Handy file format ROM file FLOPPY MEMORY CARD

Handy file format

(Note)

%l %2

%2 FLOPPY

%3 MEMORY CARD

(Note)

r/

r]ORu

Only message data for changing Loading at [I/O]screen operation of PMC.

of ROM file

(Note)

It is possible FSl5-B

to load by memory

card

only for FS16 -B, FS18-B,

FS-20,

FS21-B, and

(PMC-NB). manual about detailed operation of loading by the memory

Please refer to the following

card or handy file. It is not possible to load on boot screen. FANUC PMC MODEL PAl/PA3/RAl/RA2/RA3/RB/RB2/RBURC/RC3/RCWNB PROGRAMMING MANUAL (LADDER LANGUAGE) (B-61863EI06)

A8-3

APPENDIX

8 TOOL FOR CHANGING

MESSAGE

DATA (CHGMES)

5.

USING EXAMPLE
of this function by using the following example. this function.

Check the installation

There are some sample files in FAPT LADDER system floppy disk for checking

RB3DUMMY.SFM

: :

Message data and dummy ladder file (Handy file format) (Message data (50KB) + Ladder (END1 + END2)) ladder file (Handy file format) data) for above OUTPUT

RB3BASIC.SFM

: :

Basic message (Message

data (50KB) + Ladder data + Symbol&Comment the result (Message output data(50KB)) file, when to check

RB3MESSFM

: :

Data for checking (This

file is a normal

this tool execute by comparing

sample data.

It is possible

result

FILE and this file.) Execute body.) as the following (In this case the system is installed in main

(1) Please
A: y
7

key in the following CHGMES

command. USERTEST.SFM FILE.ln RB3 RB3BASIC.SFM < return 7 is used.

RB3DUMMY.SFM

You can specify any name for OUTPUT

this example,USERTEST.SFM

(2)

Following

file is generated

on current drive. data (50KB))

USERTESTSFM

(Message

COMMAND). (3) Check the result by using FC/A(PC-DOS A: Y 7 FC/A USERTEST.SFM RB3MES.SFM If NO DIFFERENCES ENCOUNTERED is displayed, the result is correct.

6.

ERROR MESSAGES
Message Meaning (pmc type) and countermeasure applied

chgmes : PMC type unmatch

PMC type does not match between PMCs.

chgmes : PMC type unmatch

(input file)

PMC type of input file and key in PMC type do not match.

chgmes : PMC type unmatch

(compare

file)

PMC type of compare type do not match.

file and key in PMC

chgmes : Message

sizes of (input file) and

Message

size of input file and compare

file do size by

(compare file) are mismatched

not agree. Please adjust the message

adding some dummy message to the input file. Please confirm compile function chgmes : Cannot start ASC2lMG ASC2lMG.EXE directory the MAP display on the

of FAPT LADDER. does not exist in the same

of CHGMES.EXE.

A8-4

APPENDIX

8 TOOL FOR CHANGING

MESSAGE

DATA (CHGMES)

Message chgmes : Cannot start IMG2ASC

Meaning and countermeasure IMG2ASC.EXE directory does not exist in the same

of CHGMESEXE. to make temporary file.

chgmes : Cannot make temporary $tmpd.t chgmes : Cannot make temporary $tmwd.t

file

It is impossible

* Disk is insufficient. file - It is impossible to set the file name, because exist.

$tmp*.tOO -$tmp*.t99 Temporary

chgmes : Cannot close file $tmpd (w).t*

file can not be closed.

Please check the disk space. ssc2img : Cannot allocate memory (bytes)

Memory is insufficient. Please free up 235KB


or more memory, and re-activate.

ssc2img : Conversion zonflicted asc2img : Unknown

area in input is

Ladder header of the input file is crushed. Please re-make the input file, and re-activate.

file type

Illegal format of the input file. the format, and re-activate.

Please change

asc2img : (input file) : Record No. has

There is an invalid data of input file. Please correct as error message, reactivate. and

3sc2img : Cannot open file Isc2img : Cannot close file

There is no input file. It is impossible to close the file.

Please check the disk space. Isc2img : Cannot write It is impossible to write the temporary file.

Please check the disk space. mg2asc : Cannot allocate memory (bytes) Memory is insufficient. Please free up 235KB

or more memory, and re-activate. mg2asc : Cannot write It is impossible to write the output file.

Please check the disk space.

A8-5

APPENDIX

9 SOFTWARE

VERSION TABLE

APPENDIX 9 SOFTWARE VERSION TABLE


To use the software described in this manual, each CNC unit requires a different system disk.

As described disk.

in Section products

2.1 in Part I, each system of specific versions

must prepare an area of 3 Mbytes

in its hard

If software

listed below are used, however,

they can be stored

in the same directory When the software

and can be operated. products of specific versions are stored in one directory, the required capacity just by

of hard disk is a little more than 3 Mbytes. moving the cursor on the model selection

in addition,

any PMC model can be selected

screen.

1) System floppy disks of different

versions

that can be used together

Software (-Jxxx) PMC-FIB/FE (-J502) PMC-N (-J501) PMC-L/M/P (-J500) Ol.l01.12 Ol.l02.3 02.002.3

Combinations

of different

versions

that can

be entered into an identical Ol.O02.0 03.003.1 03.0 03.003.6 04.004.8 04.004.8 04.006.0 -

directory 06.2 06.3 06.4 07.008.4

06.1

05.0

06.1

06.2

06.3

05.0

06.1

06.2

06.3

A9-1

APPENDIX

9 SOFTWARE

VERSION TABLE

2)

System floppy disks and module floppy disks for the FS16/18/15B,Powe that can be used together

Mate-D, F-D Mate Mini

software (-Jxxx) MC-RB/RC (-J502) ?Al/RA2 MODULE 01.0 02.0 01.0 02.0

Combinations

of versions

03.0-03.6

04.004.2

05.006.0 04.0

06.1

06.207.1

08.008.1 05.0

08.308.4 05.1

02.1

03.003.4

04.1

04.204.4

PMCRAl/RA2/RA3 PA1 /PA3) (-J603) IB/RC MODULE PMCRB/RB2/RB3 164/RC/RC3/RC4) (-J604) 1C MODULE (-J605) JB MODULE (-J606) 01.0 02.0 03.0 03.103.2

04.004.4

04.5 04.6

04.7

04.805.0

06.0

06.1

(Note) 01.0 01.1 01.2 02.0 02.1

01.0

Ol.l01.2

02.0

02.1

Note)

When using installation.

PMCRB4iRC4,

install the RBIRC MODULE

floppy disk(-J604)

at last of all

3)

System floppy disks and module floppy disks for the FSO,Power Mate-ABC

Software PMC-L/M/P L MODULE M MODULE M (MMC) MODULE

I -J*
500 600 601 602

I
01 .l -04.8 01.1-02.0 01.1-03.0 01 .l -02.0

Combinations 05.0 03.0 04.0 03.0

of versions 06.1 04.0 05.0 04.0 06.2 -06.3 05.0-06.0 06.0 -07.0 05.0-06.0

Note)

The column

entitled

-JXXX

indicates

the last three characters

of software

code A08B-

9200/9201 -JXXX

A9-2

APPENDIX

9 SOFTWARE

VERSION TABLE

Software products

products

listed in the same column in the same directory

can be stored in the same directory. have the different first. version

When software however, a

to be stored

numbers,

software product with a smaller number must be installed

The following

are examples:

1)

Software J502/03.0

products

J502iO3.0 and JSOliO4.3 can be stored in the same directory.

However,

must be installed first.


products J502!03.0 and J501/03.0 cannot be stored in the same directory.

2)

Software

A9-3

APPENDIX

IO MANAGING

A SOURCE PROGRAM

APPENDIX IO MANAGING A SOURCE PROGRAM 1. TYPE OF SOURCE PROGRAM


There are two types of the source program of the following. The file name and the control method are different though both are preserved Especially, the function of ZOOM and G-SRCH can not be used at FORMAT-A as some files. but FORMAT-B.

1)

FORMAT-A The source program is managed using the following or more source programs. - xxxxxxxx.#CN : - xxxxxxxx.#PA - xxxxxxxx.#TA - xxxxxxxx.#sY - xxxxxxxx.#c1 - xxxxxxxx.#c2 - xxxxxxxx.#ME - xxxxxxxx.#l0 - xxxxxxxx.#LA : : : : : : : : names. A single directory can contain two

File managing

user programs

File storing system parameters File storing the title data File storing symbols File storing comments File storing comments File storing messages File storing the I/O module data File storing ladder (reserve)

(xxxxxxxx

is the specified

source program name.)

2)

FORMAT-B A directory managed programs. is created with the specified under the following names. source program name. A single directory In the directory, contain the program is

cannot

two or more source

- CONTROL - SYSPARAM - TITLE - SYMBOL - COMMENT1 - COMMENT2 - MESSAGE - IOMODULE - LEVEL1 .#LA - LEVEL2.#LA - LEVEL3.#LA - PYYYYY.#LA - PYYYYY.#SS

: : : : : : : : : : : : :

File managing

the source program

File storing system parameters File storing the title data File storing symbols File storing comments File storing comments File storing messages File storing the l/O module data File storing ladder of the first level File storing ladder of the second level File storing ladder of the third level File storing ladder subprograms File storing step sequence subprograms (reserve)

(yyyyy is a subprogram

number.)

A10-1

APPENDIX

10 MANAGING

A SOURCE PROGRAM

3.

SAMPLE MANAGEMENT
functions

OF FORMAT-C
(STEP SEQRCWRC4 (STEP SEQ.

The following

have been added to PMCRB4RB4 by below files.

The FORMAT-C

source program is organized

<A case of specifying

C: y DATA y PRG - C as source program >

C:Y
data Y PRG t t CY Source program managing file System parameter data file Title data file Symbol & Comment data file Message data file I/O Module data file First level ladder data file Second level ladder data file Third level ladder data file Sub-program ladder data file Sub-program step sequence data file Net comment data file Setting of option Memory card syste file

-CONTROL - SYSPARAM * TITLE - XSYMBOL.xxx - MESSAGE - IOMODULE * LEVEL1 #LA * LEVEL2.#LA * LEVELWLA * Pyyy.#LA - Pzzz.#SS . NETCMT.xxx * OPTION - * MCARD

(Note 1)

(Note (Note (Note (Note

2) 3) 3) 1)

(Notel) (Note2) (Note3)


The format

xxx is number of multi file managing. Only for use LEVEL3 ladder at PMCRC4IRC4(STEP). yyy, zzz is number of sub-program.

of newly

created

source

program

is specified

by %%%FLSET.CNF

data file.

The

initial settings for RB4!RB4(STEP)/RC4/RC4(STEP)

are FORMAT-C.

Data file name : %%%FLSET.CNF 7; kB4 3; RB4 STEP :3; RC4=3; RC4_STEP = 3; Source program type

Parameters

value

1 = FORMAT-A 3 = FORMAT-C (initial setting)

A10-3

APPENDIX

10 MANAGING

A SOURCE PROGRAM

4.

SOURCE PROGRAM TYPE AND PMC MODEL

The source program type is decided by setting the PMC model. 1) FORMAT-A.
* * -

PMCRC/RC3RBiRB2/RB3.:RAl/RA2/RA3 PMC-NBQC PMCPAl!PA3 PMC-NN (10 LINK)/QA PMC-LMIM (MMC) PMC-RB4/RC4(A08B-9200/9201 -Jr502 ver.8.0 or earlier)

2)

FORMAT-B
-

PMCRB4 (STEP SEQ)/RC4 (STEP SEQ) (A08B-9200/9201-J502 Ver. 8.1, 8.2, 8.3) PMC-RB4/RC4 (A08B-9200!9201-J502 ver.8.0, 8.2, 8.3)

3)

FORMAT-C
*

PMCRB4.RB4 (STEP SEQ)IRCWRC4(STEP SEQ) (A08B-9200/9201-J502 Ver 8.4 or later) PMC-RBMRBG!NB2 In case of PMCRBWRC4, FAPT LADDER creates two types of source program as above mentioned. ver.8.1. For the operation of conversion refer to next chapter 6.4 Conversion from FORMAT-A to FORMAT-B Therefore, the source program of ver.8.0 needs conversion for using on

Note)

A10-4

APPENDIX

10 MANAGING

A SOURCE PROGRAM

5.

CONVERSION

FROM FORMAT-A TO FORMAT-B


is updated from ver.8.0 or earlier

When FAPT LADDER

for PMC-RB4iRC4(A08B-9200!9201-J502)

to ver.8.1 or later, it needs source program conversion. The operation is the following.

1)

Convert the source program FORMAT-A LADDER(A08B-9200!9201-J502)

into an all-format

mnemonic

data with FAPT

ver.8.1 or later.

2)

Convert the mnemonic The conversion

data into a source program with the same FAPR LADDER. by above mentioned.

is completed

In case of using a control operation is the following. Do the operation

statement

file, which

has extension

.#I.$,

for combining

modules,

the

of 1) by each source program in the control statement. data into an all-format mnemonic data.

Combine each mnemonic Do the operation of 2).

Note)

It is possible

to use FORMAT-A

without

conversion.

In that case, you need to modify a

%%%FLSET.CNF. For the

But it is not recommended. refer to the APPENDIX 7 System configuration file

%%%FLSET.CNF

%%%FLSET.CNF.

6.

COPYING AND MOVING A SOURCE PROGRAM


to enable the copying or moving of a source program.

FAPT LADDER does not support a function Because the source program file manipulation is managed directory

as described with

above, it can be copied or moved by using or another MS-DOS command. Only

on a specified

the COPY

programs for an identical

model can be handled in this way.

For example, following

to make a backup copy on floppy disk of the source program shown above, enter the at the MS-DOS prompt:

command

1)

Suppose that the floppy disk drive is B:.

2)

Create a source program storage directory

on B:.

A > MKDIR B: +r BACKUP

[RET]

3)

Copy all files under the directories

specified

with the source program name.

The source program is copied. To edit the copied source program, program name. start FAPT LADDER and specify B:Y BACKUP as the source

A10-5

APPENDIX 11 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FILE %%%FLSET.CNF.

APPENDIX 11

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FILE %%% FLSET. CNF.


is a file of the text form and some setting parameters, by which the behavior

%%%FLSET.CNF

of FAPT LADDER is decided, are described there. The file exits in the directory in which the system of FAPT LADDER is installed. And the parameters can be changed by a text editor on the market.

1. Sample of %%%FLSET.CNF
;IIIII=tll trrfllllllllllltlll1111111111111110 IPttLtllLlDlttPOltt=It

FAPT LADDER Initial Setting File

( 'key word =' <= Scharactets ) t ;rPlrllLIIDl====ltll IILDIIIILrt=rlllllPL-======-= Illll'llttllllltlll=

f =t=tff== System Setup ====t=== lS: : editor =; Text Editor : ladkey = 1; Ladder editing key buffer size ( 1 <= ladkey <- 16 ) ;
:

password=O;
: f

;
i

0:No password l:Password(R/W)and(R) 2:Password(R/W) 3:Password(R)

===f==== Utility Information ==t==== lU: : N = UTILITY; Utility Guidance


i

Fl F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7

= DOS / command.com; = file List / ISCREENZ; = flOadat / FLOADAT; =; =; =; =;

F8 =; F9 =;

FlO=;
i :

Soft Key Guidance Soft Key Guidance Soft Key Guidance Soft Key Guidance Soft Key Guidance Soft Key Guidance Soft Key Guidance [FE] Soft Key Guidance [F9] Soft Key Guidance [FlO] Soft Key Guidance

[Fl] [FZ] (F3) [F4] [FSJ [F6] [F7]

6 EXE h EXE 6 EXE L EXE C EXE h EXE 6 EXE 6 EXE & EXE 6 EXE

*T;
.

======== Source program type r======= '1' or '2'. PMC+B4(STEP SEQ) only supports '1' or '2'. PMC-RCI(STEP SEQ) only supports

'2; RB4_STEP=2; '2; RC4 RC4_STEP=2;


i

LB4

'2'. '2'.

IEOFI

All-l

APPENDIX

11 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

FILE %%% FLSET.CNF.

All parameters Hereafter,

in the %%%FLSET.CNF

are described is explained

following

the form of key word = .

content of setting parameters

by each item.

1)

Specification

of source program type

a) Function
FAPT LADDER source, editing will newly create the source program at conversion of mnemonic -> new source program and decompilation.

The type of created source program is decided at this time.

key word By each PMC model, a setting parameter will be described succeeding ========= Source program type = = = = = = = = . Key word shows the model and uses the same character information on the status line displayed the line of I* T;

string as the display

of model

in each screen of FAPT LADDER. = , RC4 = .

This setting is effective


_ .I w 1 = FORMAT-A

only in case of Key word RB4

As for the value, either "1" or 2 is effective.

- 2

= FORMAT-B

It is FORMAT-B of ZOOM

in initialization.

When the source program type is FORMAT-B,

the function

and G-SRCH

can be used.

All

-2

APPENDIX

12

INQUIRY FORM

APPENDIX 12 INQUIRY FORM


Comoanv name Section Phone No. Fax No. FANUC sales person ( t 1 )

Person in charqe Address

No.

Product name

Ordering code

2 3 4 5

[Usage environment] Machine DOS tvpe used (PC) Version Yes I No (Manufacturer: (Manufacturer: (Manufacturer: (Manufacturer: and AUTOEXECBAT files on a sheet and attach it to this form. 1 1

MS-DOS

EMS board: Other equipment

(printer, etc.)

Please print out the CONFIG.SYS [Details of inquiry]

Please use this form when you have any questions

about this product.

AlZ-1

INDEX

(PMC-RA~/RA~/RB~/RB~/RB~!RB~!RC~/RC~/NB!NB~)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 99

A Program Configuration ACTIVATION

Screen

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3- 1 l-15

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

<B>
BASICOPERATION Basic Operation BOOT SYSTEM BUSY control ............................................... ................................................... OPERATING PROCEDURE (FOR THE FS20) ................ l-17 3- 6 A5 - 1 2- 4

....................................................

<c>
CAUTIONS Changing Changing Changing Command COMMON Common FOR USING THE O/S Printer Output Format ..................................... ...................................... .................................. .................................... A7 - 1 2 - 12 l103 the Order of Subprograms the paper selection input during startup OPERATIONS name

2 - 14 2- 1 .................. 2- 1 1 - 19 2- 2 1 - 94

........................................

FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT ........................................ ............................................

System Operations settings

Communications Compilation Conversion Conversion

..................................................... of a mnemonic file to a source program file ....................... .......................

1 - 152 l-150 2- 8 2- 9

of a source program to a mnemonic Program

Convert the PMC Type of Sequence Convert with signal address converter Converting Converting a step sequence

.............................

................................... to the model .................

program according editing

1 - 113 2- 8 3 - 10 3- 9 3- 9

by system parameter

..................................

Creating a step sequence Creating a Step Sequence Creating a subprogram

program

....................................

........................................... ..............................

of the step sequence

Data conversion DataFlow

(return codes)

........................................

2- 5 3-3 2-5 Al-l l-110 l-109

....................................................... ............................................ .........................................

Data start and end codes DATATRANSFERCABLES Decompilation DOScommand

.................................................. .................................................

<E>
Editing EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 3-6

Error detection Error detection

and handling and messages

.......................................... .........................................

2- 7 2- 6 A3 - 1

ERROR MESSAGES

..............................................

<F>
FLOPPY CASSETTE FUNCTION ADAPTER + 3.5 floppy disk (P-G format) THE PMC-UM WITH RAM ............... 1 - 149 A2 - 1 2- 1 FOR OPERATING .................... ......................

Function for Transferring

Data between

the P-G and PC

<H>
Handy File + 3.5 floppy disk (MS-DOS format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . l-147

l/O module editing IBM PC/AT operating Input/Output Input/Output INQUIRYFORM Installation

................................................ environment ..................................... F-MODEL D Mate) ...............

l-70 l-10 l-134 1-119 A12l-11 1-5 Net comment) to ROM format file1 - 103 1

for PMC-QA

(FANUC SYSTEM

................................................... ................................................ ..............................................

Procedure

INSTALLATION

...................................................

It is possible to choose output data (SymbolComment,

<I_>
Ladder diagram editing Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-26 1-116 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MANAGING MEMORY

A SOURCE

PROGRAM

.................................. (FOR THE PMCRAl/RA3, NB, AND QC) ............. ......

AlOA6-1 1-142 1-17 1-113 l-68 l-150 l-153 l-21

CARD COMPATIBILITY

Memory card interface Menu Configuration Merge

in the personal computer ...............................................

and memory card

........................................................ ................................................. ............................................... .............................................

Message editing Mnemonic Mnemonic Editing

file format

Model Setting MODULAR

................................................... (PMC-RA3/RB3/RC3 ONLY) ....................

PROGRAMMING

A4-1

co>
Operating Environment .............................................. 1- 6 l-22 1 - 95, l-110,3-4 1-112 1 - 1,3-l OPERATION Operation Outputting OVERVIEW .................................................... .............................................. to split files ............................................

...................................................

<P>
Password set function environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 7 l-85 3- 1 2-4 PC9801 operating Printout

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . with the Step Sequence Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Programming Protocol

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ROM writers (PMC writer, FA writer)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

l-122

<s>
Sample mnemonic Sample mnemonic SETTINGAMODEL Setting form feed Setting line feed files (all-format) files (single-format) ................................... ................................. 1-166 l-157 3-4 2-23 2-23 information .............. 2-19 2-20 ............. 2-21 2-16 2-16 2-22 2-22 2-22 2-15 2-23 2- 14 2- 19 2-14 A9-1 2-21 2-20 2-21 2-11 l-60 ..................... All-l l-73 ............................................... ................................................. ................................................. list output format guidance list output information list read/write

Setting the cross-reference Setting the cross-reference Setting the cross-reference Setting the left margin Setting the line spacing

.......................... information

coil guidance

............................................. ............................................ ....................................

Setting the output format guidance Setting the output format

........................................... ........................................ ................................

Setting the output information

Setting the printer model and print paper Setting the read/write coil guidance

.................................... ............................

Setting the spacing between the LADDER net Setting the title of printout Setting the top margin SOFTWARE Specifying Specifying Specifying VERSION

...........................................

............................................. TABLE ....................................... list linefeed ............................... ........................... ............................

the cross-reference the cross-reference the cross-reference

list output format list page break

Standard Symbol Data Symbol and comment SYSTEM

............................................. editing ........................................ FILE %%% FLSET.CNF. ..........................................

CONFIGURATION editing

System parameter

<T>
The Configration of a Sequence Program ................................. 3- 2 l-105 ........ l-170 l-25 ...................... A8 - 1 l-124 B) ...... l-131 The list of source program The note if the step sequence Title data editing ......................................... function is selected when setting a model

................................................. MESSAGE DATA (CHGMES)

TOOL FOR CHANGING Transfer Transfer

to and from PMC-UM to and from PMC-N/NA

(FANUC Series 0) ......................... (FANUC Series 15-MODEL A, -MODEL

Revision FAPT LADDER (For Personal Computer)

Record OPERATORS MANUAL (B-66131 E)

05

Dec., 95

- Corresponding descriptions for PMC-RBSIRBGiNB2

* Addition of PMC-MODEL RA3/RB3/FKX/PAl/PA3/QC/NB . Addition of symbol and comment edit function on Ladder Edit
screen

04

Jun., 93

* Addition * Addition . Addition . Change

of of of of

external ROM format file conversion function cross reference print format setting function mnemonic edit label/subprogram Item symbol and comment edit function

03

Dec., 92

Correction of errors

02

Sep., 92

Total revision

01

Jun., 90

Edition

Date

Contents

Edition

Date

Contents

EUROPEAN

HEADQUARTERS

- GRAND-DUCHt

DE LUXEMBOURG

GE Fanuc Automation Europe S.A. Zone Industrielle L6469 Echternach 4 (+352) 727979- 1 I (+352) 727979-214 BELGIUM / NETHERLANDS GE Fanuc Automation Europe S.A. - Netherlands Branch Postbus 7230 - NI.4800 GE Breda Minervum 1603A - NI.4817 ZL Breda %I (+31) 765783 201 (CNC) %I (+31) 765783 212 (PLC) I (+31) 765870 181 FRANCE GE Fanuc Automation France S.A. 45, rue du Bois Chaland Lisses F-91 029 Evry Cedex %I (+33) 1 69 89 70 39 (CNC) %I (+33) 1 69 89 70 20 (PLC) I (+33) 1 69 89 70 49 GERMANY GE Fanuc Automation GmbH Elberfelder Str. 45 D-40724 Hilden %I (+49) 2103 87011 (Laser/CNC) %I (+49) 2103 240 415 (PLC) I (+49) 2103 87 160 (Laser/CNC) I (+49) 2103 242 153 (PLC) GERMANY GE Fanuc Automation Deutschland Bensheimer Str. 61 D-65428 Russelsheim 4 (+49) 6142 357600 I (+49) 6142 357611 GmbH CZECH REPUBLIC GE Fanuc Automation Europe S.A. c/o GETSCO Inc. Husova 5 CZ-110 00 Praha 1 4 (+420) 22440 1284 I (+420) 22440 1284 GERMANY GE Fanuc Automation GmbH Bernhauser StraBe 45 D-73765 Neuhausen %I (+49) 7158 187 I (+49) 7158 187 455 I (+49) 7158 187 466 a.d.F 400 (CNC) (PLC)

GERMANY GE Fanuc Automation GmbH Otto-Schmerbach-Str. 20 D-091 17 Chemnitz 4 (+49) 371 8448 113 (CNC) %I (+49) 371 8448 114 (PLC) I (+49) 371 8448 115 GE Fanuc Automation Nordic AB Hammarbacken 4 S-l 9149 Sollentuna 4 (+46) 8 444 5520 I (+46) 8 444 5521 ITALY GE Power Controls Italia S.p.a Via Tortona 27 I-201 44 Milan0 4 (+39) 2 4242 280 (PLC) I (+39) 2 4242 511 (PLC) SPAIN GE Power Controls Iberica S.A. Calle Miiio, S/N E-08223 Terrassa (Barcelona) %I (+34) 3 736 58 28 (PLC) I (+34) 3 783 45 82 (PLC) UNITED KINGDOM GE Fanuc Automation (UK) Ltd. Unit 1 - Mill Square Featherstone Road Wolverton Mill South Milton Keynes MK12 5BZ %I (+44) 1908 84 4000 I (+44) 1908 84 4001
01/98

ITALY GE Fanuc Automation Italia S.r.1. Piazza Tirana 24/4B I-201 44 Milan0 %I (+39) 2 417 176 (CNC) I (+39) 2 419 669 (CNC) SPAIN GE Fanuc Automation Espaiia S.A. Poligono Industrial Olaso Calle Olaso, 57 - Locales 10 y 11 E-20870 Elgoibar %I (+34) 43 744 450 (CNC) I (+34) 43 744 421 (CNC) SWITZERLAND GE Fanuc Automation Filiale Suisse/Niederlassung Schweiz MullerstraBe 3 CH-2562 Port %I (+41) 32 332 87 00 (CNC) %I (+41) 32 332 87 04 (PLC) I (+41) 32 332 87 01 (CNC) I (+41) 32 332 87 05 (PLC)

TECHNICAL REPORT (MANUAL)

NO.TMN 98/

Date1998 General Manager of Software Laboratory FAPT LADDER OPERATORS SUPPLEMENTARY MANUAL (For personal computer)

1. Communicate this report to: Your information only GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E FANUC Robotics CINCINNATI MILACRON Machine tool builder Sales agency End user 2. Summary for Sales Documents

3. Notice This manual describes the additional functions of FAPT LADDER for personal computer 4. Attached Document Drawing B-66131E/05-5 (1/8 to 8/8) No.

IDE V.G.M

Original section of issue Manager Chief Person in Charge

FANUC

FAPT LADDER OPERATORS SUPPLEMENTARY MANUAL (For personal computer)

TYPE OF APPLIED TECHNICAL DOCUMENTS

Name Spec.No./Ed.

FAPT LADDER OPERATORS MANUAL (For personal computer) B-66131E/05

SUMMARY OF CHANGE

Group

Name/Outline The system of 3.5-inch FD version has been added. Working under a Command Prompt of a full screen of Windows NT4.0.

New, Add, Correct, Delete Add.

Applicable Date July 1998

Basic Function Optional Function Unit Maintenance Parts Notice Correction Another

TITLE

FAPT LADDER OPERATORS SUPPLEMENTARY MANUAL (FOR PERSONAL COMPUTER) 01


EDIT

98.06.22
DATE

Hanaoka Additioanl 3.5-inch FD version


DESIG. DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66131E/05-5
SHEET

CUST.

1/8

FAPT LADDER OPERATORS SUPPLEMENTARY MANUAL (For personal computer)

Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. OUTLINE ................................................................ ................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ .................................................................................... ....................................................3 ....................3 APPLIED SOFTWARE ................................................................ ................................................................................................ .............................................................................................. ..............................................................3 ..............................3 ADDITION OF SYSTEM SYSTEM OF 3.5-INCH FD VERSION ................................................................ ........................................................................... ...........................................3 ...........3 WORKING UNDER A COMMAND PROMPT OF A FULL SCREEN OF WINDOWS NT4.0 .............4 .............4 SOFTWARE VERSION TABLE ................................................................ ................................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................6 ................6

TITLE

FAPT LADDER OPERATORS SUPPLEMENTARY MANUAL (FOR PERSONAL COMPUTER) 01


EDIT

98.06.22
DATE

Hanaoka Additioanl 3.5-inch FD version


DESIG. DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66131E/05-5
SHEET

CUST.

2/8

1. Outline
The following specification and function have been added to the PMC programming software FAPT LADDER for personal computer. The system of 3.5-inch FD version . Working under a Command Prompt of a full screen of Windows NT 4.0. This manual is a supplementary manual for these additional functions. Other points (existing functions and operation, etc.) are described in the following manual. Name of Manual Spec.No. Reference Items FAPT LADDER B-66131E Existing functions and OPERATORS MANUAL operation for FAPT LADDER

2. Applied Software
The additional functions described herein apply to the following software. FAPT LADDER for IBM-PC/AT series (3.5-inch FD) Software Series Version PMC-L/M/P system A08B-9201-J500#EN07 08.0 PMC-N/NA system A08B-9201-J501#EN07 07.0 PMC-SA/SB/SC/NB/PA/QC system A08B-9201-J502#EN07 09.0 PMC-L module A08B-9201-J600#EN07 06.0 PMC-M module A08B-9201-J601#EN07 07.0 PMC-M(MMC) module A08B-9201-J602#EN07 06.0 PMC-SA/PA module A08B-9201-J603#EN07 05.3 PMC-SB/SC module A08B-9201-J604#EN07 07.1 PMC-QC module A08B-9201-J605#EN07 02.3 PMC-NB module A08B-9201-J606#EN07 03.1 FAPT LADDER for PC98 series (3.5-inch FD) (Note) Software Series Version PMC-L/M/P system A08B-9200-J500#JP07 06.3 PMC-N/NA system A08B-9200-J501#JP07 06.3 PMC-SA/SB/SC/NB/PA/QC system A08B-9200-J502#JP07 08.9 PMC-L module A08B-9200-J600#JP07 06.0 PMC-M module A08B-9200-J601#JP07 07.0 PMC-M(MMC) module A08B-9200-J602#JP07 06.0 PMC-SA/PA module A08B-9200-J603#JP07 05.3 PMC-SB/SC module A08B-9200-J604#JP07 07.1 PMC-QC module A08B-9200-J605#JP07 02.3 PMC-NB module A08B-9200-J606#JP07 03.1 (Note) These FD are the 1.44MB format FD. If the machine can not read the 1.44MB format FD, these FD are not available for the machine.

3. Addition of system of 3.5-inch FD version


The 3.5-inch FD version has been added to the PMC programming software FAPT
TITLE

FAPT LADDER OPERATORS SUPPLEMENTARY MANUAL (FOR PERSONAL COMPUTER) 01


EDIT

98.06.22
DATE

Hanaoka Additioanl 3.5-inch FD version


DESIG. DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66131E/05-5
SHEET

CUST.

3/8

LADDER for personal computer. Refer to the 2. Applied Software about kinds of software of 3.5-inch FD version.

4. Working under a Command Prompt of a full screen of Windows NT4.0


(Replace 2.1 Operating Environment) 2.1 Operating Envaironment To use the software, the requirements indicated in the table below must be satisfied. Before installing the software, check these requirements. Conventional memory Hard Disk OS IBM PC/AT NEC PC9801 Free area of 500K bytes or more is required (Note1) (Note2). About 3M bytes is required for installing the system (Note3). PC-DOS Version 3.3 or later MS-DOS Version 3.1 or later Windows95 (MS-DOS mode) Windows NT 4.0Command Prompt of full screen EPSON VP1000 NEC PR201H Epson VP1000Note 4 A LIM type EMS (expanded memory specification) memory board may be required depending on the PMC model and the size of a sequence program to be created. For details, see 2.1.1. The EGA graphic interface is . required

Printer EMS Others

(Note 1) If the standerd memory size of the machine is insufficient, memory expansion is required. (Note 2) Even if the machine has 640K-byte memory, the memory may not be large enough when an installed driver, for example, uses a large memory space. The size of free space in conventional memory can be checked with the MS-DOS command CHKDSK. (Note 3) In addition, an area for storing sequence program data is required. (Note 4) To use the Epson VP1000 with an NEC PC9801, a setting file modification is required. For details, see Section 1.2 in Part . (Replace 2.1.2 IBM PC/AT operating environment) (Present) (1) CONFIG.SYS, AUTOEXEC.BAT (2)Using EMS

TITLE

FAPT LADDER OPERATORS SUPPLEMENTARY MANUAL (FOR PERSONAL COMPUTER) 01


EDIT

98.06.22
DATE

Hanaoka Additioanl 3.5-inch FD version


DESIG. DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66131E/05-5
SHEET

CUST.

4/8

(Correct) (1) CONFIG.SYS, AUTOEXEC.BAT (Note) Windows NT4.0 uses CONFIG.NT instead of CONFIG.SYS. (2)Using EMS (Note) Above setting is not necessay for Windows NT4.0. (Add after 2.2 Installation Procedure) Note 3) When you install the program of the system or module under Windows NT 4.0, you must enter commands under a Command Prompt of a full screen of Windows NT 4.0. The Command Prompt Window appears when you select the [Start] menu and choose the [Command Prompt] from the [Programs]. If the Command Prompt Window is not full screen display, press ALT+ENTER keys to switch to full screen display. (Replace a part of 3 ACTIVATION) (Present) (1) Activation method [Operation] Activate FAPT LADDER with the following commands: B: >A: A: >CD FLADDER A: FLADDER> FLADDER

(Note 1) Before starting up FAPT LADDER, change the current drive and current directory to the drive and directory in which the system file exists . If FAPT LADDER is started up with path designation, or by specifying different directory as the current directory, FAPT LADDER may malfunction. (Correct) (1) Activation method [Operation] Activate FAPT LADDER with the following commands: B: >A: A: >CD FLADDER A: FLADDER> FLADDER

(Note )

(Note 1) (Note 2)

(Note 1) When you install the program of the system or module under Windows NT 4.0, you must enter the commands under a Command Prompt of a full screen of
TITLE

FAPT LADDER OPERATORS SUPPLEMENTARY MANUAL (FOR PERSONAL COMPUTER) 01


EDIT

98.06.22
DATE

Hanaoka Additioanl 3.5-inch FD version


DESIG. DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66131E/05-5
SHEET

CUST.

5/8

Windows NT 4.0. The Command Prompt Window appears when you select the [Start] menu and choose the [Command Prompt] from the [Programs]. If the Command Prompt Window is not in full screen display mode, press ALT+ENTER keys to switch to full screen display. (Note 2) Before starting up FAPT LADDER, change the current drive and current directory to the drive and directory in which the system file exists. If FAPT LADDER is started up with path designation, or by specifying different directory as the current directory, FAPT LADDER may malfunction.

5. Software Version Table


(Replace a part of APPNDIX 9 SOFTWARE VERSION TABLE) Combination of diverse system floppy disks (1) Software -JXXX Combinations of versions 03.0 PMC-SA/SB/SC/NB 502 01.0 03.6 02.0 /PA/QC 04.0 03.0 PMC-N/NA 501 01.1 04.8 03.1 02.3 03.0 04.0 02.0 PMC-L/M/P 500 01.1 04.8 01.12 02.3

04.0 06.0

TITLE

FAPT LADDER OPERATORS SUPPLEMENTARY MANUAL (FOR PERSONAL COMPUTER) 01


EDIT

98.06.22
DATE

Hanaoka Additioanl 3.5-inch FD version


DESIG. DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66131E/05-5
SHEET

CUST.

6/8

Combination of diverse system floppy disks (2) Software -JXXX Combinations of versions PMC-SA/SB/SC/NB 502 06.1 06.2 06.3 06.4 /PA/QC PMC-N/NA 501 05.0 06.1 06.2

06.3 07.0 (Note2) PMC-L/M/P 500 05.0 06.1 06.2 06.3 08.0 (Note3) (Note1) 09.0 is for IBM PC/AT. If NEC PC98 series, this field is 07.008.9. (Note2) 07.0 is for IBM PC/AT. If NEC PC98 series, this field is 06.3. (Note3) 08.0 is for IBM PC/AT. If NEC PC98 series, this field is 06.3.

07.0 09.0 (Note1)

Combinations of system floppy disks and module floppy disks (1) Software -JXXX Combinations of versions PMC-SA/SB/SC/NB 502 01.1 02.0 03.0 04.0 /PA/QC 03.6 04.2 SA/PA MODULE 603 01.0 02.0 02.1 03.0 (PMC-SA1/SA2/SA3 03.4 /PA1/PA3) SB/SC MODULE 04.0 604 01.0 02.0 03.0 03.1 04.4 (PMC-SB/SB2/SB3 03.2 /SB4/SB5/SB6/SC /SC3/SC4) QC MODULE 605 (PMC-QC) NB MODULE 606 (PMC-NB/NB2)

05.0 06.0 04.0 04.5 04.6 01.0

TITLE

FAPT LADDER OPERATORS SUPPLEMENTARY MANUAL (FOR PERSONAL COMPUTER) 01


EDIT

98.06.22
DATE

Hanaoka Additioanl 3.5-inch FD version


DESIG. DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66131E/05-5
SHEET

CUST.

7/8

Combinations of system floppy disks and module floppy disks (2) Software -JXXX Combination of versions PMC-SA/SB/SC/NB 502 06.1 06.2 08.0 08.3 08.5 /PA/QC 07.1 08.2 08.4 08.7

05.0 05.1 05.2 SA/PA MODULE 603 04.1 04.2 04.4 (PMC-SA1/SA2/SA3 /PA1/PA3) 604 04.7 04.8 06.0 06.1 07.0 07.1 SB/SC MODULE 05.0 (PMC-SB/SB2/SB3 /SB4/SB5/SB6/SC (Note2) /SC3/SC4) QC MODULE 605 01.1 01.2 02.0 02.1 02.2 02.3 (PMC-QC) 02.0 02.1 03.0 03.1 NB MODULE 606 01.0 01.1 01.2 (PMC-NB/NB2) (Note1) 09.0 is for IBM PC/AT. If NEC PC98 series, this field is 08.808.9. (Note2) When using PMC-SB4/SC4, install the PMC-SB/SC MODULE floppy disk(-J604) at least of all installation.

08.8 09.0 (Note1) 05.3

TITLE

FAPT LADDER OPERATORS SUPPLEMENTARY MANUAL (FOR PERSONAL COMPUTER) 01


EDIT

98.06.22
DATE

Hanaoka Additioanl 3.5-inch FD version


DESIG. DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66131E/05-5
SHEET

CUST.

8/8